Dell Manuals for PowerEdge SC1435
Dell Manuals for PowerEdge SC1435
-> Accéder au site Dell
-> Accéder aux CODES PROMO et Bons de réduction Dell
-> Voir d'autres manuels Dell
Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
Manuals for PowerEdge SC1435
| Title |
Type |
Language |
View |
| Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch |
om |
de-de |
View |
| Rack Installation Guide |
sg2 |
en-us |
View |
| Guide d'installation sur bâti |
sg2 |
fr-fr |
View |
| Installing Broadcom NetXtreme Drivers and TOE |
sg4 |
en-us |
View |
| Broadcom NetXtreme 드라이버 및 TOE 설치 |
sg4 |
ko-kr |
View |
| מדריך תחילת עבודה |
sg |
he-il |
View |
| Instrukcja uruchomienia |
sg |
po-pl |
View |
| Guia dos primeiros passos |
sg |
pt-br |
View |
| 信息更新 |
ug |
zh-cn |
View |
| Hardware Owner’s Manual |
om |
en-us |
View |
| Manual del propietario de hardware |
om |
es-mx |
View |
| Instrucciones de instalación Procesadores AMD™ Opteron™ series 2000 y 8000 |
sg3 |
es-mx |
View |
| 安装说明 AMD™ Opteron™ 2000 和 8000 系列处理器 |
sg3 |
zh-cn |
View |
| Handbuch zum Einstieg |
sg |
de-de |
View |
| Guía de introducción |
sg |
es-mx |
View |
| Actualización de información |
ug |
es-mx |
View |
| Mise à jour des informations |
ug |
fr-fr |
View |
| 硬件用户手册 |
om |
zh-cn |
View |
| Rack-Installationshandbuch |
sg2 |
de-de |
View |
| Guía de instalación del estante |
sg2 |
es-mx |
View |
| ラック取り付けガイド |
sg2 |
ja-jp |
View |
| Installation Instructions AMD™ Opteron™ 2000 and 8000 Series Processors |
sg3 |
en-us |
View |
| Instructions d'installation Processeurs AMD™ Opteron™ séries 2000 et 8000 |
sg3 |
fr-fr |
View |
| 取り付け手順 AMD™ Opteron™ プロセ ッサ 2000 シリーズと 8000 シリーズ |
sg3 |
ja-jp |
View |
| 설치 지침 AMD™ Opteron™ 2000 및 8000 계열 프로세서 |
sg3 |
ko-kr |
View |
| Installation von Broadcom NetXtreme-Treibern und TOE |
sg4 |
de-de |
View |
| Installation de pilotes Broadcom NetXtreme et du moteur TOE |
sg4 |
fr-fr |
View |
| Začínáme |
sg |
cs-cz |
View |
| 시작 설명서 |
sg |
ko-kr |
View |
| Informationsaktualisierung |
ug |
de-de |
View |
| アップデート情報 |
ug |
ja-jp |
View |
| Manuel du propriétaire |
om |
fr-fr |
View |
| ハードウェアオーナーズマニュアル |
om |
ja-jp |
View |
| 하드웨어 소유자 설명서 |
om |
ko-kr |
View |
| Installationsanleitung für Prozessoren der Reihen AMD™ Opteron™ 2000 und 8000 |
sg3 |
de-de |
View |
| Instalación de controladores Broadcom NetXtreme y TOE |
sg4 |
es-mx |
View |
| Broadcom NetXtreme のドライ バと TOE のインストール |
sg4 |
ja-jp |
View |
| 安装 Broadcom NetXtreme 程序和 TOE |
sg4 |
zh-cn |
View |
| Getting Started With Your System |
sg |
en-us |
View |
| Guide de mise en route |
sg |
fr-fr |
View |
| はじめに |
sg |
ja-jp |
View |
| Руководство по началу работы |
sg |
ru-rs |
View |
| 使用入门指南 |
sg |
zh-cn |
View |
| Information Update |
ug |
en-us |
View |
| 정보 업데이트 |
ug |
ko-kr |
View |
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici
Autres manuels :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Dell-Product-support..> 15-May-2013 07:01 1.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 15-May-2013 07:01 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 07:01 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 07:00 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 15-May-2013 07:00 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 15-May-2013 07:00 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 15-May-2013 07:00 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 15-May-2013 06:59 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-W50..> 15-May-2013 06:59 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 15-May-2013 06:59 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 15-May-2013 06:59 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 15-May-2013 06:58 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Stu..> 15-May-2013 06:58 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 15-May-2013 06:57 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Stu..> 15-May-2013 06:57 2.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:57 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:57 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:56 3.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:56 3.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 11:55 1.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 11:55 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 11:55 1.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 08:04 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 08:02 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 08:02 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 08:01 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 08:02 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 08:02 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 08:01 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 08:01 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:43 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 07:42 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:21 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:21 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 07:20 1.8M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 19:02 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 19:02 2.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ali..> 12-May-2013 19:02 3.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:01 3.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:01 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 19:00 3.4M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 19:00 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 18:58 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:58 3.4M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:28 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:19 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:19 2.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:18 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 18:18 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 12-May-2013 18:17 2.6M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 18:17 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 18:17 2.6M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 18:16 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:43 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:35 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:35 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:34 3.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:34 2.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:33 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:33 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 12:32 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:32 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:39 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 12-May-2013 17:38 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:38 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Vos..> 12-May-2013 17:38 3.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:37 3.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 12-May-2013 17:36 3.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:35 3.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:35 4.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 12-May-2013 17:35 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Opt..> 12-May-2013 17:34 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:34 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 17:33 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 17:33 2.0M
Dell-Drivers-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:05 4.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:05 4.1M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:04 4.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:04 4.3M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:02 4.3M
Dell-Drivers-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:02 4.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 12:01 2.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:01 2.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 12:00 2.5M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 12:00 2.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:59 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 11:59 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 12-May-2013 11:59 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:59 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-LCD..> 12-May-2013 11:58 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:58 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:57 2.8M
Dell-Product-support..> 12-May-2013 11:57 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:56 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 12-May-2013 11:56 2.8M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 15:25 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-CPi-A-..> 10-May-2013 15:24 2.7M
Dell-Configurer-et-u..> 10-May-2013 15:24 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-D410-M..> 10-May-2013 15:24 3.0M
Dell-Symantec-Backup..> 10-May-2013 15:23 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 10-May-2013 15:23 3.4M
Dell-Studio-1735-Man..> 10-May-2013 15:22 3.1M
Dell-Latitude-D620-E..> 10-May-2013 15:21 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-E6430-..> 10-May-2013 15:21 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-M..> 10-May-2013 15:20 4.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6410-..> 10-May-2013 15:20 3.8M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 15:19 4.3M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 10-May-2013 15:19 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 10-May-2013 14:23 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 10-May-2013 14:23 3.2M
Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 10-May-2013 14:22 3.4M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 10-May-2013 14:22 4.5M
Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 10-May-2013 14:21 4.6M
Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 10-May-2013 14:20 1.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 10-May-2013 14:20 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 10-May-2013 14:20 1.9M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 10-May-2013 14:19 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 10-May-2013 13:46 2.8M
Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.7M
Dell-Comment-utilise..> 10-May-2013 13:41 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 10-May-2013 11:17 4.7M
Dell-Precision-690-M..> 10-May-2013 11:16 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 11:16 3.9M
Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15 3.9M
Dell-Precision-360-M..> 10-May-2013 11:15 4.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 10-May-2013 11:14 4.4M
Dell-Precision-450-M..> 10-May-2013 11:13 4.6M
Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:13 4.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 10-May-2013 11:12 5.5M
Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 10-May-2013 11:12 5.6M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 10-May-2013 11:10 6.1M
Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 10-May-2013 11:10 6.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:30 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.1M
Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.2M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.3M
Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19 3.4M
Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19 2.0M
Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 10-May-2013 10:22 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.1M
Dell-Precision-T7600..> 10-May-2013 10:21 3.2M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.3M
Dell-Precision-M4700..> 10-May-2013 10:20 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4600..> 10-May-2013 10:19 3.4M
Dell-Precision-390-M..> 10-May-2013 10:19 2.0M
Dell-Precision-610-M..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 10-May-2013 10:18 2.3M
Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 10-May-2013 10:17 2.8M
Dell-Precision-370-M..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 10-May-2013 10:16 3.2M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 08-May-2013 10:57 2.9M
Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:54 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52 4.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.2M
Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.6M
Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.9M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.5M
Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.1M
Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45 2.6M
Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43 3.1M
Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43 3.4M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.3M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.5M
Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41 3.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 4.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.4M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.3M
Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03 2.5M
Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.2M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.9M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.0M
Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.5M
Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33 4.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32 4.3M
Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.4M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.7M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.5M
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42 3.1M
Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage
Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation
Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes
Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213
Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL
Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400
Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n
Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up
Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION
Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel
Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels
Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel
Dell-Client-Management-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue
Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel
Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel
Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Mobile-Jamz
Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels
Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK
Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580
Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L
Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu
Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais
Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide
Dell-Inspiron-Manuels
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700
Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280
Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Acceder-au-site-Dell
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais
Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX
Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3
AlienwareAurora-R4
lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2
Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair
Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
DellDimension1100Series
Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire
alienwareX51
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 08-May-2013 10:52 4.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 08-May-2013 10:51 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:50 3.2M
Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.6M
Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:49 3.9M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.5M
Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 08-May-2013 10:48 4.1M
Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 08-May-2013 10:47 4.8M
Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 08-May-2013 10:45 5.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 08-May-2013 08:46 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 08-May-2013 08:46 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:45 2.6M
Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:44 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 08-May-2013 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 08-May-2013 08:43 3.1M
Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 08-May-2013 08:43 3.4M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.3M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:42 3.5M
Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 08-May-2013 08:41 3.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 08-May-2013 08:40 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 4.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 08-May-2013 08:39 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 08-May-2013 08:38 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.4M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 08-May-2013 08:37 3.3M
Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 07-May-2013 22:03 2.5M
Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 07-May-2013 22:01 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 07-May-2013 22:00 2.2M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 07-May-2013 21:30 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 07-May-2013 21:26 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 07-May-2013 21:26 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 07-May-2013 21:25 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 07-May-2013 21:24 2.9M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.0M
Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 07-May-2013 21:23 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 07-May-2013 21:22 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 07-May-2013 21:21 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 07-May-2013 21:20 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.5M
Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 07-May-2013 21:19 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 07-May-2013 21:18 2.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 06-May-2013 19:33 4.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 06-May-2013 19:32 4.3M
Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 06-May-2013 19:31 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 06-May-2013 19:10 3.4M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.7M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 06-May-2013 19:09 3.5M
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 06-May-2013 18:42 3.1M
Code-Promo-Dell.htm 04-Feb-2013 09:17 1.0M
Sony-NV-U83N-Manuels..> 02-Feb-2013 09:00 5.0M
Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 3.0M
Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15 1.0M
Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.1M
Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09 3.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08 1.7M
Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 2.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06 1.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42 3.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.8M
Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40 3.9M
Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20 2.6M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18 2.5M
Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07 2.3M
Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12 92K
Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29 2.1M
Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24 1.8M
Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.8M
Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25 3.4M
Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03 3.1M
Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57 2.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45 1.8M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44 1.9M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.3M
Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43 2.2M
Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 4.9M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12 5.0M
Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42 3.2M
Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40 2.8M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.0M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39 3.1M
Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 4.1M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36 4.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06 5.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 2.6M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04 3.6M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.1M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03 4.4M
Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02 4.8M
Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01 5.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59 2.4M
Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.6M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08 3.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07 3.8M
Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06 4.0M
Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05 4.3M
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19 3.1M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.7M
Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 1.9M
Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.3M
Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14 4.1M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13 4.5M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 4.7M
Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.7M
Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11 2.9M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10 3.0M
Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26 2.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 2.6M
Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07 1.9M
Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00 1.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 1.9M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59 2.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.6M
Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.8M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55 3.6M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54 3.8M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.1M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.2M
Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51 2.3M
Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45 2.0M
Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.7M
Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40 2.3M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43 3.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.3M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33 2.4M
Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 3.0M
Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31 2.0M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30 2.0M
Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.4M
Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.7M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28 1.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27 2.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.6M
Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31 4.2M
Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.4M
Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.5M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.4M
Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12 2.5M
Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.7M
Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11 2.9M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09 3.8M
Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08 1.3M
Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29 3.8M
Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 1.9M
Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00 2.0M
Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59 2.2M
IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.3M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 2.6M
Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.1M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57 3.0M
Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54 3.7M
Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13 3.0M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12 3.0M
Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.3M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10 3.6M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.3M
Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09 1.4M
Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.6M
Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08 1.5M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 1.9M
Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06 1.9M
Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03 2.1M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 1.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.4M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02 2.2M
Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01 2.6M
Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 3.2M
Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00 2.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.7M
Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.2M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58 4.1M
Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58 1.6M
Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.0M
Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.4M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.5M
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31 3.8M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30 3.9M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29 4.2M
Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04 2.8M
Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 2.9M
Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03 3.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02 3.5M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.6M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01 3.7M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00 2.7M
Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.5M
Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41 2.6M
Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.0M
Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46 2.2M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12 5.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.1M
Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19 2.3M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 2.6M
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12 3.2M
Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 3.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11 1.7M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 2.1M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10 1.8M
Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.2M
Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 2.5M
Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 2.6M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08 3.6M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07 3.3M
Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06 3.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05 4.3M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04 4.6M
Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02 4.9M
Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01 5.1M
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.0M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09 3.1M
Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08 3.1M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.1M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07 3.2M
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06 3.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05 1.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 2.0M
Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04 1.9M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46 2.9M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.5M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43 3.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42 3.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.8M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 2.8M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27 3.0M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.5M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07 3.4M
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23 3.0M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.0M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22 3.8M
Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.7M
Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21 1.4M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.8M
Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 1.7M
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.2M
Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20 2.1M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17 2.9M
Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31 2.9M
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.0M
Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.4M
Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29 3.1M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.5M
Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28 3.4M
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.6M
Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27 3.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45 2.0M
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24 1.7M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.8M
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23 3.4M
Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.8M
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21 3.2M
Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.7M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20 3.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08 2.4M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.5M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.4M
Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 2.6M
Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06 3.0M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.4M
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05 3.0M
Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 3.1M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44 2.9M
Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41 3.1M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.6M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40 3.3M
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.8M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39 1.7M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 1.9M
Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38 2.0M
Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37 2.1M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02 2.7M
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00 2.3M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 3.3M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46 2.8M
Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.0M
Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42 2.3M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.9M
Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41 2.7M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 1.9M
Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40 2.0M
Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.2M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39 2.1M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.2M
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.3M
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38 2.4M
Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.5M
Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37 2.6M
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.7M
Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 2.2M
Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40 2.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 3.0M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39 2.7M
Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38 2.4M
Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29 1.6M
Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51 3.3M
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.3M
Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49 3.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48 2.8M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.7M
Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46 2.8M
Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.9M
Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.4M
Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 1.5M
Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44 2.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31 3.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.6M
Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30 3.5M
Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.8M
Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29 2.7M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.0M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10 2.3M
Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09 2.8M
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 3.4M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07 2.1M
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.4M
Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.3M
Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06 2.6M
Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05 3.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.8M
Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04 2.4M
Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03 2.8M
Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.2M
Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.7M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.0M
Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.4M
Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15 2.6M
Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 2.8M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13 2.6M
Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 2.9M
Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11 3.2M
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54 2.3M
Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.7M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41 2.5M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.5M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40 2.6M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.3M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38 2.1M
Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 2.2M
Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37 1.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36 2.2M
Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36 1.0M
Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42 1.7M
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 1.9M
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.0M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.4M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41 2.1M
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 3.6M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13 2.9M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12 3.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11 3.9M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10 3.1M
Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09 3.3M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 3.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08 2.6M
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 2.7M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07 3.1M
DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06 12M
Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05 4.4M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04 4.1M
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03 4.1M
Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02 3.8M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.7M
Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01 3.5M
Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00 3.5M
Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58 3.4M
Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57 3.4M
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.3M
Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56 3.2M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.3M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55 3.2M
Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
AlienwareAurora-R3.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:54 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53 3.2M
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52 3.2M
AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50 3.0M
Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49 3.0M
AlienwareAurora-R4.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47 2.9M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.9M
Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46 2.8M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45 2.8M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44 2.8M
Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.7M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43 2.8M
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42 2.7M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41 2.7M
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40 2.7M
Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39 2.6M
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.6M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38 2.5M
alienwareX51.htm 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37 2.5M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36 2.5M
Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.2M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35 2.3M
Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34 2.2M
Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.2M
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33 2.1M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 2.0M
Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.9M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32 1.6M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.5M
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.2M
Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 1.0M
Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31 906K
Autres Manuels :
16-4ppm-Imprimante-l..> 28-Sep-2012 12:42 2.8M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:43 6.0M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:43 5.4M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:45 6.0M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:45 4.3M
17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:46 3.9M
19-Serie-3-Moniteur-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:47 4.7M
20ppm-Multifonction-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:48 6.0M
24ppm-Multifonction-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:49 6.5M
27-Serie7-Moniteur-s..> 28-Sep-2012 12:50 4.8M
32-LE32D450WXZF-seri..> 28-Sep-2012 12:51 5.7M
32-UE32D6200WXZF-ser..> 28-Sep-2012 12:51 4.6M
35-35ppm-Copieur-cou..> 28-Sep-2012 12:53 6.5M
40-UE40D6500WXZF-ser..> 28-Sep-2012 12:53 3.6M
46-LE46D550WXZF-seri..> 28-Sep-2012 12:55 6.9M
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/layout.gif)
AEWG.pdf 26-Jun-2009 07:09 5.4M
AEWK.pdf 30-Jun-2009 07:41 3.9M
APPLEmanuelutilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:32 7.0M
AcerPowerseriemanuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30 34K
Apple-Manuel_de_l'ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:28 2.1M
Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:29 3.6M
Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30 3.4M
Apple-Manuel_de_l_ut..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30 3.8M
CIELQUANTUM450manuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31 733K
Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 13-May-2013 12:06 3.1M
Dell-7330dn-Mono-Las..> 13-May-2013 12:06 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:07 3.1M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:07 4.1M
Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 13-May-2013 12:08 3.2M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 13-May-2013 12:08 2.8M
Dell-Alienware-M15x-..> 13-May-2013 12:09 3.3M
Dell-Alienware-X51-M..> 13-May-2013 12:09 2.7M
Dell-Aztech-MDP3900-..> 13-May-2013 12:09 2.0M
Dell-Comment-utilise..> 13-May-2013 12:10 2.7M
Dell-Configurer-et-u..> 13-May-2013 12:10 2.7M
Dell-DR4000-Manuels.htm 13-May-2013 12:12 3.4M
Dell-Dimension-5100-..> 13-May-2013 12:11 3.4M
Dell-Dimension-8300-..> 13-May-2013 12:11 2.5M
Dell-Drivers-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:13 4.2M
Dell-Drivers-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 12:13 4.3M
Dell-Guide-Utilisate..> 13-May-2013 12:14 2.4M
Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 13-May-2013 12:13 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-15-Int..> 13-May-2013 12:14 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-500m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:17 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-510m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:18 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 13-May-2013 12:18 2.6M
Dell-Inspiron-620-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:19 3.2M
Dell-Inspiron-640M-M..> 13-May-2013 12:19 3.7M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-2..> 13-May-2013 12:15 2.5M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-E..> 13-May-2013 12:15 1.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-May-2013 12:16 2.0M
Dell-Inspiron-1521-M..> 13-May-2013 12:16 2.9M
Dell-Inspiron-1525-M..> 13-May-2013 12:17 3.9M
Dell-Inspiron-9400-M..> 13-May-2013 12:20 4.1M
Dell-Inspiron-Duo-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:20 3.0M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-May-2013 12:21 4.2M
Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-May-2013 12:22 2.8M
Dell-Inspiron-m301z-..> 13-May-2013 12:22 4.8M
Dell-Intel-Active-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:23 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-CPi-A-..> 13-May-2013 12:23 2.7M
Dell-Latitude-Cpi-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:24 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-D410-M..> 13-May-2013 12:24 3.0M
Dell-Latitude-D620-E..> 13-May-2013 12:25 3.7M
Dell-Latitude-D620-M..> 13-May-2013 12:25 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 13-May-2013 12:26 4.7M
Dell-Latitude-E5520-..> 13-May-2013 12:27 3.5M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:28 3.9M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:29 4.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6400-..> 13-May-2013 12:28 3.2M
Dell-Latitude-E6410-..> 13-May-2013 12:29 3.8M
Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 13-May-2013 12:30 3.1M
Dell-Latitude-E6430-..> 13-May-2013 12:30 3.4M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 13-May-2013 12:31 2.4M
Dell-Latitude-E6530-..> 13-May-2013 12:31 2.3M
Dell-Latitude-XT2-Ma..> 13-May-2013 12:32 3.5M
Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 13-May-2013 12:32 4.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ali..> 13-May-2013 12:33 3.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:36 4.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:33 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:34 2.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:35 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:36 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:38 3.4M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:37 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 12:38 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:24 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:25 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:25 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Del..> 13-May-2013 13:26 3.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27 1.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:26 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:27 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28 2.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:28 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:29 3.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:29 2.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:30 1.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Ins..> 13-May-2013 13:30 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-LCD..> 13-May-2013 13:32 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:30 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:31 3.4M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:31 1.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Lat..> 13-May-2013 13:32 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Min..> 13-May-2013 13:33 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Opt..> 13-May-2013 13:33 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:34 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:33 2.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:34 3.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:35 3.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:35 1.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:36 3.1M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:36 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:37 3.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:37 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38 2.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:39 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:39 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:38 2.2M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:40 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:40 3.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41 2.7M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:41 2.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:42 2.8M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:43 3.3M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pow..> 13-May-2013 13:43 4.0M
Dell-Manuals-for-Pre..> 13-May-2013 13:43 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-Vos..> 13-May-2013 13:44 3.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:44 1.9M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45 2.5M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45 2.6M
Dell-Manuals-for-XPS..> 13-May-2013 13:45 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-d-Utilis..> 13-May-2013 13:46 2.4M
Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 13-May-2013 13:46 2.3M
Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 13-May-2013 13:47 3.0M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 13-May-2013 13:47 3.7M
Dell-Manuels-et-docu..> 13-May-2013 13:48 3.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-330-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:48 2.2M
Dell-OptiPlex-745-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:49 3.9M
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Ma..> 13-May-2013 13:50 5.5M
Dell-OptiPlex-SX280-..> 13-May-2013 13:51 6.0M
Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 13-May-2013 13:51 4.5M
Dell-PowerEdge-300-M..> 13-May-2013 13:53 4.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-400SC..> 13-May-2013 13:53 2.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-1950-..> 13-May-2013 13:52 2.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-M905-..> 13-May-2013 13:54 2.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-R200-..> 13-May-2013 13:54 2.6M
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 13-May-2013 13:55 4.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 13-May-2013 13:55 3.4M
Dell-PowerEdge-R510-..> 13-May-2013 13:56 2.7M
Dell-PowerEdge-R610-..> 13-May-2013 13:56 2.9M
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 13-May-2013 13:57 4.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R720x..> 13-May-2013 13:57 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 13-May-2013 13:58 4.3M
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 13-May-2013 13:58 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 13-May-2013 13:59 3.1M
Dell-PowerEdge-T100-..> 13-May-2013 13:59 3.0M
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 13-May-2013 14:00 3.2M
Dell-PowerEdge-T605-..> 13-May-2013 14:00 2.8M
Dell-PowerEdge-T710-..> 13-May-2013 14:01 2.9M
Dell-PowerVault-110T..> 13-May-2013 14:02 4.4M
Dell-PowerVault-NX30..> 13-May-2013 14:03 5.6M
Dell-Precision-360-M..> 13-May-2013 14:03 4.0M
Dell-Precision-370-M..> 13-May-2013 14:04 3.2M
Dell-Precision-390-M..> 13-May-2013 14:04 2.0M
Dell-Precision-450-M..> 13-May-2013 14:05 4.6M
Dell-Precision-610-M..> 13-May-2013 14:05 2.3M
Dell-Precision-690-M..> 13-May-2013 14:06 3.2M
Dell-Precision-M20-M..> 13-May-2013 14:06 2.8M
Dell-Precision-M40-M..> 13-May-2013 14:07 3.9M
Dell-Precision-M4400..> 13-May-2013 14:07 3.3M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 13-May-2013 14:09 6.1M
Dell-Precision-M4500..> 13-May-2013 14:08 2.2M
Dell-Precision-M4600..> 13-May-2013 14:09 3.4M
Dell-Precision-M4700..> 13-May-2013 14:10 3.4M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 13-May-2013 14:10 3.3M
Dell-Precision-T5600..> 13-May-2013 14:11 3.1M
Dell-Precision-T7600..> 13-May-2013 14:11 3.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13 4.1M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:12 2.5M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13 2.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:13 2.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:14 2.8M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:15 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:14 2.6M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:15 3.2M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:16 2.6M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:16 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:17 2.7M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:17 1.5M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:18 4.3M
Dell-Product-support..> 13-May-2013 14:18 4.1M
Dell-Studio-1555-15-..> 13-May-2013 14:19 3.1M
Dell-Studio-1735-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:19 3.1M
Dell-Studio-Desktop-..> 13-May-2013 14:28 2.7M
Dell-Studio-Slim-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:28 5.1M
Dell-Symantec-Backup..> 13-May-2013 14:29 3.0M
Dell-UPS-500- Englis..> 13-May-2013 14:30 4.6M
Dell-UPS-500T-Españ..> 13-May-2013 14:29 1.7M
Dell-UPS-500T-Manuel..> 13-May-2013 14:30 3.4M
Dell-Vizioncore-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:31 2.1M
Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:33 4.5M
Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:34 3.2M
Dell-Vostro-270s-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:34 3.1M
Dell-Vostro-410-Manu..> 13-May-2013 14:36 4.1M
Dell-Vostro-1000-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:31 2.7M
Dell-Vostro-1550-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:32 3.4M
Dell-Vostro-1700-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:33 4.8M
Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:35 2.8M
Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 13-May-2013 14:35 3.0M
Dell-Windows-8-Manue..> 13-May-2013 14:37 5.1M
Dell-XPS-630-Manuels..> 13-May-2013 14:37 3.6M
Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 13-May-2013 14:38 2.9M
Dell-XPS-M1730-Manue..> 13-May-2013 14:38 3.9M
EBP-Guide_Auto-entre..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31 78K
EBPGestionCommercial..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 1.4M
EBPPAYEV14manuelutil..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 865K
EBPPointdeventebacko..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 736K
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:31 1.9M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:32 1.9M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33 1.6M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33 1.8M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33 1.0M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33 1.1M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:33 1.2M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34 1.9M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34 1.3M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34 1.4M
EBP_Manuel_Utilisate..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34 1.5M
EBPlocationimmobilie..> 28-Sep-2012 12:34 182K
GENETATS.pdf 26-Jun-2009 07:09 4.8M
Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:55 5.5M
Galaxy-Y-S5360-Andro..> 28-Sep-2012 12:56 3.2M
Guide-d-installation..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 606K
Guide-d-installation..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 606K
GuideCRC.pdf 30-Jun-2009 07:40 1.0M
Guide_Assistants_Jur..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 132K
Guide_Auto-entrepren..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 81K
Guide_CRM_PRO_2013-M..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36 785K
Guide_Compta-Classic..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 204K
Guide_Compta-GC_Open..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 387K
Guide_Compta-Gestion..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 548K
Guide_Compta-Open_Li..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 628K
Guide_Compta_Pratic_..> 28-Sep-2012 12:35 684K
Guide_Devis_et_Factu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36 859K
Guide_Devis_et_Factu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36 960K
Guide_EBP_Facturatio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36 1.0M
Guide_GC_Open_Line_P..> 28-Sep-2012 12:36 1.2M
Guide_GESTION_COMMER..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37 1.3M
Guide_Gestion_de_Con..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37 1.4M
Guide_Mon_Associatio..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37 1.5M
Guide_Paye_Classic_2..> 28-Sep-2012 12:37 1.5M
Guide_Paye_Open_Line..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38 1.6M
Guide_Report_Designe..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38 1.7M
GuidedetelecopieManu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38 8.4K
LE40D503F7W-Samsung-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:57 6.3M
LE55C650-LE55C650L1W..> 28-Sep-2012 12:58 6.3M
Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 28-Sep-2012 12:57 17K
Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 29-Sep-2012 21:58 35K
MEWGE.pdf 26-Jun-2009 07:12 12M
ME_WKE.pdf 30-Jun-2009 07:43 7.5M
Manuels-Utilisateur-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:03 3.4M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:58 4.1M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:59 4.4M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:01 3.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:01 3.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 12:59 2.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:00 2.5M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:00 2.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:02 3.5M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 28-Sep-2012 13:03 4.1M
Micro-chaine-MM-D330..> 28-Sep-2012 13:04 3.9M
Microsoftphotopremiu..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41 242K
N145Plus-NP-N145P-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:05 3.9M
N150-NP-N150-Manuels..> 28-Sep-2012 13:05 3.9M
Nexus-S-noir-Open-ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:06 4.0M
OrdinateurportableHP..> 28-Sep-2012 12:38 240K
Samsung-32-LE32D450W..> 28-Sep-2012 13:07 4.0M
Samsung-46-UE46D5700..> 28-Sep-2012 13:08 4.6M
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:08 3.4M
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:09 3.7M
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:10 3.3M
Samsung-Congelateur-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:09 3.8M
Samsung-DA-E550-CN-M..> 28-Sep-2012 13:10 2.4M
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9D..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11 3.1M
Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11 1.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:14 3.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:15 3.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18 1.9M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-G..> 28-Sep-2012 13:22 5.0M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-S..> 28-Sep-2012 13:21 2.4M
Samsung-GT-B5310-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23 3.9M
Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23 1.0M
Samsung-GT-S5360-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:24 3.8M
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_..> 28-Sep-2012 13:24 3.2M
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:11 3.0M
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:13 4.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:15 2.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 28-Sep-2012 13:16 3.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plu..> 28-Sep-2012 13:17 4.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:16 3.2M
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT..> 28-Sep-2012 13:17 3.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 28-Sep-2012 13:20 6.5M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7..> 28-Sep-2012 13:21 6.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18 3.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:18 3.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-Xcove..> 28-Sep-2012 13:23 4.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:12 3.9M
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:12 3.6M
Samsung-LA46C550J1F-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:25 1.3M
Samsung-LE40S71B-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:26 4.0M
Samsung-LE46A676-LE4..> 28-Sep-2012 13:26 2.5M
Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 28-Sep-2012 13:27 4.2M
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R..> 28-Sep-2012 13:28 3.1M
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:27 3.3M
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:28 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:29 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:29 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:30 4.3M
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 28-Sep-2012 13:31 4.3M
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:32 4.1M
Samsung-Player-Addic..> 28-Sep-2012 13:32 3.8M
Samsung-Player-Duo-n..> 28-Sep-2012 13:33 3.6M
Samsung-Player-HD-no..> 28-Sep-2012 13:33 3.6M
Samsung-RR92HASX-Man..> 28-Sep-2012 13:34 3.6M
Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 28-Sep-2012 13:34 3.5M
Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:35 1.2M
Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 28-Sep-2012 13:35 3.4M
Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 28-Sep-2012 13:36 4.8M
Samsung-UA32ES5500-U..> 28-Sep-2012 13:36 1.7M
Samsung-UE26EH4000-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:37 4.2M
Samsung-UE32ES6710-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:37 4.3M
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:38 3.1M
Samsung-UE40C6700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:38 3.0M
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 13:39 3.2M
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:40 3.5M
Samsung-UE46ES8000-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:40 3.6M
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:41 3.7M
Samsung-UE55ES6300-Z..> 28-Sep-2012 13:42 3.6M
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:42 3.0M
Samsung-WEP480-CN-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 13:49 1.3M
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:43 4.9M
Samsung-Wave-533-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:43 4.6M
Samsung-Wave-575-bla..> 28-Sep-2012 13:45 4.6M
Samsung-Wave-578-noi..> 28-Sep-2012 13:45 4.2M
Samsung-Wave-723-gri..> 28-Sep-2012 13:47 7.0M
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:47 3.9M
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Sep-2012 13:49 5.6M
Samsung-Wave-noir-Op..> 28-Sep-2012 13:48 3.6M
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1..> 28-Sep-2012 13:50 3.9M
Serie-3-300E7A-NP300..> 28-Sep-2012 13:50 3.9M
UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 28-Sep-2012 13:51 3.8M
UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 28-Sep-2012 13:52 6.6M
UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60E..> 28-Sep-2012 13:54 7.3M
UE65C8700-UE65C8700X..> 28-Sep-2012 13:54 7.3M
bizhub-350-250-User-..> 28-Sep-2012 12:39 2.8M
bizhub-423-363-283-2..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40 2.4M
bizhub-C35-French-Sh..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41 3.3M
bizhub-C252P-User-Ma..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40 3.2M
bizhub-pro-c5501_um_..> 28-Sep-2012 12:40 226K
bizhub C360-C280-C22..> 28-Sep-2012 12:39 3.8M
bizhubPROC5500manuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41 709K
cielcomptaevolution1..> 28-Sep-2012 12:30 497K
generateurtableaubor..> 26-Jun-2009 07:07 1.6M
guidedereferenceCiel..> 04-Oct-2011 16:15 354K
magicolor1600Wmanuel..> 28-Sep-2012 12:41 317K
samsung-Wave-II-noir..> 28-Sep-2012 13:46 3.3M
Rack Installation Guide
Guide d'installation du rack
Rack-Installationsanleitung
ラック取り付けガイド
Guía de instalación del rackwww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Rack Installation GuideNotes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid
the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, RapidRails, and VersaRails are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own
November 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Contents 3
Contents
1 Four-Post Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rack Requirements for VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rack Stabilizer Feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Recommended Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Static Rails Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Removing the Rack Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Marking the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuring the Sliding Rail Assemblies (Sliding Rail Kits Only). . . . . . . . 13
Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules (Static Rail Kits Only) . . . . . . . . . 14
Installing the Mounting Rails in the Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installing the System in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing a System With Sliding Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing a System With Static Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Replacing the Rack Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm (Sliding Rail Kits Only) . . . 22
Installing the Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installing the Cable-Management Arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Routing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Removing the System From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removing a System With Sliding Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removing a System With Static Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Contents
2 Two-Post Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Recommended Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rack Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Marking the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Universal-Hole Spacing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Wide-Hole Spacing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installing the Mounting Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Center-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Flush-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installing the System in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removing the System From the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Four-Post Rack Installation 5
Four-Post Rack Installation
Safety Instructions
Use the following safety guidelines to ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your system
and working environment from potential damage. For complete safety and regulatory information,
see the Product Information Guide that shipped with your system. Warranty information might be
included in this document or as a separate document.
SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems
Observe the following precautions for rack stability and safety. Also refer to the rack installation
documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and
procedures.
Systems are considered to be components in a rack. Thus, "component" refers to any system as well
as to various peripherals or supporting hardware.
CAUTION: Before installing systems in a rack, install front and side stabilizers on stand-alone racks or the
front stabilizer on racks joined to other racks. Failure to install stabilizers accordingly before installing
systems in a rack could cause the rack to tip over, potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain
circumstances. Therefore, always install the stabilizer(s) before installing components in the rack.
After installing system/components in a rack, never pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide
assemblies at one time. The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over
and may result in serious injury.
NOTE: Your system is safety-certified as a free-standing unit and as a component for use in a Dell rack
cabinet using the customer rack kit. The installation of your system and rack kit in any other rack cabinet has
not been approved by any safety agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure that the final combination of
system and rack complies with all applicable safety standards and local electric code requirements. Dell
disclaims all liability and warranties in connection with such combinations.
• System rack kits are intended to be installed in a rack by trained service technicians. If you install
the kit in any other rack, be sure that the rack meets the specifications of a Dell rack.
CAUTION: Do not move racks by yourself. Due to the height and weight of the rack, a minimum of two
people should accomplish this task.
• Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to
the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers
on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.
• Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.6 Four-Post Rack Installation
• Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack.
• Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out
of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
• Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load
should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating.
• Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack.
• Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack.
General Installation Instructions
This installation guide provides instructions for trained service technicians installing one or more systems
in a rack cabinet. The RapidRails™ rack kit can be installed in all the system manufacturer's rack cabinets
without tools, and the VersaRails™ rack kit can be installed in most industry-standard rack cabinets. The
procedures for installing both RapidRails and VersaRails rack kits are similar. One rack kit is required for
each system to be installed in the rack cabinet.
This section includes procedures for the following four-post rack kits:
• Sliding rails rack kit
• Static rails rack kit (RapidRails and VersaRails versions)
(See "Two-Post Rack Installation" on page 27 for instructions on installing a static rails kit in a two-post
rack.)
Before You Begin
Before you begin installing your system in the rack, carefully read "Safety Instructions," found earlier
in this guide, as well as the safety instructions found in your Product Information Guide for additional
information.
CAUTION: When installing multiple systems in a rack, complete all of the procedures for the current system
before attempting to install the next system.
CAUTION: Rack cabinets can be extremely heavy and move easily on their casters. They do not have brakes. Use
extreme caution while moving the rack cabinet. Retract the leveling feet when relocating the rack cabinet. Avoid
long or steep inclines or ramps where loss of cabinet control may occur. Extend the leveling feet for support and
to prevent the cabinet from rolling.
NOTE: For instructions on installing the system itself, see ""Installing the System in the Rack" on page 18.Four-Post Rack Installation 7
Important Safety Information
Observe the safety precautions in the following subsections when installing your system in the rack.
CAUTION: You must strictly follow the procedures in this document to protect yourself as well as others who
may be involved. Your system may be very large and heavy and proper preparation and planning are important to
prevent injury to yourself and to others. This precaution becomes increasingly important when systems are
installed high up in the rack.
CAUTION: Do not install rack kit components designed for another system. Use only the rack kit for your system.
Using the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to
others.
Rack Requirements for VersaRails
NOTICE: The VersaRails rack kit is intended to be installed by trained service technicians in a rack that meets the
specifications of American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard
ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297, and Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) 41494.
One rack kit is required for each system that is installed in a rack.
Rack Stabilizer Feet
CAUTION: Before installing systems in a rack, install front and side stabilizers on stand-alone racks or the front
stabilizer on racks joined to other racks. Failure to install stabilizers accordingly before installing systems in a
rack could cause the rack to tip over, potentially resulting in bodily injury under certain circumstances.
Therefore, always install the stabilizer(s) before installing components in the rack.
The stabilizer feet help prevent the rack from tipping over. See the documentation provided with the rack
cabinet for instructions on installing and anchoring the stabilizer feet.
Recommended Tools and Supplies
You may need the following items to install the system in a four-post rack cabinet:
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• Masking tape or a felt-tip pen, for use in marking the mounting holes to be used8 Four-Post Rack Installation
Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents
• One pair of slide assemblies (convertible to RapidRails or VersaRails configuration)
• One cable-management arm
• One tray
• One status indicator cable (if applicable)
• Tie wraps to secure the cables to the cable management arm
• Eight 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (used in VersaRails configuration only)
NOTE: The nonmetric screws described in illustrations and in procedural steps are identified by size and number
of threads per inch. For example, a #10 Phillips-head screw with 32 threads per inch is identified as a 10-32 screw.
Figure 1-1. Sliding Rails Rack Kit Contents
1 tray 2 slide assemblies (2) 3 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips
screws (8) (VersaRails configuration only)
4 tie wraps 5 status indicator cable
(if applicable)
6 cable-management arm
1
2
3
5
6
4Four-Post Rack Installation 9
Static Rails Rack Kit Contents
• One pair of static mounting rails with either VersaRails brackets or RapidRails brackets.
• One pair of chassis static rail modules
• 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws (8) (VersaRails kits only)
• Releasable tie wraps (2) (not shown in Figure 1-2)
NOTE: The nonmetric screws described in illustrations and in procedural steps are identified by size and number
of threads per inch. For example, a #10 Phillips-head screw with 32 threads per inch is identified as a 10-32 screw.
Figure 1-2. Static Rails Rack Kit Contents
1 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head
Phillips screws (8)
(VersaRails kits only)
2 static mounting rails (2) 3 chassis static rail modules (2)
FRONT L
1
3
210 Four-Post Rack Installation
Installation Tasks
Installing a rack kit involves performing the following tasks (described in detail in subsequent sections)
in their numbered order:
1 Removing the rack doors
2 Marking the rack
3 Configuring the sliding rail assemblies (sliding rail kits only)
4 Installing chassis static rail modules (static rail kits only)
5 Installing the mounting rails in the rack
6 Installing the system in the rack
7 Installing the tray and cable-management arm (sliding rail kits only)
8 Routing cables
9 Replacing the rack doors
Removing the Rack Doors
See the procedures for removing doors in the documentation provided with your rack cabinet.
CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the rack cabinet doors, never attempt to remove or install them
by yourself.
CAUTION: Store the two doors where they will not injure someone if the doors accidently fall over.
Marking the Rack
For a 1-U system, you must allow 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space for each system you install
in the rack.
Rack cabinets that meet EIA-310 standards have an alternating pattern of three holes per rack unit with
center-to-center hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm, 15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm
(0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) for the front and back vertical rails (see Figure 1-3). Rack cabinets may
have round or square holes.
NOTE: The vertical rails may be marked by horizontal lines and numbers in 1-U increments. If you want, you can
make a note of the number marking on the rack’s vertical rail. It is not necessary to mark or place tape on the rack. Four-Post Rack Installation 11
Figure 1-3. One Rack Unit
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the mounting rails so that the first system is
installed in the lowest available position in the rack.
To mark the rack, perform the following steps:
1 Place a mark (or tape) on the rack's front vertical rails where you want to locate the bottom
of the system you are installing in the rack.
The bottom of each 1-U space is at the middle of the narrowest metal area between holes (marked
with a horizontal line on some rack cabinets—see Figure 1-4).
2 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up three holes in a rack
that meets EIA-310 standards) and mark the rack's front vertical rails with a felt-tipped pen or masking
tape (if you counted holes, place a mark just above the top hole). This mark or piece of tape indicates
where the system's upper edge will be located on the vertical rails (see Figure 1-4).
1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches)
12.7 mm (0.5 inch)
15.9 mm (0.625 inch)
15.9 mm (0.625 inch)
12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 12 Four-Post Rack Installation
Figure 1-4. Marking the Vertical Rails
1 marks on vertical rail (2)
1Four-Post Rack Installation 13
Configuring the Sliding Rail Assemblies (Sliding Rail Kits Only)
The sliding rail assembly has a rotating mounting bracket at each end of the rail. The position of the
bracket determines whether the rail assembly is used as a RapidRail or a VersaRail. The RapidRail side of
the bracket has a hook and a latch that secure it to the vertical rail. The VersaRail side of the bracket has
three holes and uses screws to attach it to the vertical rail.
NOTE: The rack kit ships with the sliding rail assemblies in the RapidRails configuration.
To rotate the mounting bracket and change the mounting rails from RapidRails to VersaRails
(see Figure 1-5):
1 Lift the release lever on the rotating mounting bracket.
2 Rotate the bracket and slide it up off the two shoulder standoffs.
3 Continue to rotate the bracket 180 degrees until you can set the notches back over the shoulder
standoffs.
4 Rotate the bracket back in the opposite direction on the shoulder standoffs until the bracket clicks
into place.
Figure 1-5. Changing the Position of the Rotating Mounting Bracket
1 rotating bracket 2 release lever 3 shoulder standoffs (2)
4 notches (2) 5 mounting bracket flange
(RapidRails configuration shown)
1
2
4
3
514 Four-Post Rack Installation
Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules (Static Rail Kits Only)
NOTE: You do not need to remove the optional front bezel to install or remove the chassis static rail modules from
the chassis.
1 To install a rail module, locate the three keyhole slots on the rail module and the corresponding
shoulder screws on the side of the system (see Figure 1-6).
2 Place the rail module against the side of the system so that the shoulder screws fit through the round
portion of the keyhole slots, then slide the module towards the back of the system.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other rail module.
To remove a rail module from the chassis, pull up on the release latch, then slide the rail forward and
remove the rail module from the chassis.
Figure 1-6. Installing and Removing Static Rail Chassis Modules
1 keyhole slots (6) 2 shoulder screws (6) 3 release latch
4 rail modules (2) 5 system
4
2
3
1
5Four-Post Rack Installation 15
Installing the Mounting Rails in the Rack
NOTE: The following instructions apply to both sliding mounting rails and static mounting rails.
Installing RapidRails Mounting Rails
1 At the front of the rack cabinet, position one of the mounting rails so that its mounting-bracket flange
fits between the marks or tape you placed (or numbered locations) on the vertical rails in "Marking the
Rack" (see Figure 1-7).
The top mounting hook on the front mounting-bracket flange should enter the top hole between the
marks you made on the vertical rails.
Figure 1-7. Installing RapidRails Mounting Rails
1 mounting hooks (2) 2 push buttons (2) 3 mounting rails (2)
front of rack
1
2
316 Four-Post Rack Installation
2 Push the mounting rail forward until the mounting hook enters the square hole, and then push down
on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting hook seats and the push button extends through
the lower square hole (see Figure 1-7).
3 At the back of the cabinet, pull back on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting hook enters
the upper square hole, and then push down on the flange until the mounting hook seats and the push
button extends through the lower square hole.
4 Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the mounting rail on the other side of the rack.
5 Confirm that the mounting rails are mounted at the same vertical position on both sides of the rack.
Installing the VersaRails Mounting Rails
1 At the front of the rack cabinet, position one of the mounting rails so that its mounting-bracket flange
fits between the marks you placed (or numbered locations) on the vertical rails in "Marking the Rack"
(see Figure 1-8).
The three holes on the front of the mounting-bracket flange should align with the holes between the
marks you made on the front vertical rail.
2 Install two 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws in the upper and lower holes in the mountingbracket flange to secure the mounting rail to the front vertical rail.
3 At the back of the cabinet, pull back on the mounting-bracket flange until the mounting holes align
with their respective holes on the back vertical rail.
4 Install two 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head Phillips screws in the upper and lower holes in the mountingbracket flange to secure the mounting rail to the back vertical rail.
5 Repeat step 1 through step 4 for the mounting rail on the other side of the rack.
6 Ensure that the mounting rails are mounted at the same position on the vertical rails on each side
of the rack.Four-Post Rack Installation 17
Figure 1-8. Installing VersaRails Mounting Rails
1 mounting-bracket flange 2 10-32 x 0.5-inch flange-head
Phillips screws
(4 per mounting rail)
3 mounting rails (2)
front of rack
1
2
318 Four-Post Rack Installation
Installing the System in the Rack
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the first system in the lowest available position
in the rack.
CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the system, never attempt to install the system in the mounting rails
by yourself.
Installing a System With Sliding Rails
1 Pull the two inner slide rails out of the rack until they lock in the fully extended position
(see Figure 1-9).
2 Lift the system into position above the extended slides.
The three shoulder screws on each side of the system fit into the corresponding J-slots on the inner
slide assemblies (see Figure 1-9).
3 Lower the back of the system while aligning the back shoulder screws on the sides of the system with
the back J-slots on the slide assemblies.
4 Engage the back shoulder screws into their respective J-slots.
5 Lower the front of the system and fit the middle and front shoulder screws into the J-slots in the slide
assemblies.
The system release latch at the front of the inner slide rail will snap back as the shoulder screw passes
into the front slot. Use this system release latch when you wish to remove the system from the slide
assemblies.
6 Press the slide-release latch on the outside of each inner slide, then push the system into the rack.
7 Install the cable-management arm. See "Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm
(Sliding Rail Kits Only)" on page 22.
8 Tighten the thumbscrews on the rack front panel to secure the slide assemblies to the rack.Four-Post Rack Installation 19
Figure 1-9. Installing a System With Sliding Rails
1 shoulder screws (6) 2 slide-release latch 3 J slots (6)
4 front release latch 5 inner slide rails (2)
1
2
4 3
520 Four-Post Rack Installation
Installing a System With Static Rails
To install the system on the rack, perform the following procedure:
1 From the front of the system, lift the chassis into position so that the chassis rail modules are aligned
with the mounting rails on the rack.
2 Push the chassis back into the mounting rails until the system stops (see Figure 1-10).
3 Secure both thumbscrews on the front panel of the chassis.
4 Install the optional front bezel (if applicable). See the procedures for installing the bezel in the
documentation provided with your system.
Figure 1-10. Installing a System With Static Rails
1 mounting rails (2) 2 chassis rail modules (2) 3 thumbscrews (2)
4 release latches (2)
1
3
4
2Four-Post Rack Installation 21
5 Locate the releasable tie wrap attachment points located on the two back mounting-bracket flanges
(see Figure 1-11).
These tie wraps are used to secure the system’s cables to the mounting rails.
Figure 1-11. Installing the Releasable Tie Wraps
6 Push the tie wrap’s fastener through the attachment point.
7 Push the tie wrap’s plunger until it snaps to secure the tie wrap to the mounting rail.
8 Using the releasable tie wrap, secure your system’s cables to the mounting rail.
1 mounting rails (2) 2 releasable tie wraps (2)
1
222 Four-Post Rack Installation
Replacing the Rack Doors
See the procedures for replacing doors in the documentation provided with your rack.
CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the rack cabinet doors, never attempt to remove or install them
by yourself.
Installing the Tray and Cable-Management Arm
(Sliding Rail Kits Only)
NOTE: This procedure does not apply to the static rail kit.
Installing the Tray
1 At the back of the system, fit the ends of the tray between the ends of the mounting rails and slide
the tray forward until it latches (see Figure 1-12).
2 In preparation for installing the cable-management arm, press the catch at the center of the cablemanagement arm retention latch and rotate the latch downward (see Figure 1-12).
Figure 1-12. Installing the Tray
1 mounting rails (2) 2 tray 3 cable-management arm retention latch
1
3
back of system
2Four-Post Rack Installation 23
Installing the Cable-Management Arm
NOTE: You can attach the cable-management arm to either the right or left mounting rail, depending on how you
intend to route cables from the system.
1 If necessary, press the catch at the center of the cable-management arm retention latch on the tray,
and rotate the latch downwards (see Figure 1-12).
2 At the back of the system, fit the latch on the front end of the cable-management arm onto
the innermost bracket on the slide assembly, until the latch engages (see Figure 1-13).
3 Fit the latch on the unattached end of the cable-management arm onto the outermost bracket on
the slide assembly, until the latch engages (see Figure 1-13).
Figure 1-13. Installing the Cable-Management Arm
1 mounting rails (2) 2 brackets (2) 3 latches (2)
4 cable-management arm
back of system
1
2
4
324 Four-Post Rack Installation
Routing Cables
1 Open the wire cable basket lid on the top of the cable-management arm, to enable cables to be routed
within the arms (see Figure 1-14).
Figure 1-14. Routing Cables on the Cable-Management Arm
2 If applicable, connect the system status-indicator cable to its connector on the system back panel.
Route the system status-indicator cable through the cable-management arm and insert the LED end
into the slot on the end of the cable-management arm.
3 Attach the I/O cable connectors and power cable connectors to their respective connectors on the
system back panel.
For details on cable connections, see your system’s Getting Started Guide or Hardware Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE: Use the strain-relief loops on the back of the power supplies to provide strain relief for the power
cables.
4 Using the tie-wraps provided in the rack kit, bundle the cables together so that they do not interfere
with adjacent systems in the rack.
1 cable-management arm 2 preinstalled tie wraps 3 cable-management arm
retention latch
4 basket lid 5 system status-indicator
cable connector
6 Velcro strap
7 preinstalled tie wraps
4
5
2
3
6
back of system
1
7Four-Post Rack Installation 25
5 Route the cables through the cable-management arm baskets.
6 Adjust the cable slack as needed at the hinge position and secure the bundled cables with the vertical
Velcro strap (see Figure 1-14).
7 Use the preinstalled tie wraps at the inner end and hinge point of the cable-management arm to secure
the bundled cables in the cable-management arm channel (see Figure 1-14).
8 Close the cable basket lid.
9 Unscrew the thumbscrews that secure the front of the system to the front vertical rail.
10 Slide the system in and out of the rack to verify that the cables are routed correctly and do not bind,
stretch, or interfere with the movement of the cable-management arm. Adjust the cable positioning
inside the cable management arm as needed.
NOTE: If you pull the system out to its furthest extension, the slide assemblies lock in the extended position. To
release the lock, press the slide release latch on the side of the slide and then slide the system into the rack.
11 When you are satisfied that the cables are routed correctly, push the system fully into the rack.
12 Lift the cable-management arm retention latch on the tray to secure the arm (see Figure 1-14).
Removing the System From the Rack
Removing a System With Sliding Rails
To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure:
1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet.
2 Remove the I/O cable connectors and power cable connectors from their respective connectors on the
system back panel.
3 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack.
4 Pull the system out of the rack until it locks with the rails in the extended position.
5 Pull up on the front release latch on each rail (see Figure 1-9) and slide the system forward.
6 Pull the system completely out of the rack.
Removing a System With Static Rails
To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure:
1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet.
2 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack.
3 Disconnect all cables from the system.
4 Pull the system out of the rack until it stops because of the release latches.
5 Push down on the release latches on each side of the system (see Figure 1-10).
6 Pull the system completely out of the rack.26 Four-Post Rack InstallationTwo-Post Rack Installation 27
Two-Post Rack Installation
The two-post rack kit is used to install a system in a two-post, open-frame relay rack, such as those
found in telecommunications equipment facilities. Both 7.62-cm or 15.24-cm (3-inch and 6-inch) wide
two-post racks with universal hole spacing or wide hole spacing are accommodated. You can install this
kit in a center-mount or a flush-mount configuration.
You must properly secure the two-post relay rack to the floor, the ceiling, or upper wall, and where
applicable, to adjacent racks, using floor and wall fasteners and bracing specified or approved by the
rack manufacturer or by industry standards. See the two-post rack manufacturer's documentation for
warnings before attempting this installation.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to install the system into a two-post, open-frame relay rack that has not been
securely anchored in place. Damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others may result.
Safety Instructions
Use the following safety guidelines to ensure your own personal safety and to help protect your system
and working environment from potential damage. For complete safety information, see the Product
Information Guide.
SAFETY: Rack Mounting of Systems
Observe the following precautions for rack stability and safety. Also refer to the rack installation
documentation accompanying the system and the rack for specific caution statements and
procedures.
Systems are considered to be components in a rack. Thus, "component" refers to any system as well
as to various peripherals or supporting hardware.
CAUTION: After installing system/components in a rack, never pull more than one component out of the rack on its slide
assemblies at one time. The weight of more than one extended component could cause the rack to tip over and may result
in serious injury.
NOTE: Your system is safety-certified as a free-standing unit and as a component for use in a Dell rack
cabinet using the customer rack kit. The installation of your system and rack kit in any other rack cabinet has
not been approved by any safety agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure that the final combination of
system and rack complies with all applicable safety standards and local electric code requirements. Dell
disclaims all liability and warranties in connection with such combinations. 28 Two-Post Rack Installation
• System rack kits are intended to be installed in a rack by trained service technicians. If you install the
kit in any other rack, be sure that the rack meets the specifications of a Dell rack.
CAUTION: Do not move racks by yourself. Due to the height and weight of the rack, a minimum of two people
should accomplish this task.
• Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.
• Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a component from the rack.
• Use caution when pressing the component rail release latches and sliding a component into or out
of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
• Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load
should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating.
• Ensure that proper airflow is provided to components in the rack.
• Do not step on or stand on any component when servicing other components in a rack.
Before You Begin
Before you begin installing your system in the rack, carefully read "Safety Instructions," found earlier in
this guide, as well as the safety instructions found in your Product Information Guide for additional
information.
CAUTION: When installing multiple systems in a rack, complete all of the procedures for the current system
before attempting to install the next system.
NOTE: For instructions on installing the system itself, see ""Installing the System in the Rack" on page 37."
Important Safety Information
Observe the safety precautions in the following subsections when installing your system in the rack.
CAUTION: You must strictly follow the procedures in this document to protect yourself as well as others who
may be involved. Your system may be very large and heavy and proper preparation and planning are important
to prevent injury to yourself and to others. This precaution becomes increasingly important when systems are
installed high up in the rack.
CAUTION: Do not install rack kit components designed for another system. Use only the rack kit for your system.
Using the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to
others.
Recommended Tools and Supplies
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver (if changing bracket to flush-mount configuration)
• Masking tape or felt-tip pen to mark the mounting holesTwo-Post Rack Installation 29
Rack Kit Contents
The two-post rack kit includes (see Figure 2-1):
• One pair of mounting rails
• 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (8)
• Releasable tie wraps (2) (not shown in Figure 2-1)
Figure 2-1. Two-Post Rack Kit Components
1 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head
Phillips screws (8)
2 15.24-cm (6-inch) wide,
center-mount, threaded studs
3 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, centermount, threaded studs
4 adjustable mounting flange 5 center-mount mounting flange 6 15.24-cm (6-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs
7 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs
8 flush-mount mounting flange 9 mounting rails (2)
9
1
7
8
6
5
3
2
430 Two-Post Rack Installation
Installation Tasks
Installing a two-post rack kit includes performing the following tasks in order:
1 Marking the rack
• Universal-hole spacing rack
• Wide-hole spacing rack
2 Installing the mounting rails in the rack
• Center-mount installation
• Flush-mount installation
3 Installing the system in the rack
4 Routing cables
Marking the Rack
You must allow 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inch) of vertical space for each system that you install in the two-post
rack.
Universal-Hole Spacing Racks
Racks with universal-hole spacing have an alternating pattern of three holes per rack unit with center-tocenter hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm, 15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm
(0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) for the front and back vertical column of holes (see Figure 2-2).
Figure 2-2. Two-Post, Open-Frame Relay Rack Universal-Hole Spacing
12.7 mm (0.5 inch)
15.9 mm (0.625 inch)
15.9 mm (0.625 inch)
1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches)Two-Post Rack Installation 31
Wide-Hole Spacing Racks
Racks with wide-hole spacing have an alternating pattern of two holes per rack unit with center-to-center
hole spacing (beginning at the top hole of a 1-U space) of 31.7 mm and 12.7 mm (1.25 inches and 0.5 inch)
for the front and back vertical columns of holes (see Figure 2-3).
Figure 2-3. Two-Post, Open-Frame Relay Rack Wide-Hole Spacing
To mark the rack, perform the following steps:
1 Place a mark on the rack's front vertical rails where you want to locate the bottom of the system you are
installing in the two-post rack.
The bottom of each 1-U space is at the middle of the narrowest metal area between holes.
NOTE: If your rack has wide-hole spacing, go to step 3.
2 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up three holes in a rack
with universal-hole spacing) (see Figure 2-2).
Each 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space on a rack with universal-hole spacing has three holes
with center-to-center spacing between holes (beginning at the top of a 1-U space) of 15.9 mm,
15.9 mm, and 12.7 mm (0.625 inch, 0.625 inch, and 0.5 inch) (see Figure 2-2).
NOTE: If your rack has universal-hole spacing, you have completed the procedure for marking the rack.
3 Place a mark 44 mm (1.75 inches) above the original mark you made (or count up to the next hole in
the rack with wide-hole spacing (see Figure 2-3).
Each 1 U (44 mm, or 1.75 inches) of vertical space on a rack with wide-hole spacing has two holes with
center-to-center spacing between holes (beginning at the top of a 1-U space) of 31.7 mm (1.25 inches)
(see Figure 2-3).
1 U (44 mm or 1.75 inches)
12.7 mm (0.5 inch)
31.7 mm (1.25 inches)32 Two-Post Rack Installation
Installing the Mounting Rails
You can install the mounting rails in a two-post, open-frame rack having either universal-hole spacing (see
Figure 2-2) or wide-hole spacing (see Figure 2-3). You can install the mounting rails in either a flush-mount
or center-mount configuration.
CAUTION: Do not install another system using this rack kit. Use only the rack kit intended for your system. Using
the rack kit for another system may result in damage to the system and personal injury to yourself and to others.
Center-Mount Installation
The two-post rack kit is shipped with the brackets configured for a 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide center-mount
installation. See Figure 2-1 for mounting rail components. To complete the installation, perform the
following steps:
1 Locate the right mounting rail and push the adjustable mounting bracket toward the back of the
mounting rail (see Figure 2-4).
2 Position the right mounting rail in the two-post rack at the location you marked, push the centermount adjustable mounting bracket forward against the vertical two-post rack, and secure the
mounting flange and adjustable mounting bracket to the rack with four 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head
Phillips screws (see Figure 2-4).
3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 to install the left mounting rail in the rack.Two-Post Rack Installation 33
Figure 2-4. Installing the Mounting Rails for Center-Mount Configuration
Flush-Mount Installation
The two-post rack kit is shipped with the brackets configured for a 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide center-mount
installation. See Figure 2-1 for mounting rail components. To prepare the mounting rails for flush-mount
installation in the two-post rack, perform the following steps:
1 Locate the two mounting rails and place them side by side on a smooth work surface, with the front
ends of the mounting rails toward you (see Figure 2-5).
2 Using a 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver, remove two nuts from the adjustable mounting bracket
(see Figure 2-5).
1 two-post open-frame rack 2 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head
Phillips screws (4 per rail)
3 center-mount mounting flange
2 mounting rails (2) 4 system rails (2) 6 release latch
2
1
4
6
3
534 Two-Post Rack Installation
3 Remove the bracket and then place the bracket on either the 7.62-cm or 15.24-cm (3-inch or 6-inch)
wide flush-mount threaded studs (see Figure 2-5).
4 Using the two nuts that you removed in step 2, tighten the nuts finger tight to secure the adjustable
mounting bracket (see Figure 2-5).
5 Repeat step 2 through step 4 to configure the other mounting rail.
Figure 2-5. Configuring the Adjustable Mounting Bracket for Flush-Mount Installation
6 Holding the left mounting rail at the location you marked, position the flush-mount mounting flange
against the front of the vertical two-post rack and secure it to the two-post rail with two 12-24 x
0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (see Figure 2-6).
1 nuts (2 per bracket) 2 adjustable mounting bracket 3 7.62-cm (3-inch) wide, flushmount, threaded studs
4 flush-mount mounting flange
1
4
3
2Two-Post Rack Installation 35
7 Slide the adjustable-mounting bracket so that it is against the back of vertical two-post rack and secure
it to the two-post rail with two 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head Phillips screws (see Figure 2-6).
8 Repeat step 6 and step 7 to install the right mounting rail in the rack.
9 Using a 3/8-inch wrench or nut driver, tighten the nuts on the adjustable mounting brackets on both
mounting rails.
Figure 2-6. Installing the Mounting Rails for Flush-Mount Configuration
1 two-post open-frame rack 2 12-24 x 0.5-inch pan-head
Phillips screws (4 per rail)
3 mounting rails (2)
2
1
336 Two-Post Rack Installation
Installing Chassis Static Rail Modules
NOTE: You do not need to remove the optional front bezel to install or remove the chassis static rail modules
from the chassis.
1 To install a rail module, locate the three keyhole slots on the rail module and the corresponding
shoulder screws on the side of the system (see Figure 2-7).
2 Place the rail module against the side of the system so that the shoulder screws fit through the round
portion of the keyhole slots, then slide the module towards the back of the system.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the other rail module.
To remove a rail module from the chassis, pull up on the release latch, then slide the rail forward and
remove the rail module from the chassis.
Figure 2-7. Installing and Removing Static Rail Chassis Modules
1 keyhole slots (6) 2 shoulder screws (6) 3 release latch
4 rail modules (2) 5 system
4
2
3
1
5Two-Post Rack Installation 37
Installing the System in the Rack
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one system, install the first system in the lowest available position
in the rack.
1 Place one hand on the front-bottom of the system and the other hand on the back-bottom of the
system.
2 Lift the system into position so that the side rails at the back of the system are aligned with the
mounting rails in the rack.
CAUTION: Because of the size and weight of the system, never attempt to install the system in the mounting rails
by yourself.
3 Push the system into the mounting rails until the system stops.
4 Push in and turn the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel to secure the system to the
rack.
Removing the System From the Rack
To remove the system from the rack, perform the following procedure:
1 Turn off the system and attached peripherals, and disconnect the system from the electrical outlet.
2 Loosen the thumbscrews on each side of the front chassis panel that secures the system to the rack.
3 Disconnect all cables from the system.
4 Pull the system out of the rack until it stops because of the release latches.
5 Push down on the release latches on each side of the system (see Figure 1-10).
6 Pull the system completely out of the rack.38 Two-Post Rack InstallationIndex 39
Index
C
cable routing, 24
cable tray, installing, 22
cable-management arm
installing, 22
routing cables, 25
cables, 25
center-mount
configuration, 32
contents listed
two-post rack kit, 29
VersaRails kit, 8-9
D
doors
removing, 10
replacing, 22
F
flush-mount
configuration, 33
four-post rack
removing system, 25, 37
four-post rack kit
tools and supplies, 7
VersaRails kit contents, 8-9
I
installing
cable tray, 22
cable-management arm, 22
four-post rack kit, 15
RapidRails mounting rails, 15
static rail modules, 14, 36
system in four-post rack,
18, 37
two-post rack kit, 27
two-post rack mounting
rails, 32-33
VersaRails mounting rails,
14, 17, 19, 36
K
kit contents
two-post rack, 29
VersaRails, 8-9, 21
M
marking rack
four-post rack kit, 10
two-post rack kit, 30-31
R
rack mount precautions, 6, 28
rack requirements
for VersaRails, 7
rack stabilizer feet, 7
rack unit, 11
removing system
four-post rack, 25, 37
replacing rack doors, 22
routing cables, 24
S
safety instructions, 5, 27
stabilizer feet, 7
T
tools and supplies
four-post rack kit, 7
two-post rack kit, 28
two-post rack kit
installing mounting rails, 32
kit contents, 29
marking rack, 30
tools and supplies, 28
V
VersaRails
installing, 14, 17, 19, 36
kit contents, 8-9, 21
vertical rails
marking, 10
one rack unit, 1140 Index
40 Indexwww.dell.com | support.dell.com
Guide d'installation du rackRemarques, avis et précautions
REMARQUE : une REMARQUE indique des informations importantes qui peuvent vous aider à mieux utiliser
votre ordinateur.
AVIS : un AVIS vous avertit d'un risque de dommage matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter
le problème.
PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION indique un risque potentiel d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle
ou de mort.
____________________
Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
© 2005 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell, le logo DELL, RapidRails et VersaRails sont des marques de Dell Inc.
Tous les autres noms de marques et marques commerciales utilisés dans ce document se rapportent aux sociétés propriétaires des marques et
des noms de ces produits. Dell Inc. décline tout intérêt dans l'utilisation des marques déposées et des noms de marques ne lui appartenant pas.
Novembre 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Sommaire 43
Sommaire
1 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants. . . . . . . . . . . 45
Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Consignes générales d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Informations importantes concernant la sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Spécifications de rack requises pour les rails VersaRails . . . . . . . . . 47
Pieds stabilisateurs du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Outils et fournitures recommandés. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tâches d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Retrait des portes du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Marquage du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuration des assemblages à glissière
(kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis
(kits avec rails statiques uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Installation des rails de montage dans le rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Installation du système dans l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants. . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Remise en place des portes du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles
(kits avec rails coulissants uniquement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installation du chemin de câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Installation du passe-câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Acheminement des câbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Retrait du système de l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Retrait d'un système avec rails coulissants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Retrait d'un système avec rails statiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6644 Sommaire
2 Installation dans un rack à deux montants . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Avant de commencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Informations importantes concernant la sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Outils et fournitures recommandés. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Contenu du kit de rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Tâches d'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Marquage du rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rack doté de trous à espacement universel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rack doté de trous à espacement large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Installation des rails de montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Montage central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Montage encastré . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installation du système dans l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Retrait du système de l'armoire rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 45
Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Consignes de sécurité
Respectez les consignes de sécurité de ce guide pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle et pour
contribuer à protéger votre système et votre environnement de travail de dommages potentiels.
Pour obtenir toutes les informations concernant la sécurité et les réglementations, consultez le Guide
d'informationssur le produit fourni avec le système. Vous pouvez trouver des informations sur la garantie
soit dans ce document, soit dans un document à part.
SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes
Pour la stabilité du rack et pour votre sécurité, respectez les précautions suivantes. Reportez-vous
également à la documentation accompagnant le système et le rack pour connaître les mises en garde
et les procédures spécifiques.
Les systèmes sont considérés comme étant les composants d'un rack. Le terme “composant”
fait donc référence à un système mais aussi aux différents périphériques ou matériels associés.
PRÉCAUTION : avant d'installer des systèmes dans un rack autonome, installez d'abord les pieds
stabilisateurs avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs
avant. L'installation de systèmes dans un rack non équipé de pieds stabilisateurs peut provoquer son
basculement et entraîner des blessures. Installez toujours les pieds stabilisateurs du rack avant d'ajouter
des composants dans celui-ci.
Après avoir installé un système ou des composants dans un rack, ne faites jamais coulisser hors du rack
plus d'un composant à la fois. Le poids de plusieurs composants sortis du rack risquerait de le faire basculer
et de blesser quelqu'un gravement.
REMARQUE : le système est certifié sur le plan de la sécurité en tant qu'unité autonome et en tant que
composant destiné à être utilisé dans une armoire rack Dell, à l'aide du kit de rack client. L'installation du
système et du kit d'installation en rack dans une autre armoire n'a reçu aucune homologation des organismes
de certification de la sécurité. Il vous incombe de veiller à ce que la combinaison finale système et rack soit
conforme à toutes les normes de sécurité en vigueur, ainsi qu'aux normes électriques locales. Dell décline
toute responsabilité et toutes garanties liées à ce type de combinaisons.
• Les kits de rack doivent être installés par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Si vous
installez ce kit dans un autre rack, assurez-vous que ce dernier possède les mêmes spécifications
qu'un rack Dell.
PRÉCAUTION : ne déplacez pas de rack sans aide. En raison de la hauteur et du poids du rack, cette tâche
doit être réalisée par deux personnes au minimum.46 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
• Avant de travailler sur le rack, vérifiez que les pieds stabilisateurs sont fixés au rack, qu'ils touchent le
sol et que tout le poids du rack repose sur le sol. Avant d'intervenir sur un rack isolé, installez d'abord
les pieds stabilisateurs avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds
stabilisateurs avant.
• Chargez le rack du bas vers le haut, en plaçant toujours l'élément le plus lourd en premier.
• Assurez-vous que le rack est d'aplomb et stable avant de tirer un composant hors de son compartiment.
• Agissez avec précaution lorsque vous appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement des rails pour insérer ou
retirer un composant. Veillez notamment à ne pas coincer vos doigts dans les rails coulissants.
• Ne surchargez pas le circuit d'alimentation secteur du rack. La consommation totale du rack ne doit
pas dépasser 80 % de la capacité du circuit.
• Assurez-vous que les éléments installés dans le rack sont suffisamment ventilés.
• Ne montez pas sur un composant lorsque vous intervenez sur d'autres composants du rack.
Consignes générales d'installation
Ce guide d'installation s'adresse à des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Il contient les instructions
relatives à l'installation d'un ou de plusieurs systèmes dans une armoire rack. Le kit RapidRails™ peut être
installé sans outils dans toutes les armoires rack du fabricant du système ; le kit VersaRails™ peut être
installé dans la plupart des armoires rack standard. La procédure d'installation des kits RapidRails et
VersaRails est similaire. Un kit d'installation est nécessaire pour chaque système.
Cette section contient les procédures d'installation des kits suivants pour racks à quatre montants :
• Kit pour rack avec rails coulissants
• Kit pour rack avec rails statiques (versions RapidRails et VersaRails)
Voir “Installation dans un rack à deux montants”, à la page 67 pour obtenir les instructions
d'installation d'un kit de rails statiques dans un rack à deux montants.
Avant de commencer
Avant de commencer à installer le système dans le rack, lisez attentivement la section “Consignes de
sécurité”, ainsi que les consignes de sécurité figurant dans le Guide d'informations sur le produit pour
plus d'informations.
PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes dans un rack, terminez toutes les opérations requises
sur le système en cours d'installation avant de passer au suivant.
PRÉCAUTION : les racks peuvent être extrêmement lourds, mais se déplacent assez facilement sur leurs
roulettes. Cependant, les armoires ne possèdent pas de système de freinage. Procédez avec la plus grande
prudence pour déplacer une armoire rack. Rentrez ses pieds réglables lorsque vous la changez d'emplacement.
Évitez de déplacer le rack le long de rampes ou de plans inclinés trop longs ou trop abrupts, sur lesquels
l'armoire pourrait vous échapper. Ressortez les pieds réglables lorsque l'armoire doit être soutenue ou pour
lui éviter de glisser sur ses roulettes.
REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du système proprement dit, voir “Installation du système
dans l'armoire rack”, à la page 58.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 47
Informations importantes concernant la sécurité
Respectez les précautions décrites dans les sous-sections suivantes lors de l'installation du système dans le rack.
PRÉCAUTION : vous devez respecter à la lettre les procédures de ce document afin de garantir votre propre
protection ainsi que celle d'autrui. Le système peut être très lourd et volumineux. Une préparation et une
planification adéquates sont donc importantes afin d'éviter tout risque de blessure pour vous-même ou autrui.
Ces précautions sont d'autant plus importantes lorsque les systèmes sont installés en hauteur.
PRÉCAUTION : n'installez pas de kits prévus pour un autre système. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager
le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne.
Spécifications de rack requises pour les rails VersaRails
AVIS : le kit VersaRails est prévu pour être installé par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés dans un rack
conforme aux spécifications des organismes suivants : American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Electronic
Industries Association (EIA) standard ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297
et Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) 41494. Un kit est nécessaire pour chaque système installé dans un rack.
Pieds stabilisateurs du rack
PRÉCAUTION : avant d'installer des systèmes dans un rack autonome, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs
avant et latéraux. Pour plusieurs racks associés, installez d'abord les pieds stabilisateurs avant. L'installation de
systèmes dans un rack non équipé de pieds stabilisateurs peut provoquer son basculement et entraîner des
blessures. Installez toujours les pieds stabilisateurs du rack avant d'ajouter des composants dans celui-ci.
Les pieds stabilisateurs évitent au rack de basculer. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l'armoire rack
pour savoir comment installer et fixer les pieds stabilisateurs.
Outils et fournitures recommandés
Les outils et fournitures suivants peuvent être nécessaires pour installer le système dans un rack
à quatre montants :
• Tournevis cruciforme n°2
• Une bande adhésive ou un stylo feutre, pour marquer les trous de montage à utiliser
Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants
• Une paire d'assemblages à glissière (convertible en configuration RapidRails ou VersaRails)
• Un passe-câbles
• Un chemin de câbles
• Un câble de voyant d'état (le cas échéant)
• Des fixe-câbles pour attacher les cordons sur le passe-câbles
• Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (utilisées dans la configuration VersaRails uniquement)
REMARQUE : les vis au pas non métrique décrites dans les illustrations et dans les procédures sont identifiées
par la taille et le nombre de filets par pouce. Par exemple, une vis à tête cruciforme n° 10 avec 32 filets par pouce
est désignée par l'appellation vis 10-32.48 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Figure 1-1. Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails coulissants
1 Chemin de câbles 2 Assemblages à glissière (2) 3 Vis cruciformes à tête plate
10-32 x 0,5 pouce (8)
(configuration VersaRails
uniquement)
4 Fixe-câbles 5 Câble du voyant d'état
(le cas échéant)
6 Passe-câbles
1
2
3
5
6
4Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 49
Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques
• Une paire de rails de montage statiques avec supports VersaRails ou RapidRails
• Une paire de modules de rails statiques pour le châssis
• Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 10-32 x 0,5 pouce (kits VersaRails uniquement)
• Fixe-câbles détachables (2) (non représentés figure 1-2)
REMARQUE : les vis au pas non métrique décrites dans les illustrations et dans les procédures sont identifiées
par la taille et le nombre de filets par pouce. Par exemple, une vis à tête cruciforme n° 10 avec 32 filets par pouce
est désignée par l'appellation vis 10-32.
Figure 1-2. Contenu du kit pour rack avec rails statiques
1 Vis cruciformes à tête plate
10-32 x 0,5 pouce (8)
(kits VersaRails uniquement)
2 Rails de montage statiques (2) 3 Modules de rails statiques
pour le châssis (2)
FRONT L
1
3
250 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Tâches d'installation
Pour installer un kit, vous devez effectuer dans l'ordre indiqué les tâches suivantes, décrites plus loin dans
ce guide :
1 Retrait des portes du rack
2 Marquage du rack
3 Configuration des assemblages de rails coulissants (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement)
4 Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis (kits avec rails statiques uniquement)
5 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack
6 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack
7 Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails coulissants uniquement)
8 Acheminement des câbles
9 Remise en place des portes du rack
Retrait des portes du rack
Consultez les procédures de retrait des portes dans la documentation fournie avec votre armoire rack.
PRÉCAUTION : compte tenu de leur poids et de leur taille, ne retirez ou n'installez jamais les portes sans
l'assistance d'une autre personne.
PRÉCAUTION : placez les deux portes dans un endroit sûr où elles ne risquent pas de tomber accidentellement
et de blesser quelqu'un.
Marquage du rack
Pour un système de 1 U, vous devez compter un espace vertical de 44 mm (soit 1,75 pouces) pour
chaque système installé dans le rack.
Les racks conformes aux normes EIA-310 comportent des séries alternées de trois trous par unité.
L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est
respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce, 0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce) pour les rails
verticaux avant et arrière (voir la figure 1-3). Les armoires rack peuvent comporter des trous ronds ou carrés.
REMARQUE : les rails verticaux peuvent être marqués par des lignes horizontales et des chiffres progressant
par incréments de 1 U. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez noter le numéro figurant sur le rail vertical du rack.
Dans ce cas, il n'est pas nécessaire de marquer le rack ou d'y apposer un morceau de bande adhésive. Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 51
Figure 1-3. Unité de rack
PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, placez les rails de montage de façon que le premier
système soit disposé le plus bas possible dans le rack.
Pour marquer le rack, procédez comme suit :
1 Placez une marque (ou de la bande adhésive) sur les rails verticaux avant du rack, à l'endroit
correspondant au bas du système à installer.
Le bas de chaque espace de 1 U se trouve au milieu de la zone métallique la plus étroite entre les trous
(repérée par une ligne horizontale sur certaines armoires rack ; voir la figure 1-4).
2 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite au
départ (ou remontez de 3 trous dans les racks de type EIA-310), puis marquez les rails verticaux du
rack avec un stylo feutre ou de la bande adhésive (si vous avez compté les trous, placez une marque
juste au-dessus du trou supérieur). Cette marque ou ce morceau de bande adhésive indique
l'emplacement du rebord supérieur du système sur les rails verticaux (voir la figure 1-4).
1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces)
12,7 mm (0,5 pouce)
15,9 mm (0,625 pouce)
15,9 mm (0,625 pouce)
12,7 mm (0,5 pouce)52 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Figure 1-4. Marquage des rails verticaux
1 Marques sur le rail vertical (2)
1Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 53
Configuration des assemblages à glissière
(kits avec rails coulissants uniquement)
Les rails coulissants disposent d'un support de montage rotatif situé à chacune de leurs extrémités.
La position de ce support détermine si le rail est utilisé en configuration RapidRails ou VersaRails.
Le côté RapidRails du support est équipé d'un crochet et d'un loquet qui le fixe au rail vertical.
Le côté VersaRails du support comporte trois trous. Le support est alors fixé au rail vertical par des vis.
REMARQUE : les assemblages à glissière fournies avec le kit sont configurées en RapidRails.
Pour faire pivoter le support de montage et passer en configuration VersaRails (voir la figure 1-5),
procédez comme suit :
1 Relevez le levier d'éjection du support de montage rotatif.
2 Faites pivoter le support puis faites-le glisser vers le haut pour le dégager des deux picots.
3 Continuez de faire pivoter le support à 180 degrés jusqu'à ce que les picots s'insèrent dans
les encoches.
4 Faites pivoter le support dans la direction opposée pour l'emboîter dans les picots.
Figure 1-5. Changement de la position du support de montage rotatif
1 Support rotatif 2 Levier d'éjection 3 Picots (2)
4 Encoches (2) 5 Collerette du support de montage
(configuration RapidRails)
1
2
4
3
554 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis
(kits avec rails statiques uniquement)
REMARQUE : il n'est pas nécessaire de retirer le cadre avant fourni en option pour installer ou retirer les modules
de rails statiques du châssis.
1 Pour installer un module de rails, repérez les trois orifices en trou de serrure sur le module, ainsi que
les vis à épaulement correspondantes sur le côté du système (voir la figure 1-6).
2 Placez le module de rail contre le côté du système de façon que les vis à épaulement s'emboîtent
dans la partie ronde des trous de serrure. Faites ensuite glisser le module vers l'arrière du système.
3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour installer l'autre module de rail.
Pour retirer un module de rail du châssis, relevez le loquet de dégagement et tirez le rail vers l'avant.
Figure 1-6. Installation et retrait des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis
1 Orifices en trou de serrure (6) 2 Vis à épaulement (6) 3 Loquet de dégagement
4 Modules de rails (2) 5 Système
4
2
3
1
5Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 55
Installation des rails de montage dans le rack
REMARQUE : les instructions suivantes s'appliquent à la fois aux rails de montage statiques et aux rails
coulissants.
Installation des rails de montage RapidRails
1 À l'avant du rack, positionnez l'un des rails de façon que la collerette du support de montage s'insère
entre les marques, les morceaux de bande adhésive ou les emplacements numérotés sur les rails
verticaux (section Marquage du rack). Voir la figure 1-7.
Le crochet de fixation supérieur de la collerette avant du support de montage doit pénétrer dans
le trou supérieur, situé entre les marques faites sur les rails verticaux.
Figure 1-7. Installation des rails de montage RapidRails
1 Crochets de fixation (2) 2 Boutons-poussoirs (2) 3 Rails de montage (2)
Avant du rack
1
2
356 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
2 Poussez le rail vers l'avant jusqu'à ce que le crochet de fixation soit positionné dans le trou carré, puis
appuyez sur la collerette du support de montage jusqu'à ce que le crochet se mette en place et que le
bouton-poussoir ressorte dans le trou carré inférieur (voir la figure 1-7).
3 À l'arrière de l'armoire, tirez la collerette du support de montage vers l'arrière jusqu'à ce que le crochet
soit positionné dans le trou carré du haut, puis appuyez sur la collerette jusqu'à ce que le crochet se
mette en place et que le bouton-poussoir ressorte dans le trou carré inférieur.
4 Recommencez la procédure, de l'étape 1 à l'étape 3, pour le rail de montage situé de l'autre côté
du rack.
5 Vérifiez que les rails de montage sont montés à la même position verticale de chaque côté du rack.
Installation des rails de montage VersaRails
1 À l'avant du rack, positionnez l'un des rails de façon que la collerette du support de montage s'insère
entre les marques, les morceaux de bande adhésive ou les emplacements numérotés sur les rails
verticaux (section Marquage du rack). Voir la figure 1-8.
Les trois trous situés à l'avant de la collerette du support de montage doivent s'aligner avec ceux qui
se trouvent entre les marques que vous avez faites sur le rail vertical avant.
2 Insérez deux vis cruciformes 10-32 x 0,5 pouce dans les trous supérieur et inférieur de la collerette
du support de montage pour fixer le rail de montage sur le rail vertical avant.
3 À l'arrière de l'armoire, tirez sur la collerette du support de montage jusqu'à ce que les trous de
montage s'alignent avec les trous correspondants du rail vertical arrière.
4 Insérez deux vis cruciformes 10-32 x 0,5 pouce dans les trous supérieur et inférieur de la collerette
du support de montage pour fixer le rail de montage sur le rail vertical arrière.
5 Recommencez la procédure de l'étape 1 à l'étape 4, pour le rail de montage situé de l'autre côté
du rack.
6 Vérifiez que les rails sont montés à la même hauteur sur les rails verticaux de chaque côté du rack.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 57
Figure 1-8. Installation des rails de montage VersaRails
1 Collerette du support
de montage
2 Vis cruciformes à tête plate
10-32 x 0,5 pouce
(4 par rail de montage)
3 Rails de montage (2)
Avant du rack
1
2
358 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Installation du système dans l'armoire rack
PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, installez le premier le plus bas possible dans le rack.
PRÉCAUTION : en raison de la taille et du poids du système, ne tentez jamais de l'installer seul dans les rails
de montage.
Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants
1 Tirez les deux rails coulissants intérieurs hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'ils bloquent sur la butée
(voir la figure 1-9).
2 Soulevez le système pour le placer au dessus des rails coulissants.
Les trois vis à épaulement situées de chaque côté du système s'emboîtent dans les fentes en forme de J
qui se trouvent sur les assemblages à glissière internes (voir la figure 1-9).
3 Inclinez le système vers l'arrière tout en alignant les vis à épaulement arrière situées sur les côtés
du système avec les fentes en J situées à l'arrière des assemblages à glissière.
4 Emboîtez les vis à épaulement arrière dans les fentes correspondantes.
5 Abaissez l'avant du système jusqu'à ce que les vis à épaulement avant et centrale s'emboîtent dans
les fentes en J.
Le loquet de dégagement du système situé à l'avant du rail coulissant intérieur s'enclenche lorsque la
vis à épaulement s'insère dans la fente avant. Utilisez ce loquet pour retirer le système des assemblages
à glissière.
6 Appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement situé à l'extérieur de chaque rail coulissant interne, puis poussez
le système dans le rack.
7 Installez le passe-câbles. Voir “Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles (kits avec rails
coulissants uniquement)”, à la page 62.
8 Serrez les vis moletées sur le panneau avant du rack pour fixer les assemblages à glissière sur le rack.Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 59
Figure 1-9. Installation d'un système avec des rails coulissants
Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques
Pour installer le système dans le rack, procédez comme suit :
1 À l'avant du système, soulevez le châssis et positionnez-le de façon que les modules de rail du châssis
soient alignés avec les rails de montage du rack.
2 Poussez le châssis dans les rails de montage jusqu'à la butée (voir la figure 1-10).
3 Serrez les deux vis moletées situées sur le panneau avant du châssis.
4 Installez le cadre avant (facultatif). Vous trouverez les instructions correspondantes dans la
documentation fournie avec le système.
1 Vis à épaulement (6) 2 Loquet de dégagement du rail 3 Emplacements en forme de J (6)
4 Loquet de dégagement frontal 5 Rails intérieurs (2)
1
2
4 3
560 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Figure 1-10. Installation d'un système avec des rails statiques
5 Repérez les points d'attache des fixe-câbles situés sur les deux collerettes des supports de montage
arrière (voir la figure 1-11).
Ces fixe-câbles sont utilisés pour fixer les cordons du système sur les rails de montage.
1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Modules de rails du châssis (2) 3 Vis moletées (2)
4 Loquets de dégagement (2)
1
3
4
2Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 61
Figure 1-11. Installation des fixe-câbles détachables
6 Faites passer le plot du fixe-câbles dans le point d'attache.
7 Enfoncez le plot de manière à emboîter le fixe-câbles dans le rail de montage.
8 Utilisez le fixe-câbles pour fixer les cordons du système sur le rail de montage.
1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Fixe-câbles détachables (2)
1
262 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Remise en place des portes du rack
Consultez les procédures de réinstallation des portes dans la documentation fournie avec vos armoires rack.
PRÉCAUTION : compte tenu de leur poids et de leur taille, ne retirez ou n'installez jamais les portes sans
l'assistance d'une autre personne.
Installation du chemin de câbles et du passe-câbles
(kits avec rails coulissants uniquement)
REMARQUE : cette procédure ne s'applique pas au kit de rails statiques.
Installation du chemin de câbles
1 À l'arrière du système, placez le chemin de câbles entre les rails de montage et poussez-le jusqu'à ce
qu'il se mette en place (voir la figure 1-12).
2 Pour préparer l'installation du passe-câbles, ouvrez le loquet de fixation en appuyant sur le cliquet
central (voir la figure 1-12).
Figure 1-12. Installation du chemin de câbles
1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Chemin de câbles 3 Loquet de fixation du passe-câbles
1
3
Arrière du système
2Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 63
Installation du passe-câbles
REMARQUE : vous pouvez placer le passe-câbles sur le rail de montage gauche ou droit, selon la façon dont
vous souhaitez disposer les câbles du système.
1 Si nécessaire, ouvrez le loquet de fixation du passe-câbles en appuyant sur le cliquet central
(voir la figure 1-12).
2 À l'arrière du système, emboîtez le loquet situé à l'avant du passe-câbles sur le support interne
de l'assemblage à glissière (voir la figure 1-13).
3 Emboîtez l'autre loquet du passe-câbles sur le support externe de l'assemblage à glissière
(voir la figure 1-13).
Figure 1-13. Installation du passe-câbles
1 Rails de montage (2) 2 Supports (2) 3 Loquets (2)
4 Passe-câbles
Arrière du système
1
2
4
364 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Acheminement des câbles
1 Ouvrez le conduit situé en haut du passe-câbles pour permettre le passage des câbles
(voir la figure 1-14).
Figure 1-14. Acheminement des câbles dans le passe-câbles
2 Le cas échéant, connectez le câble du voyant d'état dans le connecteur approprié, sur le panneau
arrière du système.
Faites passer ce câble dans le passe-câbles et emboîtez l'extrémité dotée du voyant dans l'emplacement
situé à l'extrémité du passe-câbles.
3 Branchez les câbles d'E/S et les cordons d'alimentation sur les connecteurs correspondants, à l'arrière
du système.
Pour plus de détails sur le branchement des câbles, consultez le Guide de mise en route ou le Manuel
du propriétaire.
REMARQUE : pour éviter une tension excessive des câbles d'alimentation, faites-les passer dans les
boucles situées à l'arrière des blocs d'alimentation.
4 Utilisez les fixe-câbles fournis pour regrouper les câbles et les dégager des systèmes adjacents installés
dans le rack.
1 Passe-câbles 2 Fixe-câbles préinstallés 3 Loquet de fixation du passe-câbles
4 Couvercle du conduit
de câbles
5 Connecteur du câble du
voyant d'état du système
6 Bande Velcro
7 Fixe-câbles préinstallés
4
5
2
3
6
Arrière du système
1
7Installation dans un rack à quatre montants 65
5 Disposez les câbles dans les conduits du passe-câbles.
6 Réglez la tension des câbles autour de la charnière et fixez-les à l'aide de la bande Velcro verticale
(voir la figure 1-14).
7 Utilisez les fixe-câbles préinstallés à l'extrémité interne du passe-câbles et à l'emplacement de la
charnière pour maintenir les câbles (voir la figure 1-14).
8 Refermez le conduit de câbles.
9 Desserrez les vis moletées fixant l'avant du système au rail vertical avant.
10 Poussez le système dans le rack puis ressortez-le, pour vérifier que les câbles sont installés
correctement et ne se bloquent pas, ne se tendent pas et ne se coincent pas lors du déplacement
du passe-câbles. Si nécessaire, repositionnez les câbles dans le passe-câbles.
REMARQUE : si vous tirez le système au maximum, les assemblages à glissière se verrouillent dans
cette position. Pour les déverrouiller, appuyez sur le loquet de dégagement situé sur le côté de la glissière,
puis faites coulisser le système dans le rack.
11 Une fois les câbles correctement positionnés, enfoncez le système dans le rack.
12 Refermez le loquet de fixation du passe-câbles (voir la figure 1-14).
Retrait du système de l'armoire rack
Retrait d'un système avec rails coulissants
Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit :
1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant.
2 Débranchez les câbles d'E-S et les cordons d'alimentation des connecteurs correspondants,
à l'arrière du système.
3 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système
au rack).
4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il bloque sur la butée.
5 Soulevez le loquet de dégagement avant de chaque rail (voir la figure 1-9), puis tirez le système
vers l'avant.
6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.66 Installation dans un rack à quatre montants
Retrait d'un système avec rails statiques
Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit :
1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant.
2 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système
au rack).
3 Déconnectez tous les câbles du système.
4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il soit arrêté par la butée de sécurité.
5 Appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement, de chaque côté du système (voir la figure 1-10).
6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.Installation dans un rack à deux montants 67
Installation dans un rack à deux montants
Le kit pour rack à deux montants permet d'installer un système dans un rack à châssis ouvert tel que
ceux qui sont utilisés dans les équipements de télécommunications. Des racks à deux montants d'une
largeur de 7,62 cm ou 15,24 cm (soit 3 et 6 pouces) avec un espacement des trous universel ou large
peuvent être utilisés. Vous pouvez installer ce kit dans une configuration à montage central ou encastré.
Le rack à deux montants doit être fixé au sol, au plafond ou en haut d'un mur et si nécessaire, aux racks
adjacents à l'aide d'attaches murales ou de dispositifs de fixation au sol et de calage indiqués ou
approuvés par le fabricant du rack ou conformes aux normes industrielles. Lisez attentivement les
avertissements et consignes figurant dans la documentation du rack avant de commencer l'installation.
PRÉCAUTION : ne tentez pas d'installer le système dans un rack à châssis ouvert si celui-ci n'est pas fixé.
Vous risqueriez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser au de blesser d'autres personnes.
Consignes de sécurité
Respectez les consignes de sécurité de ce guide pour assurer votre sécurité personnelle et pour
contribuer à protéger votre système et votre environnement de travail de dommages potentiels. Pour
obtenir des informations complètes sur la sécurité, reportez-vous au Guide d'informations sur le produit.
SÉCURITÉ : Montage en rack des systèmes
Pour la stabilité du rack et pour votre sécurité, respectez les précautions suivantes. Reportez-vous
également à la documentation accompagnant le système et le rack pour connaître les mises en garde
et les procédures spécifiques.
Les systèmes sont considérés comme étant les composants d'un rack. Le terme “composant” fait
donc référence à un système mais aussi aux différents périphériques ou matériels associés.
PRÉCAUTION : après avoir installé le système/les composants dans un rack, ne sortez jamais plusieurs composants
à la fois à l'aide des assemblages à glissière. Le poids de plusieurs composants sortis du rack risquerait de le faire
basculer et de blesser quelqu'un gravement.
REMARQUE : le système est certifié sur le plan de la sécurité en tant qu'unité autonome et en tant que
composant destiné à être utilisé dans une armoire rack Dell, à l'aide du kit de rack client. L'installation du
système et du kit d'installation en rack dans une autre armoire n'a reçu aucune homologation des organismes
de certification de la sécurité. Il vous incombe de veiller à ce que la combinaison finale système et rack soit
conforme à toutes les normes de sécurité en vigueur, ainsi qu'aux normes électriques locales. Dell décline
toute responsabilité et toutes garanties liées à ce type de combinaisons. 68 Installation dans un rack à deux montants
• Les kits de rack doivent être installés par des techniciens de maintenance qualifiés. Si vous installez ce
kit dans un autre rack, assurez-vous que ce dernier possède les mêmes spécifications qu'un rack Dell.
PRÉCAUTION : ne déplacez pas de rack sans aide. En raison de la hauteur et du poids du rack, cette tâche doit
être réalisée par deux personnes au minimum.
• Chargez le rack du bas vers le haut, en plaçant toujours l'élément le plus lourd en premier.
• Assurez-vous que le rack est d'aplomb et stable avant de tirer un composant hors de son compartiment.
• Agissez avec précaution lorsque vous appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement des rails pour insérer ou
retirer un composant. Veillez notamment à ne pas coincer vos doigts dans les rails coulissants.
• Ne surchargez pas le circuit d'alimentation secteur du rack. La consommation totale du rack ne doit
pas dépasser 80 % de la capacité du circuit.
• Assurez-vous que les éléments installés dans le rack sont suffisamment ventilés.
• Ne montez pas sur un composant lorsque vous intervenez sur d'autres composants du rack.
Avant de commencer
Avant de commencer à installer le système dans le rack, lisez attentivement la section “Consignes de
sécurité”, ainsi que les consignes de sécurité figurant dans le Guide d'informations sur le produit pour plus
d'informations.
PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes dans un rack, terminez toutes les opérations requises sur
le système en cours d'installation avant de passer au suivant.
REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur l'installation du système proprement dit, voir “Installation du système
dans l'armoire rack”, à la page 77“.
Informations importantes concernant la sécurité
Respectez les précautions décrites dans les sous-sections suivantes lors de l'installation du système dans
le rack.
PRÉCAUTION : vous devez respecter à la lettre les procédures de ce document afin de garantir votre propre
protection ainsi que celle d'autrui. Le système peut être très lourd et volumineux. Une préparation et une
planification adéquates sont donc importantes afin d'éviter tout risque de blessure pour vous-même ou autrui.
Ces précautions sont d'autant plus importantes lorsque les systèmes sont installés en hauteur.
PRÉCAUTION : n'installez pas de kits prévus pour un autre système. Sinon, vous risquez d'endommager
le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne.
Outils et fournitures recommandés
• Tournevis cruciforme n°2
• Clé 3/8 ou tournevis à douille (pour passer au montage encastré)
• Bande adhésive ou stylo feutre pour marquer les trous de montage à utiliserInstallation dans un rack à deux montants 69
Contenu du kit de rack
Le kit pour rack à deux montants contient les éléments suivants (voir la figure 2-1) :
• Une paire de rails de montage
• Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce
• Fixe-câbles détachables (2) (non représentés figure 2-1)
Figure 2-1. Composants d'un kit pour rack à deux montants
1 Huit vis cruciformes à tête
plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce
2 Goujons filetés de 15,24 cm
(6 pouces) pour montage
central
3 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm
(3 pouces) pour montage
central
4 Collerette de montage
réglable
5 Collerette pour le montage
central
6 Goujons filetés de 15,24 cm
(6 pouces) pour le montage
encastré
7 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm
(3 pouces) pour le montage
encastré
8 Collerette pour le montage
encastré
9 Rails de montage (2)
9
1
7
8
6
5
3
2
470 Installation dans un rack à deux montants
Tâches d'installation
Pour installer un kit de rack à deux montants, vous devez effectuer les opérations suivantes dans l'ordre
indiqué :
1 Marquage du rack
• Rack doté de trous à espacement universel
• Rack doté de trous à espacement large
2 Installation des rails de montage dans le rack
• Montage central
• Montage encastré
3 Installation du système dans l'armoire rack
4 Acheminement des câbles
Marquage du rack
Vous devez compter un espace vertical de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) pour chaque système installé
dans le rack.
Rack doté de trous à espacement universel
Les racks dotés de trous à espacement universel comportent des séries alternées de trois trous par unité.
L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est
respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce, 0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce) pour les
colonnes avant et arrière (voir la figure 2-2).
Figure 2-2. Espacement universel sur un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert
12,7 mm (0,5 pouce)
15,9 mm (0,625 pouce)
15,9 mm (0,625 pouce)
1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces)Installation dans un rack à deux montants 71
Rack doté de trous à espacement large
Les racks dotés de trous à espacement large comportent des séries alternées de deux trous par unité.
L'espacement entre les trous, mesuré de centre à centre (en commençant par le trou supérieur) est
respectivement de 31,7 mm et 12,7 mm (1,25 pouces et et 0,5 pouce) pour les colonnes avant et arrière
(voir la figure 2-3).
Figure 2-3. Espacement large sur un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert
Pour marquer le rack, procédez comme suit :
1 Placez une marque sur les rails verticaux avant du rack, à l'endroit correspondant au bas du système
à installer dans le rack.
Le bas de chaque espace de 1 U se trouve au milieu de la zone métallique la plus étroite entre les trous.
REMARQUE : si vous utilisez un rack doté de trous à espacement large, passez à l'étape 3.
2 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite au
départ (ou remontez de 3 trous pour un rack avec trous à espacement universel). Voir la figure 2-2.
Chaque unité de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) d'espace vertical dans un rack doté de trous à
espacement universel comporte trois trous. Leur espacement, mesuré de centre à centre (en
commençant par le haut) est respectivement de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm et 12,7 mm (0,625 pouce,
0,625 pouce et 0,5 pouce). Voir la figure 2-2.
REMARQUE : si vous utilisez un rack avec trous à espacement universel, la procédure de marquage est
terminée.
3 Placez une marque à environ 44 mm (1,75 pouces) au-dessus de la marque que vous avez faite
au départ (ou remontez au trou suivant si vous utilisez un rack avec trous à espacement large).
Voir la figure 2-3.
Chaque unité de 1 U (44 mm, soit 1,75 pouces) d'espace vertical dans un rack doté de trous
à espacement large comporte deux trous. Leur espacement, mesuré de centre à centre
(en commençant par le haut) est de 31,7 mm (1,25 pouces). Voir la figure 2-3.
1 U (44 mm ou 1,75 pouces)
12,7 mm (0,5 pouce)
31,7 mm (1,25 pouces)72 Installation dans un rack à deux montants
Installation des rails de montage
Vous pouvez installer les rails de montage dans un rack à deux montants avec châssis ouvert doté de trous
à espacement universel (voir la figure 2-2) ou large (voir la figure 2-3), en procédant à un montage central
ou encastré.
PRÉCAUTION : n'utilisez pas ce kit pour installer un système pour lequel il n'a pas été prévu. Sinon,
vous risquez d'endommager le système et de vous blesser ou de blesser une autre personne.
Montage central
Le kit pour rack à deux montants est fourni avec des supports configurés pour une installation de 7,62 cm
(3 pouces) de large avec montage central. Les composants des rails de montage sont présentés figure 2-1.
Pour effectuer l'installation, procédez comme suit :
1 Repérez le rail de montage de droite et poussez le support de montage réglable vers l'arrière du rail
(voir la figure 2-4).
2 Positionnez le rail de montage de droite dans le rack à l'emplacement marqué, poussez le support
de montage central vers le rack et fixez la collerette de montage et le support de montage réglable
sur le rack. Utilisez quatre vis cruciformes à tête plate de 12-24 x 0,5-pouce (voir la figure 2-4).
3 Recommencez l'étape 1 et l'étape 2 pour installer le rail de montage gauche dans le rack.Installation dans un rack à deux montants 73
Figure 2-4. Installation des rails pour un montage central
Montage encastré
Le kit pour rack à deux montants est fourni avec des supports configurés pour une installation de 7,62 cm
(3 pouces) de large avec montage central. Les composants des rails de montage sont présentés figure 2-1.
Pour préparer les rails à un montage encastré dans le rack à deux montants, procédez comme suit :
1 Identifiez les deux rails de montage et déposez-les côte à côte sur un plan de travail lisse, en plaçant
l'avant des rails vers vous (voir la figure 2-5).
1 Rack à deux montants
avec châssis ouvert
2 Huit vis cruciformes à tête
plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce
(4 par rail)
3 Collerette pour le montage
central
2 Rails de montage (2) 4 Rails du système (2) 6 Loquet de dégagement
2
1
4
6
3
574 Installation dans un rack à deux montants
2 À l'aide d'une clé 3/8 ou d'un tournevis à douille, retirez les deux écrous du support de montage
réglable (voir la figure 2-5).
3 Retirez le support et placez-le sur les goujons filetés de 7,62 cm ou 15,24 cm (3 ou 6 pouces)
pour montage encastré (voir la figure 2-5).
4 Réinstallez le support de montage réglable en resserrant les deux écrous retirés à l'étape 2
(voir la figure 2-5).
5 Recommencez la procédure, de l'étape 2 à l'étape 4, pour l'autre rail de montage.
Figure 2-5. Installation du support de montage réglable pour un montage encastré
1 Écrous (2 par support) 2 Support de montage réglable 3 Goujons filetés de 7,62 cm
(3 pouces)
4 Collerette pour le montage
encastré
1
4
3
2Installation dans un rack à deux montants 75
6 Tout en maintenant le rail de montage gauche à l'emplacement marqué, placez la collerette pour
montage encastré contre l'avant du rack et fixez-la sur le rail à l'aide de deux vis cruciformes à tête plate
12-24 x 0,5 pouce (voir la figure 2-6).
7 Faites glisser le support de montage réglable contre l'arrière du rack et fixez-le au rail à l'aide de
deux vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24 x 0,5 pouce (voir la figure 2-6).
8 Recommencez l'étape 6 et l'étape 7 pour installer le rail de montage droit dans le rack.
9 À l'aide d'une clé 3/8 ou d'un tournevis à douille, resserrez les écrous sur les supports de montage
réglables des deux rails de montage.
Figure 2-6. Installation des rails pour un montage encastré
1 Rack à deux montants
avec châssis ouvert
2 Huit vis cruciformes à tête plate 12-24
x 0,5 pouce (4 par rail)
3 Rails de montage (2)
2
1
376 Installation dans un rack à deux montants
Installation des modules de rails statiques pour le châssis
REMARQUE : il n'est pas nécessaire de retirer le cadre avant fourni en option pour installer ou retirer les modules
de rails statiques du châssis.
1 Pour installer un module de rails, repérez les trois orifices en trou de serrure sur le module, ainsi que
les vis à épaulement correspondantes sur le côté du système (voir la figure 2-7).
2 Placez le module de rail contre le côté du système de façon que les vis à épaulement s'emboîtent
dans la partie ronde des trous de serrure. Faites ensuite glisser le module vers l'arrière du système.
3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour installer l'autre module de rail.
Pour retirer un module de rail du châssis, relevez le loquet de dégagement et tirez le rail vers l'avant.
Figure 2-7. Installation et retrait des modules de rails statiques
1 Orifices en trou de serrure (6) 2 Vis à épaulement (6) 3 Loquet de dégagement
4 Modules de rails (2) 5 Système
4
2
3
1
5Installation dans un rack à deux montants 77
Installation du système dans l'armoire rack
PRÉCAUTION : si vous installez plusieurs systèmes, installez le premier le plus bas possible dans le rack.
1 Placez une main sous l'avant du système et l'autre sous l'arrière du système.
2 Soulevez le système, positionnez-le de façon que les rails situés à l'arrière s'alignent sur les rails
de montage du rack.
PRÉCAUTION : en raison de la taille et du poids du système, ne tentez jamais de l'installer seul dans les rails
de montage.
3 Poussez le système dans les rails de montage jusqu'à la butée.
4 Installez et serrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis, de manière
à fixer le système sur le rack.
Retrait du système de l'armoire rack
Pour retirer le système du rack, procédez comme suit :
1 Éteignez le système et les périphériques connectés, puis débranchez-le de la prise de courant.
2 Desserrez les vis moletées situées de chaque côté du panneau avant du châssis (qui fixe le système
au rack).
3 Déconnectez tous les câbles du système.
4 Tirez le système hors du rack jusqu'à ce qu'il soit arrêté par la butée de sécurité.
5 Appuyez sur les loquets de dégagement, de chaque côté du système (voir la figure 1-10).
6 Retirez complètement le système du rack.78 Installation dans un rack à deux montantsIndex 79
Index
A
Acheminement des câbles, 64
Armoire à quatre montants
retrait du système, 65, 77
C
Câbles, 65
acheminement, 64
Chemin de câbles,
installation, 62
Consignes de sécurité, 45, 67
Contenu du kit
kit pour rack à deux
montants, 69
kit VersaRails, 47, 49
VersaRails, 48-49, 61
I
Installation
chemin de câbles, 62
kit pour rack à
deux montants, 67, 72-73
kit pour rack à
quatre montants, 55
système dans un rack à
quatre montants, 58, 77
Installation (suite)
modules de rails
statiques, 54, 76
passe-câbles, 62
rails de montage
RapidRails, 55
rails de montage
VersaRails, 54, 57, 59, 76
K
Kit pour rack à deux montants
contenu du kit, 69
installation des rails
de montage, 72
marquage du rack, 70
outils et fournitures, 68
Kit pour rack à quatre
montants
contenu du kit
VersaRails, 47, 49
M
Marquage du rack
kit pour rack à
deux montants, 70-71
kit pour rack à
quatre montants, 50
Montage central, 72
Montage encastré, 73
O
Outils et fournitures
kit pour rack à
deux montants, 68
rack à quatre montants, 47
P
Passe-câbles
acheminement des câbles, 65
installation, 62
Pieds stabilisateurs, 47
Portes
remise en place, 62
retrait, 50
Précautions relatives au
montage en rack, 46, 68
R
Rack à quatre montants
outils et fournitures, 47
Rack, pieds stabilisateurs, 4780 Index
80 Index
Rails verticaux
marquage, 50
unité, 51
Remise en place des portes
du rack, 62
Retrait du système
armoire à quatre montants,
65, 77
S
Spécifications de rack
requises pour les rails
VersaRails, 47
U
Unité de rack, 51
V
VersaRails
contenu du kit, 47-49, 61
installation, 54, 57, 59, 76www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Rack-InstallationsanleitungAnmerkungen, Hinweise und Warnungen
ANMERKUNG: Eine ANMERKUNG macht auf wichtige Informationen aufmerksam, die die Arbeit mit dem Computer
erleichtern.
HINWEIS: Ein HINWEIS warnt vor möglichen Beschädigungen der Hardware oder vor Datenverlust und zeigt auf,
wie derartige Probleme vermieden werden können.
VORSICHT: Hiermit werden Sie auf eine potentiell gefährliche Situation hingewiesen, die zu Sachschäden,
Verletzungen oder zum Tod führen könnte.
____________________
Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
© 2005 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Die Reproduktion dieses Dokuments in jeglicher Form ist ohne schriftliche Genehmigung von Dell Inc. streng verboten.
Marken in diesem Text: Dell, das DELL Logo, RapidRails und VersaRails sind Marken von Dell Inc.
Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen beziehen Sie auf die entsprechenden Hersteller bzw.
deren Produkte. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen.
November 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Inhalt 83
Inhalt
1 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Allgemeine Installationsanleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Vorbereitungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rack-Anforderungen für VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Rack-Stabilisatoren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Ablauf der Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Abnehmen der Rack-Türen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Markieren des Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) . . . . 93
Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse
(nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Installation der Montageschienen im Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Installation des Systems im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms
(nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installation der Ablage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installation des Kabelführungsarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Verlegen der Kabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Entfernen eines Systems mit Gleitschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Entfernen eines Systems mit festen Schienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10684 Inhalt
2 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Vorbereitungen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Inhalt des Rack-Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Ablauf der Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Markieren des Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Racks mit universellem Lochabstand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Racks mit weitem Lochabstand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installation der Montageschienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Mittenmontage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Installation mit bündiger Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Installation von festen Schienenmodulen am Gehäuse. . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Installation des Systems im Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 85
Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Sicherheitshinweise
Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise, um Ihre eigene Sicherheit zu gewährleisten und
eine Beschädigung des Systems und der Arbeitsumgebung zu vermeiden. Vollständige Informationen
über die Sicherheitsanforderungen und Betriebsvorschriften finden Sie im Product Information Guide
(Produktinformationshandbuch) zum System. Die Garantieinformationen befinden sich entweder dort
oder in einem gesonderten Dokument.
SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack
Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Stabilität und Sicherheit des Racks.
Spezielle Warnungen und/oder Sicherheitshinweise und Prozeduren finden Sie auch in der
zum System gehörenden Dokumentation zur Rack-Installation.
Systeme gelten als Komponenten in einem Rack. Der Begriff „Komponente“ bezieht sich also auf
ein beliebiges System oder auch Peripheriegeräte und Zusatzhardware.
VORSICHT: Bevor Sie Systeme in einem Rack einbauen, installieren Sie bei frei stehenden Racks die
vorderen und seitlichen Stabilisatoren und bei Racks, die mit anderen Racks verbunden sind, die vorderen
Stabilisatoren. Wenn vor dem Einsetzen von Systemen in einem Rack keine Stabilisatoren angebracht
werden, kann das Rack unter Umständen umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. Befestigen Sie daher
immer zuerst die Stabilisatoren, bevor Sie Komponenten im Rack installieren.
Ziehen Sie nach dem Einbau von Systemen bzw. Komponenten in einem Rack niemals mehr als eine
Komponente gleichzeitig auf den Gleitschienen aus dem Rack. Durch das Gewicht von mehr als einer
Komponente kann das Rack umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen.
ANMERKUNG: Das System ist als frei stehende Einheit und für die Verwendung als Komponente in einem
Dell-Rack unter Verwendung des kundenseitigen Rack-Kits sicherheitszertifiziert. Die Installation des Systems
und des Rack-Kits in anderen Racks ist von keiner Prüfbehörde abgenommen. Sie sind selbst dafür
verantwortlich, dass die endgültige Kombination von System und Rack alle geltenden Sicherheitsstandards
und die lokalen elektrischen Richtlinien erfüllt. Dell übernimmt keinerlei Haftung und Gewährleistung für
derartige Kombinationen.
• System-Rack-Kits sollten von geschulten Servicetechnikern in einem Rack installiert werden.
Wenn Sie das Kit in einem anderen Rack installieren, vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack die
Spezifikationen eines Dell-Racks erfüllt.
VORSICHT: Große Racks dürfen nicht von einer Person allein bewegt werden. Wegen der Höhe und
des Gewichts des Racks sollte diese Arbeit mit mindestens zwei Personen durchgeführt werden.86 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
• Bevor Sie an einem Rack arbeiten, vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Stabilisatoren sicher am Rack
befestigt sind, fest auf dem Boden aufliegen und dass das gesamte Gewicht des Racks auf dem Boden
lastet. Montieren Sie an einem einzelnen Rack die vorderen und seitliche Stabilisatoren, an mehreren
miteinander verbundenen Racks die vordere Stabilisatoren, bevor Sie Arbeiten am Rack durchführen.
• Bestücken Sie das Rack immer von unten nach oben, und setzen Sie die schwerste Komponente zuerst
ein.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack gerade und stabil steht, bevor Sie eine Komponente aus dem Rack
ziehen.
• Es besteht Quetschgefahr für die Finger, wenn Sie auf die Schienenverriegelung der Komponente
drücken und eine Komponente in das Rack schieben oder herausziehen.
• Überlasten Sie nicht den Wechselstromkreis, über den das Rack mit Strom versorgt wird. Die
Gesamtlast des Racks sollte 80 Prozent der Nennbelastbarkeit des Stromkreises nicht überschreiten.
• Überprüfen Sie, ob eine ausreichende Luftzufuhr zu den Komponenten im Rack gewährleistet ist.
• Treten Sie nicht auf Komponenten und stellen Sie sich nicht darauf, wenn Sie an anderen
Komponenten in einem Rack Arbeiten durchführen.
Allgemeine Installationsanleitung
Diese Installationsanleitung enthält Anweisungen zur Installation eines oder mehrerer Systeme in einem
Rack durch geschulte Servicetechniker. Das RapidRails™ Rack-Kit kann ohne Werkzeuge in allen
Gestellschränken des Systemherstellers montiert werden und das VersaRails™ Rack-Kit in den meisten
Standardgestellschränken. Die Montage der RapidRails- und VersaRails-Rack-Kits verläuft ähnlich. Für
jedes im Rack installierte System wird ein Rack-Kit benötigt.
Dieser Abschnitt enthält Anweisungen für die folgenden Rack-Kits mit vier Stützen:
• Rack-Kit mit Gleitschienen
• Rack-Kit mit festen Schienen (RapidRails- und VersaRails-Version)
(Installationsanweisungen für ein Kit mit festen Schienen in einem Rack mit zwei Stützen erhalten
Sie unter „Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack“ auf Seite 107.)
Vorbereitungen
Lesen Sie vor dem Einbau des Systems im Rack sorgfältig die „Sicherheitshinweise“ am Anfang dieser
Anleitung sowie die Sicherheitshinweise im Product Information Guide (Produktinformationshandbuch).
VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehrere Systeme in einem Rack installieren, schließen Sie alle Maßnahmen für ein
System ab, bevor Sie das nächste System installieren.
VORSICHT: Racks können sehr schwer sein und leicht wegrollen. Sie sind nicht mit Bremsen ausgestattet.
Bewegen Sie ein Rack nur mit größter Vorsicht. Fahren Sie die höhenverstellbaren Füße ein, bevor Sie ein Rack
bewegen. Vermeiden Sie lange bzw. steile Neigungen oder Rampen, auf denen Sie die Kontrolle über das Rack
verlieren könnten. Fahren Sie die höhenverstellbaren Füße aus, damit das Rack abgestützt wird und nicht
wegrollen kann.
ANMERKUNG: Wie das System als solches installiert wird, erfahren Sie unter „Installation des Systems im Rack“
auf Seite 98.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 87
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise
Beachten Sie beim Einbau des Systems im Rack die Sicherheitsmaßnahmen in den folgenden
Unterabschnitten.
VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die in diesem Dokument angegebenen Vorgehensweisen genau, um sich selbst und
andere Personen nicht zu gefährden. Das System ist möglicherweise sehr groß und schwer. Sie sollten die
Installation sorgfältig vorbereiten und planen, um Verletzungen vorzubeugen. Diese Vorkehrungen gelten umso
mehr, wenn Systeme oben im Rack installiert werden.
VORSICHT: Installieren Sie keine Rack-Kit-Komponenten, die für andere Systeme vorgesehen sind. Verwenden
Sie ausschließlich das für das System vorgesehene Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System
verwenden, könnte das System beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden.
Rack-Anforderungen für VersaRails
HINWEIS: Das VersaRails-Rack-Kit ist zur Installation durch geschulte Servicetechniker in einem Rack
vorgesehen, das den Spezifikationen ANSI/EIA-310-D-92 (American National Standards Institute bzw. Electronic
Industries Association), IEC 297 (International Electrotechnical Commission) und der DIN 41494 (Deutsches Institut
für Normung) entspricht. Für jedes in einem Rack montierte System wird ein Rack-Kit benötigt.
Rack-Stabilisatoren
VORSICHT: Bevor Sie Systeme in einem Rack einbauen, installieren Sie bei frei stehenden Racks die vorderen
und seitlichen Stabilisatoren und bei Racks, die mit anderen Racks verbunden sind, die vorderen Stabilisatoren.
Wenn vor dem Einsetzen von Systemen in einem Rack keine Stabilisatoren angebracht werden, kann das Rack
unter Umständen umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen. Befestigen Sie daher immer zuerst die Stabilisatoren,
bevor Sie Komponenten im Rack installieren.
Die Stabilisatoren verhindern das Umkippen des Racks. Anleitungen zur Installation und Befestigung
der Stabilisatoren finden Sie in der mit dem Gestellschrank gelieferten Dokumentation.
Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör
Sie benötigen eventuell folgende Hilfsmittel zur Installation des Systems in einem Rack mit vier Stützen:
• Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher der Größe 2
• Kreppband oder einen Filzstift zur Markierung der verwendeten Montagelöcher88 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen
• Ein Paar Gleitschienensätze (umwandelbar in RapidRails- oder VersaRails-Konfiguration)
• Ein Kabelführungsarm
• Eine Ablage
• Ein Statusanzeigekabel (falls zutreffend)
• Kabelbinder zum Befestigen der Kabel am Kabelführungsarm
• Acht 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (nur für VersaRails-Konfiguration verwendet)
ANMERKUNG: Die in den Abbildungen und Anweisungen genannten nichtmetrischen Schrauben werden nach
ihrer Größe und der Anzahl der Windungen pro Zoll bezeichnet. So wird z. B. eine Kreuzschlitzschraube Nr. 10
mit 32 Windungen pro Zoll als 10-32-Schraube bezeichnet.
Abbildung 1-1. Inhalt des Rack-Kits für Gleitschienen
1 Ablage 2 Schienensätze (2) 3 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur für VersaRailsKonfiguration)
4 Kabelbinder 5 Statusanzeigekabel
(falls zutreffend)
6 Kabelführungsarm
1
2
3
5
6
4Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 89
Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen
• Ein paar feste Montageschienen, entweder mit VersaRails- oder RapidRails-Halterungen.
• Ein Paar Festschienenmodule für das Gehäuse
• 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur bei VersaRails-Kits)
• Lösbare Kabelbinder (2) (nicht dargestellt in Abbildung 1-2)
ANMERKUNG: Die in den Abbildungen und Anweisungen genannten nichtmetrischen Schrauben werden nach
ihrer Größe und der Anzahl der Windungen pro Zoll bezeichnet. So wird z. B. eine Kreuzschlitzschraube Nr. 10
mit 32 Windungen pro Zoll als 10-32-Schraube bezeichnet.
Abbildung 1-2. Inhalt des Rack-Kits für feste Schienen
1 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (8) (nur bei VersaRails-Kits)
2 Feste Montageschienen (2) 3 Feste Schienenmodule
für das Gehäuse (2)
FRONT L
1
3
290 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Ablauf der Installation
Bei der Montage eines Rack-Kits sind die folgenden Arbeitsschritte (ausführlich in den nächsten
Abschnitten beschrieben) nacheinander auszuführen:
1 Abnehmen der Rack-Türen
2 Markieren des Racks
3 Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)
4 Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen)
5 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack
6 Installation des Systems im Rack
7 Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)
8 Verlegen der Kabel
9 Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen
Abnehmen der Rack-Türen
Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Entfernen der Türen in der Dokumentation zum Gestellschrank.
VORSICHT: Da die Rack-Türen sehr groß und schwer sind, versuchen Sie niemals, die Türen ohne fremde Hilfe
abzunehmen oder einzubauen.
VORSICHT: Verstauen Sie die Türen so, dass niemand verletzt wird, falls sie versehentlich umfallen.
Markieren des Racks
Bei einem 1-U-System benötigen Sie für jedes System, das Sie im Rack installieren, einen vertikalen
Abstand von 1 U (44 mm bzw. 1,75 Zoll).
Gestellschränke, die den EIA-310-Standards entsprechen, weisen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus drei
Löchern pro Rack-Einheit auf, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer
1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625, 0,625 und 0,5 Zoll) an den vorderen und hinteren
vertikalen Schienen beträgt (siehe Abbildung 1-3). Gestellschränke können mit runden oder rechteckigen
Löchern ausgestattet sein.
ANMERKUNG: Die vertikalen Schienen sind eventuell in Abständen von 1 U mit horizontalen Linien und Zahlen
markiert. Notieren Sie sich die Nummer der Markierung auf der vertikalen Schiene. So brauchen Sie keine
zusätzlichen Markierungen oder Klebeband am Rack anzubringen. Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 91
Abbildung 1-3. Eine Rack-Einheit
VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System einsetzen wollen, installieren Sie die Montageschienen so, dass sich
das erste System möglichst weit unten im Rack befindet.
Gehen Sie zum Markieren des Racks wie folgt vor:
1 Bringen Sie auf den vorderen vertikalen Schienen des Racks eine Markierung (mit Stift oder Klebeband) an der Stelle an, an der sich die Unterseite des Systems befinden soll, das Sie in den Rack
einbauen möchten.
Die Unterkante jeder 1-U-Einheit befindet sich in der Mitte des schmalsten Metallstücks zwischen
den Löchern (bei einigen Racks mit einer horizontalen Linie gekennzeichnet, siehe Abbildung 1-4).
2 Bringen Sie 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über der Originalmarkierung eine Markierung an (oder zählen Sie in
einem Rack nach EIA-310-Standard drei Löcher nach oben). Markieren Sie die vorderen vertikalen
Schienen mit einem Filzstift oder einem Stück Kreppband (falls Sie die Löcher gezählt haben, bringen
Sie direkt über dem oberen Loch eine Markierung an). Die Markierung bzw. das Kreppband zeigt die
spätere Position der Oberkante des Systems an den vertikalen Schienen (siehe Abbildung 1-4).
1 U (44 mm)
12,7 mm
15,9 mm
15,9 mm
12,7 mm92 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Abbildung 1-4. Vertikale Schienen markieren
1 Markierungen auf vertikalen Schienen (2)
1Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 93
Konfiguration der Gleitschienensätze (nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)
Der Gleitschienensatz ist an den Enden jeweils mit einer drehbaren Montagehalterung ausgestattet.
Die Position der Halterung bestimmt, ob der Schienensatz als RapidRails oder VersaRails eingesetzt
wird. Auf der RapidRails-Seite der Halterung befinden sich ein Haken und eine Verriegelung zur
Befestigung an der vertikalen Schiene. Auf der VersaRails-Seite der Halterung befinden sich drei Löcher,
und zur Befestigung an der vertikalen Schiene kommen Schrauben zum Einsatz.
ANMERKUNG: Bei Auslieferung befinden sich die Gleitschienensätze des Rack-Kits in der RapidRailsKonfiguration.
So drehen Sie die Montagehalterung und ändern die Konfiguration der Montageschienen von RapidRails
auf VersaRails (siehe Abbildung 1-5):
1 Heben Sie den Freigabehebel an der drehbaren Montagehalterung an.
2 Drehen Sie die Halterung und schieben Sie sie von den zwei Abstandshaltern nach oben weg.
3 Drehen Sie die Halterung weiter bis auf 180 Grad, bis die Abstandshalter wieder in die Aussparungen
eingreifen.
4 Drehen Sie die Halterung auf den Abstandshaltern in der Gegenrichtung, bis sie einrastet.
Abbildung 1-5. Position der drehbaren Montagehalterung ändern
1 Drehbare Halterung 2 Freigabehebel 3 Abstandshalter (2)
4 Aussparungen (2) 5 Montagehalterungsflansch
(RapidRails-Konfiguration
dargestellt)
1
2
4
3
594 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Installation der festen Schienenmodule am Gehäuse
(nur bei Kits mit festen Schienen)
ANMERKUNG: Um die festen Schienenmodule zu installieren oder zu entfernen, brauchen Sie die optionale
Frontverkleidung nicht abzunehmen.
1 Um ein Schienenmodul zu installieren, verwenden Sie die drei Befestigungslöcher am Schienenmodul
und die entsprechenden Ansatzschrauben auf der Seite des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-6).
2 Setzen Sie das Schienenmodul an der Seite des Systems so an, dass die Ansatzschrauben durch die
weiten Aussparungen der Befestigungslöcher greifen, und schieben Sie dann das Modul zur
Systemrückseite hin.
3 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 und 2 für das andere Schienenmodul.
Um ein Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse zu entfernen, ziehen Sie die Sperrklinke nach oben, schieben Sie
dann die Schiene nach vorn, und entfernen Sie das Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse.
Abbildung 1-6. Festschienenmodule installieren und entfernen
1 Befestigungslöcher (6) 2 Ansatzschrauben (6) 3 Sperrklinke
4 Schienenmodule (2) 5 System
4
2
3
1
5Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 95
Installation der Montageschienen im Rack
ANMERKUNG: Die folgenden Anweisungen gelten sowohl für Gleitschienen als auch für feste Schienen.
Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen
1 Setzen Sie eine der Montageschienen so an der Vorderseite des Gestellschranks an, dass sich der
Montagehalterungsflansch zwischen den Markierungen (oder an der Markierung mit der richtigen
Zahl) aus dem Schritt „Markieren des Racks“ an den vertikalen Schienen befindet
(siehe Abbildung 1-7).
Der obere Montagehaken am vorderen Montagehalterungsflansch sollte in das obere Loch zwischen
den Markierungen auf den vertikalen Schienen eingreifen.
Abbildung 1-7. Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen
1 Montagehaken (2) 2 Drucktasten (2) 3 Montageschienen (2)
Rack-Vorderseite
1
2
396 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
2 Schieben Sie die Montageschiene nach vorn, bis der Montagehaken in das Rechteckloch eingreift,
und drücken Sie dann den Montagehalterungsflansch nach unten, bis der Montagehaken sitzt und
die Drucktaste im unteren Rechteckloch einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-7).
3 Ziehen Sie auf der Rückseite des Gestellschranks den Flansch der Montagehalterung nach hinten,
bis der Montagehaken in das obere Rechteckloch eingreift. Drücken Sie dann den Flansch nach unten,
bis der Montagehaken sitzt und die Drucktaste im unteren Rechteckloch einrastet.
4 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 bis Schritt 3 für die Montageschiene auf der anderen Seite des Racks.
5 Achten Sie darauf, dass die Montageschienen auf beiden Rack-Seiten in der gleichen Höhe an den
vertikalen Schienen befestigt werden.
Installation der RapidRails-Montageschienen
1 Setzen Sie eine der Montageschienen so an der Vorderseite des Gestellschranks an, dass sich der
zugehörige Montagehalterungsflansch zwischen den Markierungen (oder an der Markierung mit
der richtigen Zahl) aus dem Schritt „Markieren des Racks“ an den vertikalen Schienen befindet
(siehe Abbildung 1-8).
Die drei Löcher an der Vorderseite des Montagehalterungsflansches sollten mit den Löchern zwischen
Ihren Markierungen an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene übereinstimmen.
2 Befestigen Sie die Montageschiene durch je eine 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschraube im
oberen und unteren Loch des Montageflanschs an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene.
3 Ziehen Sie den Montagehalterungsflansch auf der Rack-Rückseite nach hinten, bis seine Montagelöcher mit den rechteckigen Löchern auf der hinteren vertikalen Schiene übereinstimmen.
4 Befestigen Sie die Montageschiene mit je einer 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschraube im oberen
und unteren Loch des Montageflanschs an der hinteren vertikalen Schiene.
5 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 bis Schritt 4 für die Montageschiene auf der anderen Seite des Racks.
6 Achten Sie darauf, dass die Montageschienen auf jeder Rack-Seite jeweils an der gleichen Stelle an
den vertikalen Schienen montiert werden.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 97
Abbildung 1-8. VersaRails-Montageschienen installieren
1 Montagehalterungsflansch 2 10-32 x 0,5 Zoll-Kreuzschlitzbundschrauben (4 pro Montageschiene)
3 Montageschienen (2)
Rack-Vorderseite
1
2
398 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Installation des Systems im Rack
VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System installieren, installieren Sie das erste System in der untersten
möglichen Position im Rack.
VORSICHT: Wegen der Größe und des Gewichts des Systems sollten Sie niemals versuchen, das System
ohne fremde Hilfe in den Montageschienen zu installieren.
Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen
1 Ziehen Sie die zwei inneren Gleitschienen aus dem Rack, bis sie in der vollständig ausgezogenen
Position einrasten (siehe Abbildung 1-9).
2 Heben Sie das System über den herausgezogenen Gleitschienen in Position.
Die jeweils drei Ansatzschrauben an den Seiten des Systems greifen in die entsprechenden J-förmigen
Aussparungen in den inneren Schienensätzen (siehe Abbildung 1-9).
3 Senken Sie die Rückseite des Systems ab, und richten Sie dabei die hinteren Ansatzschrauben auf den
Seiten des Systems mit den J-förmigen Aussparungen in den Schienensätzen aus.
4 Lassen Sie die hinteren Ansatzschrauben in die jeweiligen J-förmigen Aussparungen eingreifen.
5 Senken Sie die Systemvorderseite ab, und führen Sie die mittleren und vorderen Ansatzschrauben
in die jeweiligen J-förmigen Aussparungen in den Schienensätzen ein.
Die Systemsperrklinke auf der Vorderseite der inneren Gleitschiene schnappt zurück, wenn die
Ansatzschraube in die vordere Aussparung gelangt. Mit dieser Sperrklinke können Sie das System
aus den Gleitschienen entfernen.
6 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken an den Außenseiten der inneren Gleitschienen und schieben Sie
das System vollständig in das Rack.
7 Installieren Sie den Kabelführungsarm. Siehe „Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms
(nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)“ auf Seite 102.
8 Ziehen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf der Rack-Vorderseite fest, um die Schienensätze am Rack
zu sichern.Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 99
Abbildung 1-9. Installation eines Systems mit Gleitschienen
1 Ansatzschrauben (6) 2 Sperrklinke der Gleitschiene 3 J-förmige Aussparungen (6)
4 Vordere Sperrklinke 5 Innere Gleitschienen (2)
1
2
4 3
5100 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen
Um das System im Rack zu installieren, gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
1 Heben Sie das Gehäuse von der Vorderseite des Systems aus in Position, sodass die festen
Schienenmodule am Gehäuse mit den Montageschienen am Rack ausgerichtet sind.
2 Schieben Sie das Gehäuse bis zum Anschlag in die Montageschienen (siehe Abbildung 1-10).
3 Sichern Sie das Gehäuse mit den beiden Rändelschrauben auf der Vorderseite.
4 Installieren Sie gegebenenfalls die optionale Frontverkleidung. Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Anbringen
der Fronverkleidung in der Dokumentation des Systems.
Abbildung 1-10. Installation eines Systems mit festen Schienen
1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Schienenmodule am Gehäuse (2) 3 Rändelschrauben (2)
4 Sperrklinken (2)
1
3
4
2Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 101
5 Suchen Sie die Befestigungspunkte für die lösbaren Kabelbinder an den zwei hinteren Montagehalterungsflanschen (siehe Abbildung 1-11).
Mit diesen Kabelbindern werden die Systemkabel an den Montageschienen gesichert.
Abbildung 1-11. Lösbare Kabelbinder befestigen
6 Schieben Sie das Verbindungsstück des Kabelbinders durch den Befestigungspunkt.
7 Drücken Sie den Kabelbinder bis zum Einrasten in die Montageschiene.
8 Sichern Sie die Systemkabel mit den lösbaren Kabelbindern an den Montageschienen.
1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Lösbare Kabelbinder (2)
1
2102 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Wiederanbringen der Rack-Türen
Siehe Vorgehensweise zum Einsetzen der Türen in der Rack-Dokumentation.
VORSICHT: Da die Rack-Türen sehr groß und schwer sind, versuchen Sie niemals, die Türen ohne fremde Hilfe
abzunehmen oder einzubauen.
Installation der Ablage und des Kabelführungsarms
(nur bei Kits mit Gleitschienen)
ANMERKUNG: Dieser Vorgang gilt nicht für das Kit mit festen Schienen.
Installation der Ablage
1 Führen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Enden der Ablage zwischen die Enden der Montageschienen,
und schieben Sie die Ablage bis zum Einrasten nach vorn (siehe Abbildung 1-12).
2 Um die Installation des Kabelführungsarms vorzubereiten, drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinke in der Mitte
des Kabelführungsarmhalters, und kippen Sie den Halter nach unten (siehe Abbildung 1-12).
Abbildung 1-12. Installation der Ablage
1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Ablage 3 Kabelführungsarmhalter
1
3
Systemrückseite
2Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 103
Installation des Kabelführungsarms
ANMERKUNG: Sie können den Kabelführungsarm an der rechten oder der linken Montageschiene befestigen,
je nachdem, wie Sie die Systemkabel verlegen wollen.
1 Drücken Sie auf der Ablage gegebenenfalls auf die Sperrklinke in der Mitte des Kabelführungsarmhalters, und kippen Sie den Halter nach unten (siehe Abbildung 1-12).
2 Befestigen Sie auf der Systemrückseite die Sperrklinke am vorderen Ende des Kabelführungsarms
an der inneren Halterung des Schienensatzes, bis die Verbindung einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-13).
3 Befestigen Sie die Sperrklinke am losen Ende des Kabelführungsarms an der äußeren Halterung
des Schienensatzes, bis die Verbindung einrastet (siehe Abbildung 1-13).
Abbildung 1-13. Installation des Kabelführungsarms
1 Montageschienen (2) 2 Halterungen (2) 3 Sperrklinken (2)
4 Kabelführungsarm
Systemrückseite
1
2
4
3104 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Verlegen der Kabel
1 Öffnen Sie die Kabeltunnelabdeckung auf der Oberseite des Kabelführungsarms, um die Kabel
im Arm verlegen zu können (siehe Abbildung 1-14).
Abbildung 1-14. Kabel im Kabelführungsarm verlegen
2 Verbinden Sie gegebenenfalls den Stecker des Statusanzeigekabels mit dem zugehörigen Anschluss
auf der Systemrückseite.
Verlegen Sie das Kabel der Systemstatusanzeige entlang des Kabelführungsarms, und befestigen Sie
das LED-Ende am Steckplatz am Ende des Kabelführungsarms.
3 Verbinden Sie die Daten- und Netzstromkabel mit den entsprechenden Anschlüssen auf der Rückseite
des Systems.
Ausführliche Informationen zu Kabelverbindungen finden Sie in der Getting Started Guide (Anleitung
„Erste Schritte“) oder im Hardware Owner’s Manual (Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch) zum System.
ANMERKUNG: Verwenden Sie die Zugentlastungsschlaufen auf der Rückseite der Netzteile, um die
Netzstromkabel zu entlasten.
4 Bündeln Sie die Kabel mit den Kabelbindern aus dem Rack-Kit, sodass sie bei angrenzenden Systemen
im Rack nicht stören.
1 Kabelführungsarm 2 Vorinstallierte Kabelbinder 3 Kabelführungsarmhalter
4 Abdeckung 5 Steckplatz für
Systemstatusanzeige
6 Klettverschluss
7 Vorinstallierte Kabelbinder
4
5
2
3
6
Systemrückseite
1
7Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen 105
5 Verlegen Sie die Kabel in den Kabeltunneln des Kabelführungsarms.
6 Sorgen Sie gegebenenfalls für Kabelzuschlag im Scharnierbereich, und sichern Sie die Kabel
mit dem vertikalen Klettverschluss (siehe Abbildung 1-14).
7 Verwenden Sie die vorinstallierten Kabelbinder am inneren Ende und Scharnierpunkt des Kabelführungsarms, um die gebündelten Kabel im Kabelführungsarm zu sichern (siehe Abbildung 1-14).
8 Schließen Sie die Kabeltunnelabdeckung.
9 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben, mit denen die Systemvorderseite an der vorderen vertikalen Schiene
gesichert wird.
10 Bewegen Sie das System im Rack vor und zurück, um zu überprüfen, ob die Kabel korrekt verlegt
sind und nicht eingeklemmt oder gedehnt werden bzw. die Bewegung des Kabelführungsarms
beeinträchtigen. Passen Sie gegebenenfalls die Lage der Kabel im Kabelführungsarm an.
ANMERKUNG: Wenn Sie das System vollständig herausziehen, werden die Schiebeeinheiten in der
ausgezogenen Position verriegelt. Um die Sperre zu entriegeln, drücken Sie die Sperrklinke auf der Seite
der Gleitschiene, und schieben Sie dann das System in das Rack.
11 Wenn Sie mit der Kabelführung zufrieden sind, schieben Sie das System vollständig in das Rack.
12 Heben Sie den Kabelführungsarmhalter an der Ablage an, um den Arm zu sichern
(siehe Abbildung 1-14).
Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack
Entfernen eines Systems mit Gleitschienen
Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen:
1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie die
Stromzufuhr.
2 Entfernen Sie die Daten- und Netzstromkabel von den entsprechenden Anschlüssen auf der Rückseite
des Systems.
3 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack
sichern.
4 Ziehen Sie das System aus dem Rack, bis die Schienen in der ausgezogenen Position einrasten.
5 Ziehen Sie an beiden Schienen die vordere Sperrklinke nach oben (siehe Abbildung 1-9), und schieben
Sie das System nach vorn.
6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.106 Montage in einem Rack mit vier Stützen
Entfernen eines Systems mit festen Schienen
Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen:
1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie
die Stromzufuhr.
2 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack
sichern.
3 Trennen Sie alle Kabel vom System.
4 Ziehen Sie das System bis zur Sicherungsraste aus dem Rack.
5 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf den Seiten des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-10).
6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 107
Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Das Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit wird für die Montage eines Systems in einem offenen Relaisgestell mit
zwei Stützen verwendet, wie man es zum Beispiel bei Telekommunikationsanlagen findet. Es können
sowohl 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) als auch 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) breite Racks mit zwei Stützen und universellem
Lochabstand oder weitem Lochabstand installiert werden. Sie können dieses Kit entweder für die
Mittenmontage oder für die bündige Montage verwenden.
Sie müssen das offene Zwei-Stützen-Relaisgestell ordnungsgemäß auf dem Boden, an der Decke
oder oben an der Wand befestigen und gegebenenfalls mit benachbarten Gestellschränken verbinden.
Verwenden Sie hierzu Boden- und Wandbefestigungen sowie Stützen, die vom Rack-Hersteller
spezifiziert oder zugelassen sind bzw. dem Industriestandard entsprechen. Lesen Sie zuerst die
Warnungen in der Dokumentation des Zwei-Stützen-Racks, bevor Sie mit dem Einbau beginnen.
VORSICHT: Montieren Sie niemals Systeme in einem offenen Zwei-Stützen-Relaisgestell, das nicht sicher
verankert ist. Andernfalls kann das System beschädigt oder Sie bzw. andere Personen verletzt werden.
Sicherheitshinweise
Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise, um Ihre eigene Sicherheit zu gewährleisten und
eine Beschädigung des Systems und der Arbeitsumgebung zu vermeiden. Vollständige Informationen
über die Sicherheitsanforderungen finden Sie im Produktinformationshandbuch.
SICHERHEIT: Montieren von Systemen im Rack
Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Stabilität und Sicherheit des Racks. Spezielle
Warnungen und/oder Sicherheitshinweise und Prozeduren finden Sie auch in der zum System
gehörenden Dokumentation zur Rack-Installation.
Systeme gelten als Komponenten in einem Rack. Der Begriff „Komponente“ bezieht sich also auf ein
beliebiges System oder auch Peripheriegeräte und Zusatzhardware.
VORSICHT: Ziehen Sie nach dem Einbau von Systemen bzw. Komponenten in einem Rack niemals mehr als eine
Komponente gleichzeitig auf den Gleitschienen aus dem Rack. Durch das Gewicht von mehr als einer Komponente
kann das Rack umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen.
ANMERKUNG: Das System ist als frei stehende Einheit und für die Verwendung als Komponente in einem
Dell-Rack unter Verwendung des kundenseitigen Rack-Kits sicherheitszertifiziert. Die Installation des Systems
und des Rack-Kits in anderen Racks ist von keiner Prüfbehörde abgenommen. Sie sind selbst dafür
verantwortlich, dass die endgültige Kombination von System und Rack alle geltenden Sicherheitsstandards
und die lokalen elektrischen Richtlinien erfüllt. Dell übernimmt keinerlei Haftung und Gewährleistung für
derartige Kombinationen. 108 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
• System-Rack-Kits sollten von geschulten Servicetechnikern in einem Rack installiert werden. Wenn
Sie das Kit in einem anderen Rack installieren, vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack die Spezifikationen
eines Dell-Racks erfüllt.
VORSICHT: Große Racks dürfen nicht von einer Person allein bewegt werden. Wegen der Höhe und des
Gewichts des Racks sollte diese Arbeit mit mindestens zwei Personen durchgeführt werden.
• Bestücken Sie das Rack immer von unten nach oben, und setzen Sie die schwerste Komponente zuerst
ein.
• Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das Rack gerade und stabil steht, bevor Sie eine Komponente aus dem Rack
ziehen.
• Es besteht Quetschgefahr für die Finger, wenn Sie auf die Schienenverriegelung der Komponente
drücken und eine Komponente in das Rack schieben oder herausziehen.
• Überlasten Sie nicht den Wechselstromkreis, über den das Rack mit Strom versorgt wird. Die
Gesamtlast des Racks sollte 80 Prozent der Nennbelastbarkeit des Stromkreises nicht überschreiten.
• Überprüfen Sie, ob eine ausreichende Luftzufuhr zu den Komponenten im Rack gewährleistet ist.
• Treten Sie nicht auf Komponenten oder stellen sich darauf, wenn Sie an anderen Komponenten in
einem Rack Arbeiten durchführen.
Vorbereitungen
Lesen Sie vor dem Einbau des Systems im Rack sorgfältig den Abschnitt „Sicherheitshinweise“ am Anfang
dieser Anleitung sowie die Sicherheitshinweise im Product Information Guide (Produktinformationshandbuch).
VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehrere Systeme in einem Rack installieren, schließen Sie alle Maßnahmen für
ein System ab, bevor Sie das nächste System installieren.
ANMERKUNG: Wie das System als solches installiert wird, erfahren Sie unter „Installation des Systems im Rack“
auf Seite 118.
Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise
Beachten Sie beim Einbau des Systems im Rack die Sicherheitsmaßnahmen in den folgenden
Unterabschnitten.
VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die in diesem Dokument angegebene Vorgehensweise genau, um sich selbst und
andere Personen nicht zu gefährden. Das System ist möglicherweise sehr groß und schwer. Sie sollten die
Installation sorgfältig vorbereiten und planen, um Verletzungen vorzubeugen. Diese Vorkehrungen gelten umso
mehr, wenn Systeme oben im Rack installiert werden.
VORSICHT: Installieren Sie keine Rack-Kit-Komponenten, die für andere Systeme vorgesehen sind. Verwenden
Sie ausschließlich das für das System vorgesehene Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System
verwenden, könnte das System beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 109
Empfohlene Werkzeuge und Zubehör
• Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher der Größe 2
• 3/8-Zoll Schraubenschlüssel oder Steckschlüssel (bei Wechsel der Halterung für bündige Montage)
• Kreppband oder Filzstift zur Markierung der korrekten Montagelöcher
Inhalt des Rack-Kits
Das Rack-Kit für zwei Stützen enthält folgende Komponenten (siehe Abbildung 2-1):
• Ein Paar Montageschienen
• 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (8)
• Lösbare Kabelbinder (2) (nicht dargestellt in Abbildung 2-1)
Abbildung 2-1. Komponenten des Rack-Kits für zwei Stützen
1 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (8)
2 Gewindebolzen im Abstand
15,24 cm (6 Zoll) für
Mittenmontage
3 Gewindebolzen im Abstand
7,62 cm (3 Zoll) für
Mittenmontage
4 Einstellbarer Montageflansch 5 Montageflansch für
Mittenmontage
6 Gewindebolzen im Abstand
15,24 cm (6 Zoll) für bündige
Montage
7 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 7,62 cm
(3 Zoll) für bündige Montage
8 Montageflansch für bündige
Montage
9 Montageschienen (2)
9
1
7
8
6
5
3
2
4110 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Ablauf der Installation
Bei der Montage eines Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind die folgenden Arbeitsschritte in der angegebenen
Reihenfolge auszuführen:
1 Markieren des Racks
• Rack mit universellem Lochabstand
• Rack mit weitem Lochabstand
2 Installation der Montageschienen im Rack
• Befestigung in Mittenmontage
• Befestigung in bündiger Montage
3 Installation des Systems im Rack
4 Verlegen der Kabel
Markieren des Racks
Für jedes System, das Sie im Rack mit zwei Stützen installieren, benötigen Sie 1 Einheit
(1 U = 44 mm bzw. 1,75 Zoll) vertikalen Abstand.
Racks mit universellem Lochabstand
Racks mit universellem Lochabstand besitzen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus drei Löchern pro RackEinheit, deren Mittenabstand (beginnend in der Mitte des oberen Lochs einer 1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm,
15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625 Zoll, 0,625 Zoll und 0,5 Zoll) für die vordere und hintere vertikale Lochreihe
beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-2).
Abbildung 2-2. Universeller Lochabstand beim offenen Relaisgestell mit zwei Stützen
12,7 mm
15,9 mm
15,9 mm
1 U (44 mm)Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 111
Racks mit weitem Lochabstand
Racks mit weitem Lochabstand besitzen ein sich wiederholendes Muster aus zwei Löchern pro RackEinheit, deren Mittenabstand (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit) 31,7 mm und 12,7 mm
(1,25 Zoll bzw. 0,5 Zoll) für die vordere und hintere vertikale Lochreihe beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-3).
Abbildung 2-3. Weiter Lochabstand beim offenen Relaisgestell mit zwei Stützen
Gehen Sie zum Markieren des Racks wie folgt vor:
1 Bringen Sie auf den vorderen vertikalen Schienen des Racks eine Markierung an der Stelle an, an
der sich die Unterseite des Systems befinden soll, das Sie in das Zwei-Stützen-Rack einbauen.
Die Unterkante jeder 1-U-Einheit befindet sich in der Mitte des schmalsten Metallstücks zwischen
den Löchern.
ANMERKUNG: Wenn das Rack einen weiten Lochabstand hat, gehen Sie zu Schritt 3.
2 Setzen Sie eine Markierung 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über die ursprüngliche Markierung (oder zählen Sie
in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand drei Löcher nach oben, siehe Abbildung 2-2).
Jede vertikale 1-U-Einheit (44 mm oder 1,75 Zoll) in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand
verfügt über drei Löcher, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch
einer 1-U-Einheit) 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm und 12,7 mm (0,625 Zoll, 0,625 Zoll und 0,5 Zoll) beträgt
(siehe Abbildung 2-2).
ANMERKUNG: Wenn das Rack einen universellen Lochabstand hat, ist das Markieren des Racks damit
abgeschlossen.
3 Setzen Sie eine Markierung 44 mm (1,75 Zoll) über die ursprüngliche Markierung (oder zählen Sie
in einem Rack mit weitem Lochabstand bis zum nächsten Loch nach oben, siehe Abbildung 2-3).
Jede vertikale 1-U-Einheit (44 mm oder 1,75 Zoll) in einem Rack mit universellem Lochabstand hat
zwei Löcher, deren Mittenabstand zueinander (beginnend mit dem oberen Loch einer 1-U-Einheit)
31,7 mm (1,25 Zoll) beträgt (siehe Abbildung 2-3).
1 U (44 mm)
12,7 mm
31,7 mm112 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Installation der Montageschienen
Sie können die Montageschienen in einem offenen Zwei-Stützen-Rack mit entweder universellem Lochabstand (siehe Abbildung 2-2) oder weitem Lochabstand (siehe Abbildung 2-3) installieren. Die Montageschienen lassen sich mit bündiger Montage oder Mittenmontage einbauen.
VORSICHT: Installieren Sie mit diesem Rack-Kit keine anderen Systeme. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich das für
Ihr System konzipierte Rack-Kit. Wenn Sie das Rack-Kit für ein anderes System verwenden, könnte das System
beschädigt und Sie selbst oder andere Personen verletzt werden.
Mittenmontage
Im Lieferumfang des Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind Haltungen für Mittenmontage mit 7,62 cm Breite
(3 Zoll) enthalten. Zum Anbringen der Schienenkomponenten siehe Abbildung 2-1. Um die Montage
abzuschließen, führen Sie folgende Schritte aus:
1 Schieben Sie auf der rechten Montageschiene die einstellbare Montagehalterung nach hinten
(siehe Abbildung 2-4).
2 Setzen Sie die rechte Montageschiene an der markierten Stelle in das Rack mit zwei Stützen ein,
schieben Sie die einstellbare Halterung für Mittenmontage nach vorne gegen das vertikale ZweiStützen-Rack, und sichern Sie den Montageflansch und die einstellbare Montagehalterung am Rack
mit zwei 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (siehe Abbildung 2-4).
3 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 1 und Schritt 2 für den Einbau der linken Montageschiene im Rack.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 113
Abbildung 2-4. Einbau der Montageschienen bei Mittenmontage
1 Offenes Rack mit
zwei Stützen
2 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (4 pro Schiene)
3 Montageflansch für
Mittenmontage
2 Montageschienen (2) 4 Systemschienen (2) 6 Sperrklinke
2
1
4
6
3
5114 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Installation mit bündiger Montage
Im Lieferumfang des Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kits sind Haltungen für Mittenmontage mit 7,62 cm Breite
(3 Zoll) enthalten. Zum Anbringen der Schienenkomponenten siehe Abbildung 2-1. Gehen Sie zum
Vorbereiten der Montageschienen für die bündige Montage im Zwei-Stützen-Rack wie folgt vor:
1 Legen Sie die beiden Montageschienen nebeneinander auf eine ebene Arbeitsfläche, wobei
die vorderen Enden der Montageschienen zu Ihnen zeigen (siehe Abbildung 2-5).
2 Entfernen Sie mit einem 3/8-Zoll-Schlüssel oder -Steckschlüssel zwei Muttern aus der einstellbaren
Montagehalterung (siehe Abbildung 2-5).
3 Nehmen Sie die Halterung ab, und setzen Sie die Halterung dann auf die Gewindebolzen für bündige
Montage mit 7,62 cm (3 Zoll) oder 15,24 cm (6 Zoll) Abstand (siehe Abbildung 2-5).
4 Verwenden Sie die in Schritt 2 entfernten Muttern, um die einstellbare Montagehalterung zu sichern;
ziehen Sie die Muttern zunächst fingerfest an (siehe Abbildung 2-5).
5 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 2 bis Schritt 4 zur Vorbereitung der anderen Montageschiene.Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 115
Abbildung 2-5. Einstellbare Montagehalterung für bündige Montage konfigurieren
6 Halten Sie die linke Montageschiene an die markierte Stelle, positionieren Sie den Montageflansch
für bündige Montage gegen die Vorderseite des vertikalen Zwei-Stützen-Racks, und sichern Sie ihn
mit zwei 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben an der Schiene (siehe Abbildung 2-6).
7 Verschieben Sie die einstellbare Montagehalterung so, dass sie an der Rückseite des Zwei-StützenRacks anliegt, und sichern Sie sie an der Schiene mit 12-24 x 0,5 Zoll-Flachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben
(siehe Abbildung 2-6).
8 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 6 und Schritt 7 für den Einbau der rechten Montageschiene im Rack.
9 Ziehen Sie mit einem 3/8-Zoll-Schlüssel oder -Steckschlüssel die Muttern an den einstellbaren
Montagehalterungen auf beiden Montageschienen fest.
1 Muttern (2 pro Halterung) 2 Einstellbare
Montagehalterung
3 Gewindebolzen im Abstand 7,62 cm
(3 Zoll) für bündige Montage
4 Montageflansch für bündige
Montage
1
4
3
2116 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Abbildung 2-6. Montageschienen für bündige Konfiguration installieren
1 Offenes Rack mit zwei Stützen 2 12-24 x 0,5 ZollFlachkopfkreuzschlitzschrauben (4 pro Schiene)
3 Montageschienen (2)
2
1
3Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack 117
Installation von festen Schienenmodulen am Gehäuse
ANMERKUNG: Um die festen Schienenmodule zu installieren oder zu entfernen, brauchen Sie die optionale
Frontverkleidung nicht abzunehmen.
1 Um ein Schienenmodul zu installieren, verwenden Sie die drei Befestigungslöcher am Schienenmodul
und die entsprechenden Ansatzschrauben auf der Seite des Systems (siehe Abbildung 2-7).
2 Setzen Sie das Schienenmodul an der Seite des Systems so an, dass die Ansatzschrauben durch
die weiten Aussparungen der Befestigungslöcher greifen, und schieben Sie dann das Modul zur
Systemrückseite hin.
3 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 und 2 für das andere Schienenmodul.
Um ein Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse zu entfernen, ziehen Sie die Sperrklinke nach oben, schieben Sie
dann die Schiene nach vorn, und entfernen Sie das Schienenmodul vom Gehäuse.
Abbildung 2-7. Feste Schienenmodule am Gehäuse installieren und entfernen
1 Befestigungslöcher (6) 2 Ansatzschrauben (6) 3 Sperrklinke
4 Schienenmodule (2) 5 System
4
2
3
1
5118 Montage in einem Zwei-Stützen-Rack
Installation des Systems im Rack
VORSICHT: Wenn Sie mehr als ein System installieren, installieren Sie das erste System in der untersten
möglichen Position im Rack.
1 Fassen Sie das System mit der einen Hand unter der Vorderseite und mit der anderen Hand unter
der Rückseite an.
2 Heben Sie das System in Position, sodass die Seitenschienen auf der Rückseite des Systems mit
den Montageschienen im Rack ausgerichtet sind.
VORSICHT: Wegen der Größe und des Gewichts des Systems sollten Sie niemals versuchen, das System
ohne fremde Hilfe in den Montageschienen zu installieren.
3 Schieben Sie das System bis zum Anschlag in die Montageschienen.
4 Drücken Sie die Rändelschrauben an den Seiten des Systemgehäuses hinein und drehen Sie sie fest,
um das System am Rack zu sichern.
Entfernen des Systems aus dem Rack
Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um das System aus dem Rack zu entfernen:
1 Schalten Sie das System sowie die angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus und unterbrechen Sie
die Stromzufuhr.
2 Lösen Sie die Rändelschrauben auf beiden Seiten der Gehäusefrontplatte, die das System am Rack
sichern.
3 Trennen Sie alle Kabel vom System.
4 Ziehen Sie das System bis zur Sicherungsraste aus dem Rack.
5 Drücken Sie auf die Sperrklinken auf den Seiten des Systems (siehe Abbildung 1-10).
6 Ziehen Sie das System vollständig aus dem Rack.Index 119
Index
E
Einsetzen der RackTüren, 102
I
Inhaltsliste
VersaRails-Kit, 88-89
Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 109
Installation
Feste Schienenmodule, 94, 117
Kabelablage, 102
Kabelführungsarm, 102
Montageschienen
beim Zwei-StützenRack, 112, 114
Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 95
RapidRailsMontageschienen, 95
System im Rack mit vier
Stützen, 98, 118
VersaRails-Montageschienen, 94, 97, 99, 117
Installieren
Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 107
K
Kabel, 105
Kabel verlegen, 104
Kabelablage, 104
installieren, 102
Kabelführungsarm
Installation, 102
Kabel verlegen, 105
Kit-Inhalt
VersaRails, 88-89, 101
Zwei-Stützen-Rack, 109
Konfiguration mit
bündiger Montage, 114
Mittenmontage, 112
M
Markieren des Racks
Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 90
Zwei-StützenRack-Kit, 110-111
R
Rack mit vier Stützen
System entfernen, 105, 118
Rack-Anforderungen
für VersaRails, 87
Rack-Einheit, 91
Rack-Kit für vier Stützen
Inhalt des VersaRailsKits, 88-89
Werkzeuge und Zubehör, 87
Rack-Stabilisatoren, 87
S
Sicherheitshinweise, 85, 107
Stabilisatoren, 87
System entfernen
Rack mit vier
Stützen, 105, 118
T
Türen
Einsetzen, 102
Entfernen, 90
V
VersaRails
Installation, 94, 97, 99, 117
Kit-Inhalt, 88-89, 101120 Index
120 Index
Vertikale Schienen
Eine Rack-Einheit, 91
Markieren, 90
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
bei der RackMontage, 86, 108
W
Werkzeuge und Zubehör
Rack-Kit für vier Stützen, 87
Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit, 109
Z
Zwei-Stützen-Rack-Kit
Kit-Inhalt, 109
Markieren des Racks, 110
Montageschienen
installieren, 112
Werkzeuge und Zubehör, 109www.dell.com | support.dell.com
ラック取り付けガイドメモ、注意、警告
メモ：コンピュータを使いやすくするための重要な情報を説明しています。
注意：ハードウェアの損傷やデータの損失の可能性を示し、その危険を回避するための方法を説明してい
ます。
警告：物的損害、けが、または死亡の原因となる可能性があることを示します。
____________________
本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。
© 2005 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。
Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。
本書で使用されている商標について：Dell、DELL ロゴ、RapidRails、および VersaRails は Dell Inc. の商標です。
本書では、必要に応じて上記以外の商標や会社名が使用されている場合がありますが、これらの商標や会社名は、
一切 Dell Inc. に所属するものではありません。
2005 年 11 月 P/N YC588 Rev. A00目次 123
目次
1 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
安全にお使いいただくために . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
安全について：システムのラックへの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 125
取り付けに関する一般的なガイド. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
作業を開始する前に . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
安全に関する重要な注意 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
VersaRails のラック要件. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ラックスタビライザ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
推奨する工具および備品 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
スライドレールラックキットの内容 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
スタティックレールラックキットの内容. . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
取り付け手順 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ラック扉の取り外し . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
ラックへの印付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
スライドレールアセンブリの構成（スライドレールキットのみ） . . 133
シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け
（スタティックレールキットのみ） . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ラックへのシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 138
スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け . . . . . . 140
ラック扉の取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け
（スライドレールキットのみ）. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
トレイの取り付け. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ケーブルの配線 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ラックからのシステムの取り外し. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り外し . . . . . . . . . 145
スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り外し . . . . . . 146124 目次
2 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
安全にお使いいただくために . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
安全について：システムのラックへの取り付け . . . . . . . . . 147
作業を開始する前に . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
安全に関する重要な注意 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
推奨する工具および備品 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ラックキットの内容 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
取り付け手順 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ラックへの印付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ワイド間隔で穴があるラック. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
マウントレールの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
センターマウント構成での取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
フラッシュマウント構成での取り付け. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
シャーシのスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け. . . . . . . . 156
ラックへのシステムの取り付け . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ラックからのシステムの取り外し. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
索引 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594 柱型ラックの取り付け 125
4 柱型ラックの取り付け
安全にお使いいただくために
ご自身の身体の安全を守り、システムおよび作業環境を保護するために、以下の安全に関する
ガイドラインに従ってください。安全および規制の詳細については、システムに付属の『製品
情報ガイド』を参照してください。保証に関する情報は、『サービス＆サポートのご案内』を参
照してください。
安全について：システムのラックへの取り付け
ラックの安定性や安全性に関して、以下の点にご注意ください。また、特定の注意文および手
順については、システムおよびラック付属のラック取り付けマニュアルを参照してください。
システムはラックの一部とみなします。したがって、「コンポーネント」には、さまざまな周辺
機器やサポートハードウェアと同様に、システムも含まれます。
警告：単体ラックでは正面と側面のスタビライザ、連結ラックでは正面のスタビライザを取り付
けてからラックにシステムを取り付けてください。スタビライザを正しく取り付けずにシステム
をラックに取り付けると、ラックが転倒し、けがをするおそれがあります。必ずスタビライザを
取り付けてから、ラックにコンポーネントを取り付けてください。
ラックにシステム / コンポーネントを取り付けた後は、一度に複数のコンポーネントをラックの
スライドアセンブリを使って引き出さないでください。重みでラックが転倒し、大けがをするお
それがあります。
メモ：ご使用のシステムは、独立型のユニットとして、また、カスタマーラックキットで構成さ
れる Dell ラックキャビネットに取り付けるコンポーネントとして、その安全性が保証されていま
す。それ以外のラックキャビネットにシステムおよびラックキットを取り付ける場合は、安全性
が保証されません。最終的に組み合わせたシステムおよびラックについては、ユーザーの責任に
おいて、適用される安全基準および地域の電気規約の要件に適合することを確認してください。
デルでは、このような組み合わせに関連するいかなる保証責任も負いません。
• システムラックキットは、トレーニングを受けたサービス技術者がラックに取り付けま
す。キットを別のラックに取り付ける場合は、そのラックがデルのラック仕様に適合して
いることを確認してください。
警告：大型ラックを 1 人で移動しないでください。ラックの高さと重さを考慮して、少なくとも
2 人以上でラックを移動することをお勧めします。126 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
• ラックで作業をする前に、スタビライザがラックに固定されて床面に伸び、ラックの全重量が
床面にかかっていることを確認してください。ラックで作業をする前に、ラックが 1 つの場合
は正面と側面のスタビライザ、複数のラックを連結する場合は正面のスタビライザを取り付け
ます。
• ラックには必ず下から上へと、最も重いものから順に設置してください。
• コンポーネントをラックから引き出す前に、ラックが水平で安定していることを確認してくだ
さい。
• レールリリースラッチを押してコンポーネントをラックから出し入れするときは、スライド
レールに指をはさまれないように注意してください。
• ラックに電力を送る AC 分岐回路に過重電流を流さないでください。ラックの総負荷が分岐回
路定格の 80% を超えないようにしてください。
• ラック内のコンポーネントが十分に通気されることを確認してください。
• ラックに取り付けたコンポーネントの作業中に、他のコンポーネントの上に乗ったり、足をか
けたりしないでください。
取り付けに関する一般的なガイド
本書は、ラックキャビネットに 1 つまたは複数のシステムを取り付ける作業を行う、トレーニング
を受けたサービス技術者向けの手順書です。RapidRails™ ラックキットは、工具を使わずにすべて
のシステムメーカーのラックキャビネットに取り付けることができます。VersaRails™ ラックキッ
トは、業界規格に適合しているほとんどのラックキャビネットに取り付けることができます。
RapidRails ラックキットと VersaRails ラックキットの取り付け手順はほとんど同じです。ラック
キットは、ラックキャビネットに取り付けるシステム 1 台ごとに 1 セットずつ必要です。
本項には、以下の 4 柱型ラックキットを取り付ける手順が説明されています。
• スライドレールラックキット
• スタティックレールラックキット（RapidRails バージョンおよび VersaRails バージョン）
スタティックレールキットを 2 柱型ラックに取り付ける手順については、「2 柱型ラックの取
り付け」（147 ページ）を参照してください。
作業を開始する前に
システムのラックへの取り付けを開始する前に、本書の「安全にお使いいただくために」およびご
使用のシステムの『製品情報ガイド』の安全にお使いいただくための注意事項を参照し、補足情報
を確認してください。
警告：複数のシステムをラックに取り付ける場合は、1 台のシステムの取り付け手順を完了してから、
次のシステムの取り付けに進んでください。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 127
警告：ラックキャビネットはサイズが非常に大きく重量もありますが、キャスターで簡単に移動でき
るようになっています。このキャスターにはブレーキがないため、ラックキャビネットを移動すると
きは十分な注意が必要です。ラックキャビネットを別の場所に移動するときは、水平調節用の脚を収
納してください。長い傾斜面、急勾配のある場所、スロープなど、バランスが取りにくい場所には
キャビネットを設置しないでください。水平調節用の脚を伸ばしてキャビネットを支え、キャビネッ
トが動かないようにしてください。
メモ：システム自体の設置方法については、「「ラックへのシステムの取り付け」（138ページ）」を参
照してください。
安全に関する重要な注意
システムをラックに取り付けるときは、次の各項の安全に関する注意を遵守してください。
警告：作業者は、自分自身と周囲の人々を保護するために、本書の手順に必ず従ってください。本シ
ステムは非常に重量があり大きいため、ご自身や周囲の人々のけがを防ぐために準備と計画を適切に
行うことが重要です。これは、特にシステムをラックの高い位置に取り付ける場合に重要になります。
警告：別のシステム用に設計されたラックキットのコンポーネントは取り付けないでください。ご使
用のシステム用のラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、
システムが損傷し、ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。
VersaRails のラック要件
注意：VersaRails ラックキットは、米国規格協会（ANSI）/ 米国電子工業会（EIA）規格 ANSI/EIA-310-
D-92、国際電気標準会議（IEC）297、ドイツ工業規格（DIN）41494 の仕様を満たすラックについてト
レーニングを受けたサービス技術者が取り付けるように設計されています。ラックキットは、ラック
に取り付けるシステム 1 台につき 1 セット必要です。
ラックスタビライザ
警告：単体ラックでは正面と側面のスタビライザ、連結ラックでは正面のスタビライザを取り付けて
からラックにシステムを取り付けてください。スタビライザを正しく取り付けずにシステムをラック
に取り付けると、ラックが転倒し、けがをするおそれがあります。必ずスタビライザを取り付けてか
ら、ラックにコンポーネントを取り付けてください。
スタビライザはラックの転倒を防ぎます。スタビライザを取り付けて床に固定する手順については、
ラックキャビネットに付属のマニュアルを参照してください。
推奨する工具および備品
システムを 4 柱型ラックキャビネットに取り付ける際、以下の工具および備品が必要な場合があり
ます。
• #2 プラスドライバ
• マスキングテープまたはフェルトペン（取り付け穴に印を付けるときに使用）128 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
スライドレールラックキットの内容
• スライドアセンブリ 1 組（RapidRails または VersaRails の構成に変換可能）
• ケーブルマネージメントアーム 1 本
• トレイ 1 個
• ステータスインジケータケーブル 1 本（必要な場合）
• ケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームに固定するタイラップ
• 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジ 8 本（VersaRails 構成でのみ使用）
メモ：図と手順の説明に示すメートル法規格以外のネジは、サイズとインチ当たりのネジ山数で表記
されています。たとえば 1 インチに 32 本のネジ山がある #10 プラスネジは、10-32 ネジと表記します。
図 1-1 スライドレールラックキットの内容
1
トレイ 2
スライドアセンブリ（2） 3 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッド
プラスネジ（8）
（VersaRails 構成のみ）
4
タイラップ 5
ステータスインジケータケーブル
（必要な場合）
6
ケーブルマネージメントアーム
1
2
3
5
6
44 柱型ラックの取り付け 129
スタティックレールラックキットの内容
• VersaRails ブラケットまたは RapidRails ブラケット を使う 1 組のスタティックマウン
トレール
• シャーシスタティックレールモジュール 1 組
• 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジ（8）（VersaRails キットのみ）
• 取り外し可能タイラップ（2）（図 1-2 には記載なし）
メモ：図と手順の説明に示すメートル法規格以外のネジは、サイズとインチ当たりのネジ山数で表記
されています。たとえば 1 インチに 32 本のネジ山がある #10 プラスネジは、10-32 ネジと表記します。
図 1-2 スタティックレールラックキットの内容
1 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジ
ヘッドプラスネジ（8）
（VersaRails キットのみ）
2
スタティックマウントレール（2） 3
シャーシスタティックレール
モジュール（2）
FRONT L
1
3
2130 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
取り付け手順
ラックキットを取り付けるには、次の手順（以降の各項で詳細を説明）を番号順に実行します。
1 ラック扉の取り外し
2 ラックへの印付け
3 スライドレールアセンブリの構成（スライドレールキットのみ）
4 シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け（スタティックレールキットのみ）
5 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け
6 ラックへのシステムの取り付け
7 トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け（スライドレールキットのみ）
8 ケーブルの配線
9 ラック扉の取り付け
ラック扉の取り外し
ラックキャビネットに付属のマニュアルに記載されている扉の取り外し手順を参照してください。
警告：ラックキャビネットの扉の大きさと重さを考慮して、取り付けおよび取り外しは 1 人では行わ
ないでください。
警告：取り外した扉は、不意に倒れてけがをしないような場所に保管してください。
ラックへの印付け
1 ラックユニット（1 U）システムでは、ラックに取り付ける各システムの上下に、1 U（44mm）
の空間を空ける必要があります。
EIA-310 規格を満たすラックキャビネットには、1 ラックユニット（1 U）ごとに 3 つの穴が交互に
並んでいます。穴の中心から中心までの距離は、前面および背面垂直レールの 1 U スペースの一番
上の穴から計測して 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm となっています（ 図 1-3 を参照）。ラックキャ
ビネットの穴には丸型または角型があります。
メモ：垂直レールには、1 U 間隔の水平の線と数字で印が付いていることがあります。ラックの垂直
レールについている印の番号を控える方法もあるので、ラックに印を付けたりテープを貼る作業は必
須ではありません。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 131
図 1-3 1 ラックユニット（1 U）
警告：2 台以上のシステムを取り付ける場合は、ラックの使用可能な最下段に 1 台目のシステムを取
り付けられるようにマウントレールをセットしてください。
ラックに印を付けるには、次の手順を実行します。
1 ラック前面の垂直レール上で、ラックキャビネットに取り付けるシステムの底部の位置を決
め、フェルトペンまたはテープを使って印を付けます。
底部にあたる各 1 U スペースの位置は、穴と穴の間が狭い方の金属部分の中央です
（横線で印が付いているラックキャビネットもあります。図 1-4 を参照）。
2 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上（あるいは EIA-310 規格に適合したラックであれば、
ラックの穴を上に 3 つ数えた場所）を決め、フェルトペンまたはマスキングテープを使って
ラック前面の垂直レールに印を付けます（穴を数えた場合は一番上の穴の真上に印を付ける）。
このマークまたはテープが、垂直レール上でシステムの上端が来る位置になります
（図 1-4 を参照）。
1 U（44 mm）
12.7 mm
15.9 mm
15.9 mm
12.7 mm132 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
図 1-4 垂直レールの印付け
1
垂直レールの印（2）
14 柱型ラックの取り付け 133
スライドレールアセンブリの構成（スライドレールキットのみ）
スライドレールアセンブリには、レールの両端に回転取り付けブラケットがあります。レールアセ
ンブリが RapidRail または VersaRail のどちらとして使われるかは、ブラケットの位置によって決
まります。ブラケットの RapidRail 側には、ブラケットを垂直レールに固定するフックとラッチが
あります。ブラケットの VersaRail 側には 3 つの穴があり、ネジを使って垂直レールに取り付ける
ようになっています。
メモ：ラックキットは、RapidRails 構成のスライドレールアセンブリに付属しています。
取り付けブラケットを回転させて、マウントレールを RapidRails から VersaRails に変更するには、
以下の手順を実行します（図 1-5 を参照）。
1 回転取り付けブラケットのリリースレバーを押し上げます。
2 ブラケットを回転させ、スライドさせて 2 つの肩付き突起から取り外します。
3 肩付き突起が切り込みに再び入るまで、ブラケットをさらに 180 度回転させます。
4 所定の位置にカチッとはまるまで、ブラケットを反対方向に回転させて肩付き突起上に
戻します。
図 1-5 回転取り付けブラケットの位置の変更
1
回転ブラケット 2
リリースレバー 3
肩付き突起（2）
4
切り込み（2） 5
取り付けブラケットフランジ
（図は RapidRails 構成）
1
2
4
3
5134 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
シャーシスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け
（スタティックレールキットのみ）
メモ：シャーシにスタティックレールモジュールを取り付けたり取り外したりするのに、
オプションの前面ベゼルを取り外す必要はありません。
1 レールモジュールを取り付けるには、レールモジュール上の 3 つの鍵穴スロットと、
それに対応するシステム側面の肩付きネジの位置を確認します（図 1-6 を参照）。
2 肩付きネジが鍵穴スロットの丸い部分に入るようにレールモジュールをシステム側面に合わ
せ、モジュールをシステムの背面方向にスライドさせます。
3 手順 1 と 2 を繰り返して、もう 1 つのレールモジュールを取り付けます。
シャーシからレールモジュールを取り外すには、リリースラッチを押し上げ、レールを前方にスラ
イドさせて、レールモジュールをシャーシから外します。
図 1-6 スタティックレールシャーシモジュールの取り付けと取り外し
1
鍵穴スロット（6） 2
肩付きネジ（6） 3
リリースラッチ
4
レールモジュール（2） 5
システム
4
2
3
1
54 柱型ラックの取り付け 135
ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け
メモ：以下の説明は、スライドマウントレールとスタティックマウントレールの両方に適用されます。
RapidRails マウントレールの取り付け
1 ラックキャビネットの前面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジが、「ラックへの印付け」
の垂直レールに付けた印やテープの間のスペースに収まるように（または穴の数を数えて）、
1 つ目のマウントレールの位置を合わせます（図 1-7 を参照）。
マウントレールの前面取り付けブラケットフランジの上部取り付けフックを、垂直レールに付
けた印の間にある一番上の穴に差し込みます。
図 1-7 RapidRails マウントレールの取り付け
1
取り付けフック（2） 2
押しボタン（2） 3
マウントレール（2）
ラック正面
1
2
3136 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
2 マウントレールを正面に向かって押して、取り付けフックを角型の穴に差し込み、取り付けブ
ラケットフランジを下に押して取り付けフックを穴に固定します。完全に固定されると押しボ
タンが下側の角型の穴から飛び出します（図 1-7 を参照）。
3 キャビネットの背面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジを後ろに引いて、上部取り付けフック
を対応する角型の穴に差し込み、フランジを下に押して取り付けフックを穴に固定します。
完全に固定されると押しボタンが下側の角型の穴から飛び出します。
4 ラックの反対側のマウントレールで、手順 1 ～手順 3 を繰り返します。
5 左右の垂直レールで、マウントレールが同じ高さに取り付けられていることを確認します。
VersaRails マウントレールの取り付け
1 ラックキャビネットの前面で、取り付けブラケットのフランジが、「ラックへの印付け」の垂
直レールに付けた印の間のスペースに収まるように（または穴の数を数えて）、1 つ目のマウン
トレールの位置を合わせます（図 1-8 を参照）。
取り付けブラケットフランジの前面にある 3 個の穴を、前面垂直レールに付けた印の間の穴に
合わせます。
2 2 本の 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジを取り付けブラケットフランジの上下の穴
に差し込んで、マウントレールを前面垂直レールに固定します。
3 キャビネットの背面から、取り付けブラケットフランジを後ろに引いて、取り付け穴を背面垂
直レールのそれぞれ対応する穴に合わせます。
4 2 本の 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッドプラスネジを取り付けブラケットフランジの上下の穴
に差し込んで、マウントレールを背面垂直レールに固定します。
5 ラックの反対側のマウントレールで、手順 1 ～手順 4 を繰り返します。
6 左右の垂直レールで、マウントレールが同じ高さに取り付けられていることを確認します。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 137
図 1-8 VersaRails マウントレールの取り付け
1
取り付けブラケットフランジ 2 10-32 x 0.5 インチフランジヘッド
プラスネジ（マウントレール 1
本につき 4 本）
3
マウントレール（2）
ラック正面
1
2
3138 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
ラックへのシステムの取り付け
警告：複数のシステムを取り付ける場合は、1 台目のシステムをラックの使用可能な最下段に取り付
けてください。
警告：システムの大きさと重さを考慮して、マウントレールへのシステムの取り付けは 1 人では行わ
ないでください。
スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け
1 2 つの内部スライドレールをラックから引き出し、一番外側の位置でロックします
（図 1-9 を参照）。
2 スライドアセンブリに載せられる高さまでシステムを持ち上げます。
システムの両側に 3 本ずつある肩付きネジを内部スライドアセンブリの対応する J スロットに
差し込みます（図 1-9 を参照）。
3 システムの側面にある後部肩付きネジを、スライドアセンブリの背面 J スロットに合わせなが
ら、システム背面を下げます。
4 後部肩付きネジをそれぞれの J スロットにはめ込みます。
5 システム前面を下げて、中央と前部の肩付きネジをスライドアセンブリの J スロットに差し込
みます。
肩付きネジを前面スロットに差し込むと、内部スライドレールの前面にあるシステムリリース
ラッチが元の位置に戻ってカチッと固定されます。システムをスライドアセンブリから取り外
すときは、このシステムリリースラッチを使用します。
6 各内部スライドの外側にあるスライドリリースラッチを押し、システムをラックに押し
込みます。
7 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け「トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付
け （スライドレールキットのみ）」（142 ページ）を参照してください。
8 ラックの正面パネルにある蝶ネジを締めてスライドアセンブリをラックに固定します。4 柱型ラックの取り付け 139
図 1-9 スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り付け
1
肩付きネジ（6） 2
スライドリリースラッチ 3
J スロット（6）
4
フロントリリースラッチ 5
内部スライドレール（2）
1
2
4
3
5140 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け
システムをラックに取り付けるには、次の手順を実行します。
1 システムの正面からシャーシを持ち上げて、シャーシレールがラックのマウントレールにはま
るように位置を合わせます。
2 シャーシをマウントレールの一番奥まで押し込みます（図 1-10 を参照）。
3 シャーシ正面パネルの両方の蝶ネジを締めます。
4 必要に応じて、オプションの前面ベゼルを取り付けます。システムに同梱のマニュアルに記載
されているベゼルの取り付け手順を参照してください。
図 1-10 スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り付け
1
マウントレール（2） 2
シャーシレールモジュール（2） 3
蝶ネジ（2）
4
リリースラッチ（2）
1
3
4
24 柱型ラックの取り付け 141
5 後部取り付けブラケットのフランジに設けられた 2 つの取り外し可能タイラップ取り付け穴を
見つけます（図 1-11 を参照）。
タイラップは、システムケーブルをマウントレールに固定するために使います。
図 1-11 取り外し可能タイラップの取り付け
6 タイラップの留め具を取り付け穴に挿入します。
7 タイラップのプランジャを押すと、カチッと音がしてタイラップがマウントレールに固定され
ます。
8 取り外し可能タイラップを使用して、システムケーブルをマウントレールに固定します。
1 マウントレール（2） 2 取り外し可能タイラップ（2）
1
2142 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
ラック扉の取り付け
ラックに付属のマニュアルに記載されている扉の取り付け手順を参照してください。
警告：ラックキャビネットの扉の大きさと重さを考慮して、取り付けおよび取り外しは 1 人では行わ
ないでください。
トレイとケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け
（スライドレールキットのみ）
メモ：この手順はスタティックレールキットには適用されません。
トレイの取り付け
1 システムの背面で、トレイの両端をマウントレールの両端の間に合わせ、固定されるまでトレ
イを前方へスライドさせます（図 1-12 を参照）。
2 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付けに備えて、ケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッ
チの中央にあるキャッチを押し、ラッチを下方向に回転させます（図 1-12 を参照）。
図 1-12 トレイの取り付け
1
マウントレール（2） 2
トレイ 3
ケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチ
1
3
システム背面
24 柱型ラックの取り付け 143
ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け
メモ：ケーブルマネージメントアームは、左右のマウントレールのどちらにでも取り付けることがで
きます。左右のどちらに取り付けるかは、システムからのケーブルをどう配線するかによります。
1 必要に応じて、トレイ上のケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチの中央にあるキャッチを
押し、ラッチを下方向に回転させます（図 1-12 を参照）。
2 システムの背面で、ケーブルマネージメントアーム前端部のラッチをスライドアセンブリ最深
部のブラケットにはめ込み、固定されるまで押し込みます（図 1-13 を参照）。
3 ケーブルマネージメントアームのまだ取り付けていない一端のラッチをスライドアセンブリの
最も外側のブラケットにはめ込み、固定されるまで押し込みます（図 1-13 を参照）。
図 1-13 ケーブルマネージメントアームの取り付け
1
マウントレール（2） 2
ブラケット(2) 3
ラッチ（2）
4
ケーブルマネージメントアーム
システム背面
1
2
4
3144 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
ケーブルの配線
1 アーム内にケーブルを配線できるようにするために、ケーブルマネージメントアーム上部のワ
イヤーケーブルバスケットリッドを開きます（図 1-14 を参照）。
図 1-14 ケーブルマネージメントアームでのケーブルの配線
2 必要に応じて、システムステータスインジケータケーブルをシステム背面パネルのコネクタに
接続します。
システムステータスインジケータケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームに通し、
LED が付いた端をケーブルマネージメントアームの端のスロットに挿入します。
3 I/O ケーブルコネクタと電源ケーブルコネクタを、システム背面パネルの各コネクタに接続し
ます。
ケーブル接続の詳細については、ご使用のシステムの『はじめに』、または『ハードウェア
オーナーズマニュアル』を参照してください。
メモ：電源装置の背面にあるストレインリリーフループを使用して、電源ケーブルのストレイン
リリーフに役立てます。
4 ラックキットに付属のタイラップを使用して、ラック内の隣接するシステムの邪魔にならない
ようにケーブルを束ねます。
1
ケーブルマネージメントアーム 2
取り付け済みのタイラップ 3
ケーブルマネージメントアー
ム保持ラッチ
4
バスケットリッド 5
システムステータスインジ
ケータケーブルのコネクタ
6
ベルクロストラップ
7
取り付け済みのタイラップ
4
5
2
3
6
システム背面
1
74 柱型ラックの取り付け 145
5 ケーブルをケーブルマネージメントアームのバスケットに通します。
6 ヒンジの動きを妨げないように、必要に応じてケーブルのたるみを調節し、束ねたケーブルを
縦方向のベルクロストラップで固定します（図 1-14 を参照）。
7 内部の端とケーブルマネージメントアームのヒンジ部分にある取り付け済みのタイラップを使
用して、ケーブルマネージメントアームチャネル内の束ねたケーブルを固定します
（図 1-14 を参照）。
8 ケーブルバスケットリッドを閉じます。
9 システムの前面を前面垂直レールに固定している蝶ネジを外します。
10 システムをラックから引き出したりラックに押し戻したりして、ケーブルが正しく取り付け
られているか、ケーブルマネージメントアームの動きでケーブルが絡まったり、引きつった
りしないか、またはアームの動きが妨げられていないか確認します。必要に応じて、ケーブ
ルマネージメントアームのバスケット内のケーブルの位置を調整します。
メモ：システムを引き出せる限度まで引き出すと、伸びきった位置でスライドアセンブリにロッ
クがかかります。ロックを解除するには、スライドの側面にあるスライドリリースラッチを押し
ながら、システムをラックに押し込みます。
11 ケーブルが正しく配線できたら、システムをラックに完全に押し込みます。
12 トレイ上のケーブルマネージメントアーム保持ラッチを押し上げてアームを固定します
（図 1-14 を参照）。
ラックからのシステムの取り外し
スライドレールを使用するシステムの取り外し
システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。
1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから外
します。
2 I/O ケーブルコネクタと電源ケーブルコネクタを、システム背面パネルの各コネクタから取り
外します。
3 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。
4 レールが引き出された位置でロックするまで、システムをラックから引き出します。
5 各レールのフロントリリースラッチを引き上げて（図 1-9 を参照）、システムを前に引き出し
ます。
6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。146 4 柱型ラックの取り付け
スタティックレールを使用するシステムの取り外し
システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。
1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから
外します。
2 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。
3 システムからすべてのケーブルを外します。
4 リリースラッチが掛かって止まるところまで、システムをラックから引き出します。
5 システム両側のリリースラッチを押し下げます（図 1-10 を参照）。
6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 147
2 柱型ラックの取り付け
2 柱型ラックキットは、電気通信機器設備などで使用される 2 柱型オープンフレームリレー
ラックにシステムを取り付けるために使用します。7.62 cm および 15.24 cm 幅 2 柱型ラック
（取り付け穴の間隔はユニバーサルまたはワイド）に対応しています。このキットは、センター
マウントまたはフラッシュマウントのどちらの構成にも取り付けられます。
2 柱型リレーラックは、ラックメーカーや業界規格によって規定または認可された床面または
壁面用の留め具や支柱を使用して、床面、天井、上部壁面、あるいは適切であれば隣接する
ラックなどに正しく固定する必要があります。取り付けを開始する前に、2 柱型ラックメー
カーのマニュアルを参照して、警告事項を確認してください。
警告：正しい位置にしっかりと固定されていない 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックには、
システムを取り付けないでください。システムの損傷や作業者および周囲の人々のけがを招
くおそれがあります。
安全にお使いいただくために
ご自身の身体の安全を守り、システムおよび作業環境を保護するために、以下の安全に関する
ガイドラインに従ってください。安全に関する詳細な情報については、『製品情報ガイド』を参
照してください。
安全について：システムのラックへの取り付け
ラックの安定性や安全性に関して、以下の点にご注意ください。また、特定の注意文および手
順については、システムおよびラック付属のラック取り付けマニュアルを参照してください。
システムはラックの一部とみなします。したがって、「コンポーネント」には、さまざまな周辺
機器やサポートハードウェアと同様に、システムも含まれます。
警告：ラックにシステム / コンポーネントを取り付けた後は、一度に 2 台以上のコンポーネントをスライド
アセンブリのラックから引き出さないでください。重みでラックが転倒し、大けがをするおそれがあります。
メモ：ご使用のシステムは、独立型のユニットとして、また、カスタマーラックキットで構成さ
れる Dell ラックキャビネットに取り付けるコンポーネントとして、その安全性が保証されていま
す。それ以外のラックキャビネットにシステムおよびラックキットを取り付ける場合は、安全性
が保証されません。最終的に組み合わせたシステムおよびラックについては、ユーザーの責任に
おいて、適用される安全基準および地域の電気規約の要件に適合することを確認してください。
デルでは、このような組み合わせに関連するいかなる保証責任も負いません。148 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
• システムラックキットは、トレーニングを受けたサービス技術者がラックに取り付けます。
キットを別のラックに取り付ける場合は、そのラックがデルのラック仕様に適合していること
を確認してください。
警告：大型ラックを 1 人で移動しないでください。ラックの高さと重さを考慮して、少なくとも 2 人
以上でラックを移動することをお勧めします。
• ラックには必ず下から上へと、最も重いものから順に設置してください。
• コンポーネントをラックから引き出す前に、ラックが水平で安定していることを確認してくだ
さい。
• レールリリースラッチを押してコンポーネントをラックから出し入れするときは、スライド
レールに指をはさまれないように注意してください。
• ラックに電力を送る AC 分岐回路に過重電流を流さないでください。ラックの総負荷が分岐回
路定格の 80% を超えないようにしてください。
• ラック内のコンポーネントが十分に通気されることを確認してください。
• ラックに取り付けたコンポーネントの作業中に、他のコンポーネントの上に乗ったり、足をか
けたりしないでください。
作業を開始する前に
システムのラックへの取り付けを開始する前に、本書の「安全にお使いいただくために」およびご
使用のシステムの『製品情報ガイド』の安全にお使いいただくための注意事項を参照し、補足情報
を確認してください。
警告：複数のシステムをラックに取り付ける場合は、1 台のシステムの取り付け手順を完了してから、
次のシステムの取り付けに進んでください。
メモ：システム自体の設置方法については、「「ラックへのシステムの取り付け」（157ページ）」を参
照してください。
安全に関する重要な注意
システムをラックに取り付けるときは、次の各項の安全に関する注意を遵守してください。
警告：作業者は、自分自身と周囲の人々を保護するために、本書の手順に必ず従ってください。本シ
ステムは非常に重量があり大きいため、ご自身や周囲の人々のけがを防ぐために準備と計画を適切に
行うことが重要です。これは、特にシステムをラックの高い位置に取り付ける場合に重要になります。
警告：別のシステム用に設計されたラックキットのコンポーネントは取り付けないでください。ご使
用のシステム用のラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、
システムが損傷し、ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 149
推奨する工具および備品
• #2 プラスドライバ
• 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバ（ブラケットをフラッシュマウント構成に変更す
る場合）
• 取り付け穴に印を付けるために使用するマスキングテープまたはフェルトペン
ラックキットの内容
2 柱型ラックキットの付属品は次のとおりです（図 2-1 参照）。
• マウントレール 1 組
• 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ（8）
• 取り外し可能タイラップ（2）（図 2-1 には記載なし）
図 2-1 2 柱型ラックキットの部品
1 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ（8） 2 15.24 cm 幅、センターマウン
ト、ネジ付きスタッド
3 7.62 cm 幅、センターマウン
ト、ネジ付きスタッド
4
調整可能な取り付けフランジ 5
センターマウント取り付けフ
ランジ
6 15.24 cm 幅、フラッシュマウ
ント、ネジ付きスタッド
7 7.62 cm 幅、フラッシュマウント、
ネジ付きスタッド
8
フラッシュマウント取り付け
フランジ
9
マウントレール（2）
9
1
7
8
6
5
3
2
4150 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
取り付け手順
2 柱型ラックキットを取り付けるには、次の手順を番号順に実行します。
1 ラックへの印付け
• ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック
• ワイド間隔で穴があるラック
2 ラックへのマウントレールの取り付け
• センターマウント
• フラッシュマウント
3 ラックへのシステムの取り付け
4 ケーブルの配線
ラックへの印付け
2 柱型ラックに取り付ける各システムの上下には、1 U（44mm）の空間を空ける必要があります。
ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラック
ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックには、1 ラックユニット（1 U）ごとに 3 つの穴が交互に並んで
います。穴の中心から中心まで距離は、前面および背面垂直レールの 1 U スペースの一番上の穴か
ら計測して 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm となっています（図 2-2 を参照）。
図 2-2 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックのユニバーサル間隔の穴
12.7 mm
15.9 mm
15.9 mm
1 U（44 mm）2 柱型ラックの取り付け 151
ワイド間隔で穴があるラック
ワイド間隔で穴があるラックには、ラックユニットごとに 2 つの穴が交互に並んでいます。穴の中
心から中心までの距離は、前面および背面の垂直支柱の 1 U スペースの一番上の穴から計測して
31.7 mm、12.7 mm となっています（図 2-3 を参照）。
図 2-3 2 柱型オープンフレームリレーラックのワイド間隔の穴
ラックに印を付けるには、次の手順を実行します。
1 前面垂直レール上で、2 柱型ラックに取り付けるシステムの底部の位置を決め、印を付けます。
各 1 U スペースの底部は、レールの穴の一番間隔が狭い金属部分の中央になります。
メモ：ワイド間隔で穴があるラックの場合は、手順 3 に進みます。
2 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上（あるいはユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックでは、
ラックの穴を上に 3 つ数えた場所）に印を付けます（図 2-2 を参照）。
ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックの垂直方向の各 1 U スペースには（一番上の穴から計測し
て）穴の中心間距離が 15.9 mm、15.9 mm、12.7 mm の間隔で 3 つの穴があります
（図 2-2 を参照）。
メモ：ユニバーサル間隔で穴があるラックの場合、ラックの印付け手順はこれで完了です。
3 最初に印を付けた場所から 44 mm 上（あるいはワイド規格のラックでは次の上の穴の場所）
に印を付けます（図 2-3 を参照）。
ワイド間隔で穴があるラックの垂直方向の各 1 U（44 mm）のスペースには、（一番上の穴か
ら計測して）穴の中心間距離が 31.7 mm の間隔で 2 つの穴があります（図 2-3 を参照）。
1 U（44 mm）
12.7 mm
31.7 mm152 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
マウントレールの取り付け
マウントレールは、ユニバーサル間隔（図 2-2 参照）またはワイド間隔（図 2-3 参照）のどちらの
穴がある 2 柱型オープンフレームラックにも取り付けることができます。また、マウントレール
は、フラッシュマウント構成またはセンターマウント構成のどちらでも取り付けることができます。
警告：このラックキットを使用して他のシステムを取り付けないでください。ご使用のシステム用の
ラックキットのみをお使いください。別のシステム用のラックキットを使用すると、システムが損傷し、
ご自身や周囲の人々がけがをするおそれがあります。
センターマウント構成での取り付け
2 柱型ラックキットは、7.62 cm 幅センターマウント用のブラケット構成で出荷されています。
マウントレールの付属部品については、図 2-1 を参照してください。取り付けを完了するには、
次の手順を実行します。
1 右側のマウントレールを見つけてください。調整可能な取り付けブラケットを押し、
マウントレールの後方へ移動します（図 2-4 を参照）。
2 右側のマウントレールを、2 柱型ラックの印を付けた場所に合わせ、センターマウントの調整
可能な取り付けブラケットを前方へ押して 2 柱型ラックの支柱に押しつけ、4 本の 12-24 x 0.5
インチプラスなべネジを使用して取り付けフランジと取り付けブラケットを固定します
（図 2-4 を参照）。
3 手順 1 と 手順 2 を繰り返して、左側のマウントレールをラックに取り付けます。2 柱型ラックの取り付け 153
図 2-4 センターマウント構成でのマウントレールの取り付け
フラッシュマウント構成での取り付け
2 柱型ラックキットは、7.62 cm 幅センターマウント用のブラケット構成で出荷されています。
マウントレールの付属部品については、図 2-1 を参照してください。2 柱型ラックでフラッシュマ
ウント構成にするためには、次の手順でマウントレールを準備します。
1 滑らかな作業面に、レールの前端を手前にして 2 本のマウントレールを並べます
（図 2-5 を参照）。
2 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバを使って、調整可能な取り付けブラケッ
トから 2 個のナットを取り外します（図 2-5 を参照）。
1 2 柱型オープンフレームラック 2 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ
（レール 1 本につき 4 本)
3
センターマウント取り付
けフランジ
2
マウントレール（2） 4
システムレール（2） 6
リリースラッチ
2
1
4
6
3
5154 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
3 ブラケットを取り外し、7.62 cm または 15.24 cm 幅のどちらかの取り付け用ネジ付きスタッ
ドに取り付けます（図 2-5 を参照）。
4 手順 2 で取り外した 2 個のナットを調整可能な取り付けブラケットに取り付け、手締めで固定
します（図 2-5 を参照）。
5 手順 2～手順 4 を繰り返して、反対側のマウントレールも同様に準備します。
図 2-5 フラッシュマウント構成での調整可能な取り付けブラケットの準備
6 左側のマウントレールを印を付けた位置に合わせ、フラッシュマウント取り付けフランジ
を 2 柱型ラックの支柱の前面にぴったり合わせて置き、2 本の 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネ
ジを使って支柱に固定します（図 2-6 を参照）。
1
ナット（ブラケット 1 個に
つき 2 個）
2
調整可能な取り付けブラケット 3 7.62 cm 幅、フラッシュマウント、
ネジ付きスタッド
4
フラッシュマウント取り
付けフランジ
1
4
3
22 柱型ラックの取り付け 155
7 調整可能な取り付けブラケットを 2 柱型ラックの支柱の背面まで押し込み、
2 本の 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジを使って支柱に固定します（ 図 2-6 を参照）。
8 手順 6 と 手順 7 を繰り返して、右側のマウントレールをラックに取り付けます。
9 3/8 インチレンチまたはナットドライバで、両方のマウントレールのブラケットに取り付けた
ナットをすべて締め付けます。
図 2-6 フラッシュマウント構成でのマウントレールの取り付け
1 2 柱型オープンフレームラック 2 12-24 x 0.5 インチプラスなべネジ
（レール 1 本につき 4 本)
3
マウントレール（2）
2
1
3156 2 柱型ラックの取り付け
シャーシのスタティックレールモジュールの取り付け
メモ：シャーシにスタティックレールモジュールを取り付けたり取り外したりするのに、オプション
の前面ベゼルを取り外す必要はありません。
1 レールモジュールを取り付けるには、レールモジュール上の 3 つの鍵穴スロットと、それに対
応するシステム側面の肩付きネジの位置を確認します（図 2-7 を参照）。
2 肩付きネジが鍵穴スロットの丸い部分に入るようにレールモジュールをシステム側面に合わ
せ、モジュールをシステムの背面方向にスライドさせます。
3 手順 1 と 2 を繰り返して、もう 1 つのレールモジュールを取り付けます。
シャーシからレールモジュールを取り外すには、リリースラッチを押し上げ、レールを前方にスラ
イドさせて、レールモジュールをシャーシから外します。
図 2-7 スタティックレールシャーシモジュールの取り付けと取り外し
1
鍵穴スロット（6） 2
肩付きネジ（6） 3
リリースラッチ
4
レールモジュール（2） 5
システム
4
2
3
1
52 柱型ラックの取り付け 157
ラックへのシステムの取り付け
警告：複数のシステムを取り付ける場合は、1 台目のシステムをラックの使用可能な最下段に取り付
けてください。
1 片方の手をシステム前面の下に、もう片方の手をシステム背面の下に置きます。
2 システムを持ち上げて、システム側面のレールがシステム後方でラックのマウントレールには
まるように位置を合わせます。
警告：システムの大きさと重さを考慮して、マウントレールへのシステムの取り付けは 1 人では行わ
ないでください。
3 システムをマウントレールの一番奥まで押し込みます。
4 正面パネルの両側にある蝶ネジを差し込んで締め付け、システムのシャーシをラックに固定し
ます。
ラックからのシステムの取り外し
システムをラックから取り外すには、次の手順を実行します。
1 システムおよび接続されている周辺機器の電源を切り、システムを電源コンセントから外しま
す。
2 正面シャーシパネルの両側でシステムのシャーシをラックに固定している蝶ネジを緩めます。
3 システムからすべてのケーブルを外します。
4 リリースラッチが掛かって止まるところまで、システムをラックから引き出します。
5 システム両側のリリースラッチを押し下げます（図 1-10 を参照）。
6 システムをラックから完全に引き出します。158 2 柱型ラックの取り付け索引 159
索引
2 柱型ラックキット
キットの内容 , 149
工具と備品 , 149
マウントレール , 152
ラックへの印付け , 150
4 柱型ラック
システムの取り外し ,
145, 157
4 柱型ラックキット
VersaRails キットの
内容 , 128-129
工具と備品 , 127
V
VersaRails
キットの内容 , 128-129,
141
取り付け , 134, 137, 139,
156
VersaRails のラック
要件 , 127
あ
安全にお使いいただく
ために , 125, 147
き
キットの内容
2 柱型ラック , 149
VersaRails, 128-129, 141
け
ケーブル , 145
ケーブルマネージメント
アーム , 142, 144-145
こ
工具と備品
2 柱型ラックキット , 149
4 柱型ラックキット , 127
し
システムの取り外し
4 柱型ラック , 145, 157
す
垂直レール , 131-130
スタビライザ , 127
せ
センターマウント構成 , 152
と
扉
取り外し , 130
取り付け , 142
取り付け
2 柱型ラックキット , 147
2 柱型ラックへのマウント
レール , 152-153
4 柱型ラックキット , 135
4 柱型ラックへのシステムの
取り付け , 138, 157
RapidRails マウント
ール , 135
VersaRails マウント
レール , 134, 137,
139, 156
ケーブルマネージメント
アーム , 142
スタティックレール
モジュール , 134, 156160 索引
160 索引
な
内容のリスト
2 柱型ラックキット , 149
VersaRails キット , 128-129
ふ
フラッシュマウント
構成 , 153
ら
ラックスタビライザ , 127
ラック扉の取り付け , 142
ラック取り付け時の
注意事項 , 126, 148
ラックへの印付け
2 柱型ラックキット ,
150-151
4 柱型ラックキット , 130
ラックユニット , 131www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Guía de instalación del rackNotas, avisos y precauciones
NOTA: una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayudará a utilizar mejor el ordenador.
AVISO: un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o la pérdida de datos, e informa de cómo evitar
el problema.
PRECAUCIÓN: un mensaje de PRECAUCIÓN indica el riesgo de daños materiales, lesiones o incluso la muerte.
____________________
La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso.
© 2005 Dell Inc. Reservados todos los derechos.
Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este documento en cualquier forma sin la autorización por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, RapidRails y VersaRails son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.
Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a las entidades que los poseen
o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Noviembre de 2005 P/N YC588 Rev. A00Contenido 163
Contenido
1 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Instrucciones generales de instalación. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Antes de comenzar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Información importante sobre seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Requisitos del rack para VersaRails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pies estabilizadores del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Herramientas y material recomendados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tareas de instalación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Extracción de las puertas del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Marcado del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes
(únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis
(únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Instalación del sistema en el rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Colocación de las puertas del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables
(únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Instalación de la bandeja. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Cableado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Extracción del sistema del rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Extracción de un sistema con rieles deslizantes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Extracción de un sistema con rieles estáticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186164 Contenido
2 Instalación del rack de dos postes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Antes de comenzar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Información importante sobre seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Herramientas y material recomendados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Contenido del kit de rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tareas de instalación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Marcado del rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Racks con separación universal entre orificios . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Racks con separación ancha entre orificios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Instalación de los rieles de montaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Montaje centrado. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Montaje a ras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis . . . . . . . . . . 197
Instalación del sistema en el rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Extracción del sistema del rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 165
Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Instrucciones de seguridad
Siga estas pautas de seguridad para garantizar su propia seguridad y proteger el sistema y el entorno
de trabajo frente a posibles daños. Para obtener información completa sobre seguridad y normativas,
consulte la Guía de información del producto que se entrega con el sistema. La información de la
garantía puede incluirse en este documento o en un documento aparte.
SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack
Tenga en cuenta las precauciones siguientes para garantizar la estabilidad y la seguridad del rack.
Consulte también la documentación de instalación del rack incluida con el sistema y el rack para
ver las instrucciones y los procedimientos específicos de precaución.
Los sistemas se consideran componentes de un rack. Por lo tanto, “componente” se refiere a
cualquier sistema, así como a los distintos periféricos o al hardware de soporte.
PRECAUCIÓN: antes de instalar sistemas en un rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales
para racks individuales, o bien los estabilizadores frontales para varios racks unidos. Si no se instalan
estabilizadores antes de realizar el montaje de los sistemas, el rack puede volcarse, y ello puede producir
lesiones personales. Por lo tanto, instale siempre los estabilizadores antes de instalar los componentes
en el rack.
Una vez que haya instalado el sistema o los componentes en el rack, no extraiga nunca del rack más de un
componente a la vez sobre sus ensamblajes deslizantes. El peso de más de un componente extendido puede
provocar que el rack se vuelque y ello puede producir lesiones graves.
NOTA: este sistema tiene el certificado de seguridad de una unidad independiente y como un componente
para uso en un armario rack Dell con el kit de rack para clientes. La instalación del sistema y del kit de rack
en otros armarios rack no ha sido aprobada por ninguna agencia de seguridad. Es su responsabilidad
asegurarse de que la combinación final de sistema y rack cumpla los estándares de seguridad
correspondientes y los requisitos de códigos de electricidad locales. Dell declina todas las responsabilidades
y garantías con relación a tales combinaciones.
• Los kits de rack del sistema están diseñados para ser instalados en un rack por técnicos de servicio
cualificados. Si instala el kit en cualquier otro rack, cerciórese de que éste cumpla las
especificaciones de un rack Dell.
PRECAUCIÓN: no mueva los racks sin la ayuda de otra persona. Debido a la altura y el peso del rack,
se recomienda un mínimo de dos personas para realizar dicha tarea.
• Antes de manipular el rack, asegúrese de que los estabilizadores estén fijados al rack, de que
lleguen hasta el suelo y de que todo el peso del rack descanse sobre el suelo. Antes de trabajar
en el rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales en caso de un único rack, o bien los
estabilizadores frontales en caso de varios racks unidos.166 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
• Cargue siempre el rack desde la parte inferior hacia arriba, colocando en primer lugar el elemento
más pesado.
• El rack debe estar nivelado y estable antes de extender un componente.
• Tenga cuidado al presionar los pestillos de liberación de los rieles de componentes y al extraer o
introducir un componente del rack, puesto que sus dedos pueden quedar aprisionados en los rieles
deslizantes.
• No sobrecargue el circuito de alimentación de CA que suministra alimentación al rack. La carga total
del rack no debe ser superior al 80 % de la corriente nominal del circuito.
• Los componentes del rack deben disponer de una ventilación suficiente.
• No suba sobre ningún componente ni lo utilice como escalón para realizar operaciones en los
componentes de un rack.
Instrucciones generales de instalación
En esta guía de instalación se proporcionan instrucciones para técnicos de servicio especializados que
instalen uno o más sistemas en un armario rack. El kit de rack RapidRails™ se puede montar en todos los
armarios rack del fabricante sin herramientas, y el kit de rack VersaRails™ se puede montar en la mayoría de
los armarios rack estándar del sector. Los procedimientos para instalar los kits de rack RapidRails y VersaRails
son similares. Para cada sistema que se montará en el armario rack se precisa un kit de rack.
Esta sección contiene procedimientos para los kits de rack de cuatro postes siguientes:
• Kit de rack de rieles deslizantes
• Kit de rack de rieles estáticos (versiones RapidRails y VersaRails)
Consulte la sección “Instalación del rack de dos postes” en la página 187 para obtener instrucciones
sobre cómo instalar un kit de rieles estáticos en un rack de dos postes.
Antes de comenzar
Antes de montar el sistema en el rack, lea detenidamente la sección “Instrucciones de seguridad” de esta
guía, así como las instrucciones de seguridad que se incluyen en la Guía de información del producto para
obtener información adicional.
PRECAUCIÓN: cuando instale varios sistemas en un rack, realice todos los procedimientos para un sistema
antes de instalar el siguiente sistema.
PRECAUCIÓN: los armarios rack pueden ser muy pesados, pero se mueven con facilidad gracias a las ruedas.
No disponen de frenos. Preste extremo cuidado cuando mueva un armario rack. Si traslada el armario rack,
pliegue primero los pies niveladores. Evite rampas o inclinaciones largas o pronunciadas para evitar perder
el control del armario. Extienda los pies niveladores para sostener el armario y evitar que se desplace.
NOTA: para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación del sistema, consulte “Instalación del sistema en el rack”
en la página 178.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 167
Información importante sobre seguridad
Tenga en cuenta las precauciones de seguridad descritas en los apartados siguientes al instalar el sistema
en el rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debe seguir estrictamente los procedimientos que se explican en este documento para
protegerse a sí mismo y a otras personas que puedan verse involucradas. El sistema puede tener una
envergadura y un peso considerables, por lo que son importantes una preparación y una planificación adecuadas
para evitar lesiones personales. Esta precaución es aún más importante cuando se montan sistemas en la parte
alta del rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: no instale componentes de kit de rack que estén diseñados para otro sistema. Utilice
únicamente el kit de rack correspondiente a su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema, pueden
producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones personales.
Requisitos del rack para VersaRails
AVISO: el kit de rack VersaRails lo deben montar únicamente técnicos de servicio cualificados en un rack
que cumpla las especificaciones siguientes: ANSI/EIA-310-D-92, IEC 297 y DIN 41494. Se precisa un kit de rack
para cada sistema que se instale en el rack.
Pies estabilizadores del rack
PRECAUCIÓN: antes de instalar sistemas en un rack, instale los estabilizadores frontales y laterales para racks
individuales, o bien los estabilizadores frontales para varios racks unidos. Si no se instalan estabilizadores antes
de realizar el montaje de los sistemas, el rack puede volcarse, y ello puede producir lesiones personales. Por lo
tanto, instale siempre los estabilizadores antes de instalar los componentes en el rack.
Los pies estabilizadores ayudan a evitar que el rack vuelque. Consulte la documentación que se facilita con
el armario rack para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación y la fijación de los pies estabilizadores.
Herramientas y material recomendados
Para montar el sistema en un armario rack de cuatro postes, necesita los elementos siguientes:
• Destornillador Phillips del nº 2
• Cinta adhesiva o rotulador de punta de fieltro para marcar los orificios de montaje que se utilizarán168 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes
• Un par de ensamblajes deslizantes (convertibles a la configuración RapidRails o VersaRails)
• Un brazo para tendido de cables
• Una bandeja
• Un cable de indicador de estado (si procede)
• Abrazaderas para fijar los cables al brazo para tendido de cables
• Ocho tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (utilizados únicamente en la configuración
VersaRails)
NOTA: los tornillos no métricos que se describen en las ilustraciones y en los procedimientos se identifican por el
tamaño y el número de roscas por pulgada. Por ejemplo, un tornillo Phillips del nº 10 con 32 roscas por pulgada se
identifica como un tornillo 10-32.
Figura 1-1. Contenido del kit de rack de rieles deslizantes
1 Bandeja 2 Ensamblajes deslizantes (2) 3 8 tornillos Phillips con arandela
10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (únicamente
en la configuración VersaRails)
4 Abrazaderas 5 Cable de indicador de estado
(si procede)
6 Brazo para tendido de cables
1
2
3
5
6
4Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 169
Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos
• Un par de rieles de montaje estáticos con soportes VersaRails o RapidRails
• Un par de módulos de rieles estáticos de chasis
• 8 tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas (sólo en los kits VersaRails)
• 2 abrazaderas desmontables (no se muestran en la figura 1-2)
NOTA: los tornillos no métricos que se describen en las ilustraciones y en los procedimientos se identifican por el
tamaño y el número de roscas por pulgada. Por ejemplo, un tornillo Phillips del nº 10 con 32 roscas por pulgada se
identifica como un tornillo 10-32.
Figura 1-2. Contenido del kit de rack de rieles estáticos
1 8 tornillos Phillips con
arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas
(únicamente en los kits
VersaRails)
2 Rieles de montaje estáticos (2) 3 Módulos de rieles estáticos
de chasis (2)
FRONT L
1
3
2170 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Tareas de instalación
La instalación del kit de rack implica realizar las tareas siguientes (que se describen en detalle en
las secciones siguientes) en el orden indicado:
1 Extracción de las puertas del rack
2 Marcado del rack
3 Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)
4 Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis (únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos)
5 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack
6 Instalación del sistema en el rack
7 Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)
8 Cableado
9 Colocación de las puertas del rack
Extracción de las puertas del rack
Para extraer las puertas, consulte los procedimientos correspondientes en la documentación suministrada
con el armario rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso de las puertas del armario rack, nunca debe intentar montarlas
ni desmontarlas una sola persona.
PRECAUCIÓN: guarde las dos puertas en un lugar donde, en caso de caer accidentalmente, no puedan lesionar
a nadie.
Marcado del rack
Para un sistema 1 U, debe asignar 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical para cada sistema que instale en el rack.
Los armarios rack que cumplen los estándares EIA-310 tienen un patrón alterno de tres orificios por unidad
de rack con un espacio entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio
1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm para los rieles verticales frontal y posterior (vea la figura 1-3).
Los armarios rack pueden tener orificios redondos o cuadrados.
NOTA: los rieles verticales se pueden marcar con líneas horizontales y números en incrementos de 1 U. Si lo
desea, puede anotar en un papel las marcas numéricas del riel vertical del rack. No es necesario marcar el rack
con rotulador ni con cinta adhesiva. Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 171
Figura 1-3. Una unidad de rack
PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale los rieles de montaje de modo que el primer sistema
quede instalado en la posición más baja disponible en el rack.
Para marcar el rack, realice los pasos siguientes:
1 Coloque una marca (o una cinta) en los rieles verticales frontales del rack en los que desee colocar
la parte inferior del sistema que está instalando en el rack.
La parte inferior de cada espacio 1 U se encuentra en el centro de la zona metálica más estrecha
entre orificios (marcados con una línea horizontal en algunos armarios rack; vea la figura 1-4).
2 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado (o cuente tres orificios
en un rack que cumpla los estándares EIA-310) y marque los rieles verticales frontales del rack con un
rotulador de punta de fieltro o con cinta adhesiva (si ha contado los orificios, coloque una marca justo
encima del orificio superior). Esta marca o trozo de cinta indica dónde se va a situar el borde superior
del sistema en los rieles verticales (vea la figura 1-4).
1 U (44 mm)
12,7 mm
15,9 mm
15,9 mm
12,7 mm172 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Figura 1-4. Marcado de los rieles verticales
1 Marcas en el riel vertical (2)
1Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 173
Configuración de los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes
(únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)
El ensamblaje de rieles deslizantes presenta un soporte de montaje giratorio en cada extremo del riel.
La posición del soporte determina si el ensamblaje de rieles se utiliza como RapidRail o como VersaRail.
El lado RapidRail del soporte tiene un gancho y un pestillo que lo fijan al riel vertical. El lado VersaRail
del soporte tiene tres orificios y se fija al riel vertical mediante tornillos.
NOTA: el kit de rack se suministra con los ensamblajes de rieles deslizantes en la configuración RapidRails.
Para girar el soporte de montaje y cambiar los rieles de montaje de RapidRails a VersaRails
(vea la figura 1-5):
1 Levante la palanca de liberación del soporte de montaje giratorio.
2 Gire el soporte y levántelo para sacarlo de los dos topes.
3 Continúe girando el soporte 180 grados hasta que pueda volver a colocar las muescas sobre los topes.
4 Gire el soporte en la dirección contraria sobre los topes hasta que el soporte encaje en su sitio.
Figura 1-5. Cambio de la posición del soporte de montaje giratorio
1 Soporte giratorio 2 Palanca de liberación 3 Topes (2)
4 Muescas (2) 5 Superficie de montaje del
soporte (configuración
RapidRails)
1
2
4
3
5174 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis
(únicamente en los kits de rieles estáticos)
NOTA: no es necesario extraer el embellecedor frontal opcional para instalar o extraer los módulos de rieles
estáticos del chasis.
1 Para instalar un módulo de rieles, localice las tres ranuras en forma de cerradura del módulo de rieles
y los tornillos de pivote correspondientes en el lateral del sistema (vea la figura 1-6).
2 Coloque el módulo de rieles al lado del sistema de modo que los tornillos de pivote se ajusten a la parte
redonda de las ranuras y, a continuación, inserte el módulo hacia la parte posterior del sistema.
3 Repita los pasos 1 y 2 para instalar el otro módulo de rieles.
Para extraer un módulo de rieles del chasis, tire del pestillo de liberación, deslice el riel hacia adelante
y extraiga el módulo de rieles del chasis.
Figura 1-6. Instalación y extracción de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis
1 Ranuras en forma
de cerradura (6)
2 Tornillos de pivote (6) 3 Pestillo de liberación
4 Módulos de rieles (2) 5 Sistema
4
2
3
1
5Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 175
Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack
NOTA: las instrucciones siguientes corresponden tanto a los rieles de montaje deslizantes como a los estáticos.
Instalación de los rieles de montaje RapidRails
1 En la parte frontal del armario rack, coloque uno de los rieles de montaje de forma que la superficie
de montaje del soporte quede situada entre las marcas o la cinta que ha colocado (o las posiciones
numeradas) en los rieles verticales de la sección “Marcado del rack” (vea la figura 1-7).
El gancho de montaje superior de la superficie de montaje de soporte frontal debe entrar en el orificio
superior entre las marcas realizadas en los rieles verticales.
Figura 1-7. Instalación de los rieles de montaje RapidRails
1 Ganchos de montaje (2) 2 Pulsadores (2) 3 Rieles de montaje (2)
Parte frontal del rack
1
2
3176 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
2 Empuje el riel de montaje hasta que el gancho de montaje entre en el orificio cuadrado correspondiente. A continuación, presione hacia abajo la superficie de montaje del soporte hasta que el gancho
de montaje quede encajado y el botón de presión salga por el orificio cuadrado inferior
(vea la figura 1-7).
3 En la parte posterior del armario, tire hacia atrás de la superficie de montaje hasta que el gancho de
montaje encaje en el orificio cuadrado superior y, a continuación, empuje hacia abajo la superficie
hasta que el gancho de montaje quede encajado y el botón de presión salga por el orificio cuadrado
inferior.
4 Repita del paso 1 al paso 3 para el riel de montaje del otro lado del rack.
5 Asegúrese de que los rieles de montaje estén montados en la misma posición vertical en ambos
lados del rack.
Instalación de los rieles de montaje VersaRails
1 En la parte frontal del armario rack, coloque uno de los rieles de montaje de forma que la superficie
de montaje del soporte quede situada entre las marcas que ha colocado (o las posiciones numeradas)
en los rieles verticales en la sección “Marcado del rack” (vea la figura 1-8).
Los tres orificios de la parte frontal de la superficie de montaje deben alinearse con los orificios
situados entre las marcas realizadas en el riel vertical frontal.
2 Coloque dos tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas en los orificios superior e inferior
de la superficie de montaje del soporte para fijar el riel de montaje al riel vertical frontal.
3 En la parte posterior del armario, tire hacia atrás de la superficie de montaje del soporte hasta que los
orificios de montaje queden alineados con los orificios correspondientes del riel vertical posterior.
4 Coloque dos tornillos Phillips con arandela 10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas en los orificios superior e inferior
de la superficie de montaje del soporte para fijar el riel de montaje al riel vertical posterior.
5 Repita del paso 1 al paso 4 para el riel de montaje del otro lado del rack.
6 Asegúrese de que los rieles de montaje estén montados en la misma posición en los rieles verticales
de ambos lados del rack.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 177
Figura 1-8. Instalación de los rieles de montaje VersaRails
1 Superficie de montaje
del soporte
2 Tornillos Phillips con arandela
10-32 x 0,5 pulgadas
(4 por riel de montaje)
3 Rieles de montaje (2)
Parte frontal del rack
1
2
3178 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Instalación del sistema en el rack
PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale el primero en la posición más baja disponible
en el rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso del sistema, no intente nunca instalarlo en los rieles de montaje
usted solo.
Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes
1 Tire de los dos rieles deslizantes internos hacia fuera del rack hasta que queden totalmente extendidos
(vea la figura 1-9).
2 Levante el sistema hasta colocarlo por encima de los rieles deslizantes extendidos.
Los tres tornillos de pivote de cada lado del sistema encajan en las ranuras J correspondientes de
los ensamblajes deslizantes internos (vea la figura 1-9).
3 Baje la parte posterior del sistema alineando los tornillos de pivote posteriores situados en los lados
del sistema con las ranuras J posteriores de los ensamblajes deslizantes.
4 Coloque los tornillos de pivote posteriores en sus respectivas ranuras J.
5 Baje la parte frontal del sistema y encaje los tornillos de pivote centrales y frontales en sus respectivas
ranuras J de los ensamblajes deslizantes.
El pestillo de liberación del sistema de la parte frontal del riel deslizante interno encajará en su sitio
cuando el tornillo de pivote encaje en la ranura frontal. Utilice este pestillo de liberación del sistema
cuando desee extraer el sistema de los ensamblajes deslizantes.
6 Presione el pestillo de liberación deslizante de la parte exterior de cada riel deslizante interno
y, a continuación, inserte el sistema en el rack.
7 Instale el brazo para tendido de cables. Consulte “Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido
de cables (únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)” en la página 182.
8 Apriete los tornillos mariposa del panel frontal del rack para fijar los ensamblajes deslizantes al rack.Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 179
Figura 1-9. Instalación de un sistema con rieles deslizantes
1 Tornillos de pivote (6) 2 Pestillo de liberación deslizante 3 Ranuras J (6)
4 Pestillo de liberación frontal 5 Rieles deslizantes internos (2)
1
2
4 3
5180 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos
Para instalar el sistema en el rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente:
1 En la parte frontal del sistema, coloque el chasis en una posición en la que los módulos de rieles
del chasis queden alineados con los rieles de montaje del rack.
2 Vuelva a insertar el chasis en los rieles de montaje hasta que el sistema se detenga (vea la figura 1-10).
3 Fije ambos tornillos mariposa en el panel frontal del chasis.
4 Instale el embellecedor frontal opcional (si procede). Para instalarlo, consulte los procedimientos
en la documentación suministrada con el sistema.
Figura 1-10. Instalación de un sistema con rieles estáticos
1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Módulos de rieles del chasis (2) 3 Tornillos mariposa (2)
4 Pestillos de liberación (2)
1
3
4
2Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 181
5 Localice los puntos de fijación de las abrazaderas desmontables ubicados en las dos superficies
de montaje del soporte posterior (vea la figura 1-11).
Estas abrazaderas sirven para fijar los cables del sistema a los rieles de montaje.
Figura 1-11. Instalación de las abrazaderas desmontables
6 Empuje el dispositivo de sujeción de la abrazadera por el punto de fijación.
7 Empuje el fiador de la abrazadera hasta que encaje para fijar la abrazadera al riel de montaje.
8 Mediante la abrazadera desmontable, sujete los cables del sistema al riel de montaje.
1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Abrazaderas desmontables (2)
1
2182 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Colocación de las puertas del rack
Para colocar las puertas, consulte los procedimientos en la documentación suministrada con el rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso de las puertas del armario rack, nunca debe intentar montarlas
ni desmontarlas una sola persona.
Instalación de la bandeja y el brazo para tendido de cables
(únicamente en los kits de rieles deslizantes)
NOTA: este procedimiento no se aplica al kit de rieles estáticos.
Instalación de la bandeja
1 En la parte posterior del sistema, ajuste los extremos de la bandeja entre los extremos de los rieles
de montaje y deslícela hacia adelante hasta que quede encajada en su sitio (vea la figura 1-12).
2 Para preparar la instalación del brazo para tendido de cables, libere el retén del centro del seguro
de retención del brazo para tendido de cables y gire el seguro hacia abajo (vea la figura 1-12).
Figura 1-12. Instalación de la bandeja
1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Bandeja 3 Seguro de retención del brazo
para tendido de cables
1
3
Parte posterior del sistema
2Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 183
Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables
NOTA: el brazo para tendido de cables se puede colocar tanto en el riel de montaje de la derecha como en el
de la izquierda, según cómo desee dirigir los cables desde el sistema.
1 Si es necesario, libere el retén del centro del seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables
en la bandeja y gire el seguro hacia abajo (vea la figura 1-12).
2 En la parte posterior del sistema, encaje el pestillo del extremo frontal del brazo para tendido de cables
en el soporte más interno del ensamblaje deslizante hasta que el pestillo encaje en su sitio
(vea la figura 1-13).
3 Encaje el pestillo del extremo sin fijar del brazo para tendido de cables en el soporte más externo
del ensamblaje deslizante hasta que el pestillo encaje en su sitio (vea la figura 1-13).
Figura 1-13. Instalación del brazo para tendido de cables
1 Rieles de montaje (2) 2 Soportes (2) 3 Pestillos (2)
4 Brazo para tendido de cables
Parte posterior del sistema
1
2
4
3184 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Cableado
1 Abra la tapa del soporte para cables de la parte superior del brazo para tendido de cables para poder
colocar los cables en los brazos (vea la figura 1-14).
Figura 1-14. Cableado en el brazo para tendido de cables
2 Si procede, conecte el cable de indicador de estado del sistema en su conector del panel posterior
del sistema.
Pase el cable de indicador de estado del sistema por el brazo para tendido de cables e inserte el extremo
del LED en la ranura del extremo del brazo para tendido de cables.
3 Enchufe los conectores de cable de E/S y de cable de alimentación en sus conectores respectivos
del panel posterior del sistema.
Para obtener más información sobre las conexiones de los cables, consulte la Guía de introducción
del sistema o el Manual del propietario del hardware.
NOTA: coloque los lazos liberadores de tensión en la parte posterior de las fuentes de alimentación
para liberar la tensión de los cables de alimentación.
1 Brazo para tendido de cables 2 Abrazaderas preinstaladas 3 Seguro de retención del brazo
para tendido de cables
4 Tapa del soporte 5 Conector del cable de
indicador de estado
del sistema
6 Tira de velcro
7 Abrazaderas preinstaladas
4
5
2
3
6
Parte posterior del sistema
1
7Instalación del rack de cuatro postes 185
4 Utilice las abrazaderas incluidas en el kit de rack para agrupar los cables de modo que no interfieran
en los sistemas adyacentes al rack.
5 Pase los cables a través de los soportes del brazo para tendido de cables.
6 Realice los ajustes de holgura necesarios en los cables en las posiciones de las bisagras y fije los cables
agrupados con la tira de velcro vertical (vea la figura 1-14).
7 Utilice las abrazaderas preinstaladas en el extremo interno y el punto de bisagra del brazo para tendido
de cables para fijar los cables agrupados en el canal del brazo (vea la figura 1-14).
8 Cierre la tapa del soporte para cables.
9 Desatornille los tornillos mariposa que fijan la parte frontal del sistema al riel vertical frontal.
10 Deslice el sistema dentro y fuera del rack para comprobar que los cables estén colocados
correctamente y que no queden doblados o estirados ni interfieran con el movimiento del brazo
para tendido de cables. Ajuste los cables en el interior del brazo para tendido de cables según
sea necesario.
NOTA: si extrae el sistema hasta la posición máxima, los ensamblajes deslizantes quedarán bloqueados
en la posición extendida. Para desbloquearlos, presione el seguro de liberación deslizante del lateral del
ensamblaje deslizante y, a continuación, inserte el sistema en el rack.
11 Cuando haya comprobado que los cables están colocados correctamente, inserte el sistema totalmente
en el rack.
12 Levante el seguro de retención del brazo para tendido de cables de la bandeja para fijar el brazo
(vea la figura 1-14).
Extracción del sistema del rack
Extracción de un sistema con rieles deslizantes
Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente:
1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica.
2 Desenchufe los conectores de cable de E/S y de cable de alimentación de sus conectores respectivos
en el panel posterior del sistema.
3 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema
al rack.
4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga con los rieles totalmente extendidos.
5 Tire del pestillo de liberación frontal de cada riel (vea la figura 1-9) y deslice el sistema hacia delante.
6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.186 Instalación del rack de cuatro postes
Extracción de un sistema con rieles estáticos
Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente:
1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica.
2 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema
al rack.
3 Desconecte todos los cables del sistema.
4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga debido a los pestillos de liberación.
5 Presione hacia abajo los pestillos de liberación de ambos lados del sistema (vea la figura 1-10).
6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.Instalación del rack de dos postes 187
Instalación del rack de dos postes
El kit de rack de dos postes se utiliza para instalar un sistema en un rack abierto de dos postes, como los
que se encuentran en las instalaciones de equipos de telecomunicaciones. Admite racks de dos postes
de 7,62 cm o 15,24 cm de anchura, con separación universal o ancha entre orificios. Puede instalar este
kit en una configuración de montaje centrado o a ras.
Debe fijar correctamente el rack de telecomunicaciones en el suelo, el techo o la pared y, cuando
proceda, a los racks adyacentes, mediante los dispositivos de sujeción y las abrazaderas de suelo y pared
especificados o aprobados por el fabricante del rack o las normas industriales al respecto. Antes de
iniciar la instalación, consulte la documentación de racks de dos postes del fabricante para consultar las
advertencias de seguridad.
PRECAUCIÓN: no intente instalar el sistema en un rack abierto de dos postes que no se haya fijado en su
ubicación de forma segura. Si no sigue esta precaución, el sistema puede resultar dañado y usted u otras
personas podrían lesionarse.
Instrucciones de seguridad
Siga estas pautas de seguridad para garantizar su propia seguridad y proteger el sistema y el entorno de
trabajo frente a posibles daños. Para obtener información completa acerca de la seguridad, consulte la
Guía de información del producto.
SEGURIDAD: Montaje de sistemas en rack
Tenga en cuenta las precauciones siguientes para garantizar la estabilidad y la seguridad del rack.
Consulte también la documentación de instalación del rack incluida con el sistema y el rack para ver
las instrucciones y los procedimientos específicos de precaución.
Los sistemas se consideran componentes de un rack. Por lo tanto, “componente” se refiere a
cualquier sistema, así como a los distintos periféricos o al hardware de soporte.
PRECAUCIÓN: después de instalar los sistemas o componentes en un rack, no extraiga más de un componente sobre
sus ensamblajes deslizantes a la vez. El peso de más de un componente extendido puede provocar que el rack se vuelque
y ello puede producir lesiones graves.
NOTA: este sistema tiene el certificado de seguridad de una unidad independiente y como un componente
para uso en un armario rack Dell con el kit de rack para clientes. La instalación del sistema y del kit de rack en
otros armarios rack no ha sido aprobada por ninguna agencia de seguridad. Es su responsabilidad
asegurarse de que la combinación final de sistema y rack cumpla los estándares de seguridad
correspondientes y los requisitos de códigos de electricidad locales. Dell declina todas las responsabilidades
y garantías con relación a tales combinaciones. 188 Instalación del rack de dos postes
• Los kits de rack del sistema están diseñados para ser instalados en un rack por técnicos de servicio
cualificados. Si instala el kit en cualquier otro rack, cerciórese de que éste cumpla las especificaciones
de un rack Dell.
PRECAUCIÓN: no mueva los racks sin la ayuda de otra persona. Debido a la altura y el peso del rack, se
recomienda un mínimo de dos personas para realizar dicha tarea.
• Cargue siempre el rack desde la parte inferior hacia arriba, colocando en primer lugar el elemento más
pesado.
• El rack debe estar nivelado y estable antes de extender un componente.
• Tenga cuidado al presionar los pestillos de liberación de los rieles de componentes y al extraer o
introducir un componente del rack, puesto que sus dedos pueden quedar aprisionados en los rieles
deslizantes.
• No sobrecargue el circuito de alimentación de CA que suministra alimentación al rack. La carga total
del rack no debe ser superior al 80 % de la corriente nominal del circuito.
• Los componentes del rack deben disponer de una ventilación suficiente.
• No suba sobre ningún componente ni lo utilice como escalón para realizar operaciones en los
componentes de un rack.
Antes de comenzar
Antes de montar el sistema en el rack, lea detenidamente la sección “Instrucciones de seguridad” de esta
guía, así como las instrucciones de seguridad que se incluyen en la Guía de información del producto para
obtener información adicional.
PRECAUCIÓN: cuando instale varios sistemas en un rack, realice todos los procedimientos para un sistema
antes de instalar el siguiente sistema.
NOTA: para obtener instrucciones sobre la instalación del sistema, consulte “Instalación del sistema en el rack”
en la página 198.
Información importante sobre seguridad
Tenga en cuenta las precauciones de seguridad descritas en los apartados siguientes al instalar el sistema
en el rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debe seguir estrictamente los procedimientos que se explican en este documento para
protegerse a sí mismo y a otras personas que puedan verse involucradas. El sistema puede tener una
envergadura y un peso considerables, por lo que son importantes una preparación y una planificación adecuadas
para evitar lesiones personales. Esta precaución es aún más importante cuando se montan sistemas en la parte
alta del rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: no instale componentes de kit de rack que estén diseñados para otro sistema. Utilice
únicamente el kit de rack correspondiente a su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema,
pueden producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones personales.Instalación del rack de dos postes 189
Herramientas y material recomendados
• Destornillador Phillips del nº 2
• Llave o destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas (si se cambia del montaje en soporte
al montaje a ras)
• Cinta adhesiva o rotulador de punta de fieltro para marcar los orificios de montaje
Contenido del kit de rack
El kit de rack de dos postes incluye (vea la figura 2-1):
• Un par de rieles de montaje
• 8 tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas
• 2 abrazaderas desmontables (no se muestran en la figura 2-1)
Figura 2-1. Componentes del kit de rack de dos postes
1 8 tornillos Phillips de cabeza
cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas
2 Espárragos de montaje
centrado de 15,24 cm
3 Espárragos de montaje
centrado de 7,62 cm
4 Superficie de montaje
ajustable
5 Superficie de montaje
centrado
6 Espárragos de montaje
a ras de 15,24 cm
7 Espárragos de montaje
a ras de 7,62 cm
8 Superficie de montaje a ras 9 Rieles de montaje (2)
9
1
7
8
6
5
3
2
4190 Instalación del rack de dos postes
Tareas de instalación
Para instalar un kit de rack de dos postes se deben realizar las tareas siguientes en el orden indicado:
1 Marcado del rack
• Rack con separación universal entre orificios
• Rack con separación ancha entre orificios
2 Instalación de los rieles de montaje en el rack
• Montaje centrado
• Montaje a ras
3 Instalación del sistema en el rack
4 Cableado
Marcado del rack
Debe dejar 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical para cada sistema que monte en el rack de dos postes.
Racks con separación universal entre orificios
Los racks con separación universal entre orificios tienen un patrón alterno de tres orificios por unidad de
rack con una separación entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio
1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm para las columnas de orificios verticales frontal y posterior
(vea la figura 2-2).
Figura 2-2. Separación universal entre los orificios en un rack abierto de dos postes
12,7 mm
15,9 mm
15,9 mm
1 U (44 mm)Instalación del rack de dos postes 191
Racks con separación ancha entre orificios
Los racks con separación ancha entre orificios tienen un patrón alterno de dos orificios por unidad de rack
con una separación entre orificios de centro a centro (empezando por el orificio superior de un espacio 1 U)
de 31,7 mm y 12,7 mm para las columnas de orificios verticales frontal y posterior (vea la figura 2-3).
Figura 2-3. Separación ancha entre los orificios en un rack abierto de dos postes
Para marcar el rack, realice los pasos siguientes:
1 Marque los rieles verticales frontales en los que desee colocar la parte inferior del sistema que está
instalando en el rack de dos postes.
La parte inferior de cada espacio 1 U se encuentra en el centro de la zona metálica más estrecha entre
los orificios.
NOTA: si el rack tiene una separación ancha entre orificios, vaya al paso 3.
2 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado o cuente tres orificios
en un rack con separación universal entre orificios (vea la figura 2-2).
Cada 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical en un rack con separación universal entre orificios tiene tres
orificios con una separación de centro a centro entre orificios (empezando por la parte superior de
un espacio 1 U) de 15,9 mm, 15,9 mm y 12,7 mm (vea la figura 2-2).
NOTA: si el rack tiene una separación universal entre orificios, el procedimiento de marcado del rack habrá
finalizado.
3 Coloque una marca a 44 mm por encima de la marca original que ha realizado o cuente hasta el
siguiente orificio del rack si éste tiene una separación ancha entre orificios (vea la figura 2-3).
Cada 1 U (44 mm) de espacio vertical en un rack con separación ancha entre orificios tiene dos
orificios con una separación de centro a centro entre orificios (empezando por la parte superior de
un espacio 1 U) de 31,7 mm (vea la figura 2-3).
1 U (44 mm)
12,7 mm
31,7 mm192 Instalación del rack de dos postes
Instalación de los rieles de montaje
Puede instalar los rieles de montaje en un rack abierto de dos postes que tenga separación universal entre
orificios (vea la figura 2-2) o separación ancha entre orificios (vea la figura 2-3). Puede instalar los rieles
de montaje en una configuración de montaje centrado o a ras.
PRECAUCIÓN: no monte otro sistema utilizando este kit de rack. Utilice únicamente el kit de rack diseñado
para su sistema. Si utiliza un kit de rack para otro sistema, pueden producirse daños en el sistema y lesiones
personales.
Montaje centrado
El kit de rack de dos postes se entrega con los soportes configurados para un montaje centrado de 7,62 cm de
ancho. La figura 2-1 muestra los componentes del riel de montaje. Para completar la instalación, realice los
pasos siguientes:
1 Localice el riel de montaje derecho y empuje el soporte de montaje ajustable hacia la parte posterior
del riel de montaje (vea la figura 2-4).
2 Coloque el riel de montaje derecho en el rack de dos postes en la posición que haya marcado, empuje el
soporte de montaje ajustable de montaje centrado hacia el rack de dos postes vertical y, por último, fije
la superficie de montaje y el soporte de montaje ajustable al rack mediante cuatro tornillos Phillips de
cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-4).
3 Repita el paso 1 y el paso 2 para instalar el riel de montaje izquierdo en el rack.Instalación del rack de dos postes 193
Figura 2-4. Instalación de los rieles de montaje para una configuración de montaje centrado
1 Rack abierto de dos postes 2 Tornillos Phillips de cabeza
cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas
(4 por riel)
3 Superficie de montaje
centrado
2 Rieles de montaje (2) 4 Rieles del sistema (2) 6 Pestillo de liberación
2
1
4
6
3
5194 Instalación del rack de dos postes
Montaje a ras
El kit de rack de dos postes se entrega con los soportes configurados para un montaje centrado de 7,62 cm
de ancho. La figura 2-1 muestra los componentes del riel de montaje. Para preparar los rieles de montaje
para la instalación a ras en el rack de dos postes, siga estos pasos:
1 Localice los dos rieles de montaje y colóquelos uno al lado del otro en una superficie lisa,
con los extremos frontales de los rieles de montaje orientados hacia usted (vea la figura 2-5).
2 Mediante una llave o un destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas, extraiga las
dos tuercas del soporte de montaje ajustable (vea la figura 2-5).
3 Extraiga el soporte y colóquelo en los espárragos de montaje a ras de 7,62 cm o 15,24 cm
(vea la figura 2-5).
4 Apriete las dos tuercas que ha extraído en el paso 2 para fijar el soporte de montaje ajustable
(vea la figura 2-5).
5 Repita del paso 2 al paso 4 para montar el otro riel de montaje.Instalación del rack de dos postes 195
Figura 2-5. Configuración del soporte de montaje ajustable para el montaje a ras
6 Coloque el riel de montaje izquierdo en la ubicación que ha marcado, coloque firmemente la
superficie de montaje a ras contra la parte frontal del rack de dos postes vertical y fíjela al riel
de dos postes con dos tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-6).
7 Deslice el soporte de montaje ajustable de modo que quede colocado contra la parte posterior del rack
de dos postes vertical y fíjelo al riel de dos postes mediante dos tornillos Phillips de cabeza cónica
12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas (vea la figura 2-6).
8 Repita el paso 6 y el paso 7 para instalar el riel de montaje derecho en el rack.
9 Mediante una llave o un destornillador para tuercas hexagonales de 3/8 pulgadas, apriete las tuercas
de los soportes de montaje ajustables de los dos rieles de montaje.
1 Tuercas (2 por soporte) 2 Soporte de montaje ajustable 3 Espárragos de montaje
a ras de 7,62 cm
4 Superficie de montaje a ras
1
4
3
2196 Instalación del rack de dos postes
Figura 2-6. Instalación de los rieles de montaje para una configuración de montaje a ras
1 Rack abierto de dos postes 2 Tornillos Phillips de cabeza
cónica 12-24 x 0,5 pulgadas
(4 por riel)
3 Rieles de montaje (2)
2
1
3Instalación del rack de dos postes 197
Instalación de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis
NOTA: no es necesario extraer el embellecedor frontal opcional para instalar o extraer los módulos de rieles
estáticos del chasis.
1 Para instalar un módulo de rieles, localice las tres ranuras en forma de cerradura del módulo de rieles
y los tornillos de pivote correspondientes en el lateral del sistema (vea la figura 2-7).
2 Coloque el módulo de rieles al lado del sistema de modo que los tornillos de pivote se ajusten a la parte
redonda de las ranuras y, a continuación, inserte el módulo hacia la parte posterior del sistema.
3 Repita los pasos 1 y 2 para instalar el otro módulo de rieles.
Para extraer un módulo de rieles del chasis, tire del pestillo de liberación, deslice el riel hacia adelante
y extraiga el módulo de rieles del chasis.
Figura 2-7. Instalación y extracción de los módulos de rieles estáticos del chasis
1 Ranuras en forma de
cerradura (6)
2 Tornillos de pivote (6) 3 Pestillo de liberación
4 Módulos de rieles (2) 5 Sistema
4
2
3
1
5198 Instalación del rack de dos postes
Instalación del sistema en el rack
PRECAUCIÓN: si va a instalar más de un sistema, instale el primero en la posición más baja disponible en
el rack.
1 Coloque una mano en la parte inferior frontal del sistema y la otra en la parte inferior posterior.
2 Levante el sistema hasta colocarlo en una posición en la que los rieles laterales de la parte posterior
del sistema queden alineados con los rieles de montaje del rack.
PRECAUCIÓN: debido al tamaño y el peso del sistema, no intente nunca instalarlo en los rieles de montaje
usted solo.
3 Inserte el sistema en los rieles de montaje hasta que se detenga.
4 Inserte y apriete los tornillos mariposa de ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis para fijar el sistema
en el rack.
Extracción del sistema del rack
Para extraer el sistema del rack, realice el procedimiento siguiente:
1 Apague el sistema y los periféricos conectados, y desconecte el sistema de la toma eléctrica.
2 Afloje los tornillos mariposa situados en ambos lados del panel frontal del chasis que fijan el sistema
al rack.
3 Desconecte todos los cables del sistema.
4 Tire del sistema para extraerlo del rack hasta que se detenga debido a los pestillos de liberación.
5 Presione hacia abajo los pestillos de liberación de ambos lados del sistema (vea la figura 1-10).
6 Tire del sistema hasta extraerlo completamente del rack.Índice 199
Índice
B
bandeja para cables,
instalar, 182
brazo para tendido
de cables
cablear, 185
instalar, 182
C
cablear, 184
cables, 185
colocar las puertas
del rack, 182
configuración de montaje
a ras, 194
centrado, 192
contenido del kit
rack de dos postes, 189
VersaRails, 168-169, 181
contenido enumerado
kit de rack de dos postes, 189
kit VersaRails, 168-169
E
extraer sistema
rack de cuatro postes,
185, 198
H
herramientas y material
kit de rack de cuatro
postes, 167
kit de rack de dos postes, 189
I
instalar
bandeja para cables, 182
brazo para tendido de
cables, 182
kit de rack de cuatro
postes, 175
kit de rack de dos postes, 187
módulos de rieles
estáticos, 174, 197
rieles de montaje en rack
de dos postes, 192, 194
rieles de montaje
RapidRails, 175
rieles de montaje
VersaRails, 174, 177,
179, 197
sistema en rack de
cuatro postes, 178, 198
instrucciones de
seguridad, 165, 187
K
kit de rack de cuatro postes
contenido del kit
VersaRails, 168-169
herramientas y material, 167
kit de rack de dos postes
contenido del kit, 189
herramientas y material, 189
instalar rieles de montaje, 192
marcar rack, 190
M
marcar rack
kit de rack de cuatro
postes, 170
kit de rack de
dos postes, 190-191
P
pies estabilizadores, 167
precauciones para el montaje
del rack, 166, 188
puertas
colocar, 182
extraer, 170200 Índice
200 Índice
R
rack de cuatro postes
extraer sistema, 185, 198
rack, pies estabilizadores, 167
requisitos del rack para
VersaRails, 167
rieles verticales
marcar, 170
una unidad de rack, 171
T
tendido de cables, 184
U
unidad de rack, 171
V
VersaRails
contenido
del kit, 168-169, 181
instalar, 174, 177, 179, 197
LVDIMM 1600 MHz sur les
plateformes AMD — Mise à jour des
informations
Ce document fournit des informations sur le comportement des LVDIMM
1600 MHz sur les systèmes Dell PowerEdge suivants :
• R415
• R515
• R815
• R715
• M915
Les options de tension de fonctionnement qui figurent dans le BIOS sont Auto,
1,5 V et 1,35 V.
Le tableau suivant répertorie la fréquence et la tension de fonctionnement de la
mémoire auxquelles le LVDIMM 1600 MHz fonctionne.
Pour assurer le maintien de la fréquence de 1600 MHz du LVDIMM 1600 MHz,
définissez sur 1,5 V la Memory Operating Voltage (Tension de fonctionnement
de la mémoire) dans le BIOS.
Option BIOS Fréquence Tension de fonctionnement de la
mémoire
(Option par défaut :
Auto)
1 333 MHz 1,35 V
1,35 V 1 333 MHz 1,35 V
1,5 V 1600 MHz 1,5 V
2012 - 12 Rév. A00Pour ce faire :
1 Allumez ou redémarrez le système.
2 Appuyez sur pour accéder à la configuration du BIOS système.
REMARQUE : le système ne répond pas tant que le clavier USB n'est pas actif.
Si le système d'exploitation commence à se charger alors que vous n'avez pas
encore appuyé sur , attendez qu'il finisse de démarrer, puis redémarrez-le
et réessayez.
3 Dans l'écran Memory Settings (Paramètres de mémoire), définissez la valeur
de tension de fonctionnement sur 1,5 V à l'aide des touches de navigation de
configuration du système.
4 Enregistrez et quittez la configuration du BIOS.
___________________
© 2012 Dell Inc.
Marques utilisées dans ce document : Dell™ et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. AMD® est
une marque déposée d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
AMD™ Processor Update
HT Assist
AMD Opteron™ 24XX and 84XX processors enabled with HT Assist feature
allow faster HyperTransport™ (HT) transfers. However, when enabled,
HT Assist reduces the L3 cache size from 6 MB to 5 MB.
System reboot after enabling HT Assist reports the reduced L3 cache size
and continues to do so until disabled. The HT Assist feature can be enabled
or disabled using your system's BIOS settings.
For information on accessing BIOS settings, see your system's Hardware Owner's
Manual on the Dell Support website at www.support.dell.com/manuals.
HyperTransport Technology
Depending on your system capability, you can set your system’s HyperTransport
mode to HT3.
Your system and/or processors may or may not be HT3 capable, depending on
when it was shipped. HT3 technology was added to selected Dell systems in early
2009 and HT3 processors became available in May 2009.
During system startup, the system BIOS checks the system board revision
number and the HT capability of all installed processors. If the system is capable
of running at HT3 frequency, the HyperTransport Technology field in the BIOS
settings is set to HT3 by default. You can then set the field to either HT1 or
HT3, depending on which setting gives you the best performance for your
particular application.
If your system is not HT3 capable, this field is set to HT1 and read only.
July 2009____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2009 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Opteron,
and HyperTransport are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade
names other than its own.AMD™处理器更新
HT Assist
启用 AMD Opteron™ 24XX 和 84XX 处理器的 HT Assist 功能使
HyperTransport™ (HT) 的转换更快。但是启用后， HT Assist 会使高
速缓存 L3 的大小从 6 MB 降到 5 MB。
HT Assist 启用后，系统将重新引导，随后将报告 L3 高速缓存大小降低，
并继续此类报告直到 HT Assist 被禁用。使用系统的 BIOS 设置时，
HT Assist 功能可启用或禁用。
有关访问 BIOS 设置的信息，请参阅 Dell Support 网站
www.support.dell.com/manuals 上的 Hardware Owner's Manual
（硬件用户手册）。
HyperTransport 技术
根据您系统的功能，您可以将系统的 HyperTransport 模式设置为 HT3。
您的系统和 / 或处理器可能支持，也可能不支持 HT3，这与它们的出厂时间
有关。HT3 技术于 2009 年初应用于某些选定的 Dell 系统，而 HT3 处理器于
2009 年 5 月才得以正式应用。
系统启动时，系统 BIOS 会检查系统板版本号和所有已安装处理器的 HT
功能。如果系统支持在 HT3 频率下运行，则 BIOS 设置中的 HyperTransport
技术字段会默认设置为 HT3。您随后可以自行将该字段设置为 HT1 或
HT3，具体取决于哪种设置可使您的特定应用程序发挥最佳性能。
如果您的系统不支持 HT3，则该字段将设置为 HT1，且为只读。
2009 年 7 月____________________
本说明文件中的信息如有更改，恕不另行通知。
© 2009 Dell Inc. 版权所有，翻印必究。
未经 Dell Inc. 书面许可，严禁以任何形式复制这些材料。
此文中使用的商标：Dell 和 DELL 徽标是 Dell Inc.的商标； AMD、
AMD Opteron 和 HyperTransport是 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. 的商标。
本说明文件中述及的其它商标和产品名称是指拥有相应商标和产品名称的公司或其制造的产品。
Dell Inc. 对本公司的商标和产品名称之外的其它商标和产品名称不拥有任何专有权。Mise à jour concernant le processeur
AMD™
HT Assist
La fonction HT Assist permet aux processeurs AMD Opteron™ 24XX et 84XX qui
en sont dotés d'accélérer les transferts HyperTransport™ (HT). Cependant, lorsque
cette fonction est activée, la taille du cache L3 est réduite de 6 Mo à 5 Mo.
Après l'activation de la fonction HT Assist, cette réduction est signalée par le
système lors de son redémarrage et de tous les redémarrages suivants tant que
la fonction n'est pas désactivée. La fonction HT Assist peut être activée ou
désactivée par l'intermédiaire des paramètres du BIOS du système.
Pour savoir comment accéder à ces paramètres, voir le Manuel du propriétaire
du système disponible sur le site web du support de Dell,
www.support.dell.com/manuals.
Technologie HyperTransport
Selon votre système, vous pourrez peut-être définir le mode HyperTransport
sur HT3.
Selon la date à laquelle il a été livré, votre système (et/ou les processeurs) peut
ne pas prendre en charge ce mode. La technologie HT3 a été intégrée à certains
systèmes Dell début 2009. Les processeurs HT3 sont disponibles depuis mai 2009.
Au cours du démarrage, le BIOS du système détecte le numéro de révision de
la carte système et vérifie si les processeurs installés prennent en charge la
technologie HT. Si le système prend en charge la fréquence HT3, le champ
HyperTransport Technology du BIOS est défini sur HT3 par défaut. Vous pouvez
par la suite définir ce champ sur HT1 ou HT3 afin d'utiliser le mode offrant les
performances les mieux adaptées à l'usage auquel votre système est destiné.
Si le système ne prend pas en charge la fréquence HT3, ce champ est défini sur HT1
et est en lecture seule.
Juillet 2009____________________
Les informations contenues dans ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis.
© 2009 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés.
La reproduction de ce document de quelque manière que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc.
est strictement interdite.
Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell et le logo DELL sont des marques de Dell Inc. ;
AMD, AMD Opteron et HyperTransport sont des marques d'Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
D'autres marques commerciales et noms de marque peuvent être mentionnés dans ce document pour faire
référence aux entités se réclamant de ces marques et de ces noms ou de leurs produits. Dell Inc. dénie tout
intérêt propriétaire vis-à-vis des marques commerciales et des noms de marque autres que les siens.AMD™ Prozessor-Aktualisierung
HT Assist
AMD Opteron™ 24XX und 84XX Prozessoren erlauben bei aktiviertem HT Assist
einen schnelleren HyperTransport™ (HT)-Transfer. Wenn HT Assist aktiviert ist,
reduziert sich die Größe des L3-Cachespeichers allerdings von 6 MB auf 5 MB.
Beim Systemneustart nach Aktivierung von HT Assist wird die verminderte
Größe des L3-Caches gemeldet. Dies ändert sich erst wieder, nachdem
HT Assist deaktiviert wurde. Das Merkmal HT Assist wird über die BIOSEinstellungen Ihres Systems aktiviert oder deaktiviert.
Eine Anleitung für den Zugriff auf die BIOS-Einstellungen finden Sie
im Hardware-Benutzerhandbuch auf der Dell Support-Website unter
www.support.dell.com/manuals.
HyperTransport-Technologie
Wenn Ihr System entsprechend ausgerüstet ist, können Sie den HyperTransportModus HT3 einstellen.
Ob Ihr System und/oder Ihre Prozessoren HT3-fähig sind hängt davon ab, wann
das System geliefert wurde. Die HT3-Technologie wurde seit Anfang 2009 in
ausgewählte Dell Systeme integriert. HT3-fähige Prozessoren sind seit Mai 2009
verfügbar.
Beim Hochfahren überprüft das System-BIOS die Versionsnummer der Systemplatine und die HT-Fähigkeit aller installierten Prozessoren. Wenn das System
mit HT3-Taktfrequenz betrieben werden kann, wird das Feld HyperTransport
Technology in den BIOS-Einstellungen auf HT3 voreingestellt. Anschließend
können Sie das Feld auf HT1 oder HT3 setzen, je nachdem, mit welcher
Einstellung Sie die beste Leistung für Ihre jeweilige Anwendung erzielen.
Wenn Ihr System nicht HT3-fähig ist, wird dieses Feld auf HT1 gesetzt
und der Schreibschutz aktiviert.
Juli 2009____________________
Irrtümer und technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
© 2009 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
Die Vervielfältigung oder Wiedergabe dieser Materialien in jeglicher Weise ohne vorherige schriftliche
Genehmigung von Dell Inc. sind strengstens untersagt.
Marken in diesem Text: Dell und das DELL Logo sind Marken von Dell Inc.; AMD, AMD Opteron
und HyperTransport sind Marken von Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
Alle anderen in dieser Dokumentation genannten Marken und Handelsbezeichnungen sind Eigentum
der entsprechenden Hersteller und Firmen. Dell Inc. erhebt keinen Anspruch auf Markenzeichen und
Handelsbezeichnungen mit Ausnahme der eigenen.AMD™ プロセッサのアップデート
HT Assist
HT Assist 機能を備えた AMD Opteron™ 24XX および 84XX プロセッサに
より、HyperTransport™（HT）転送の高速化が実現しています。ただし、
HT Assist が有効の場合、L3 キャッシュのサイズは 6 MB から 5 MB に縮小し
ます。
HT Assist を有効にした後のシステム再起動で、縮小された L3 キャッシュの
サイズが報告され、この状況は HT Assist を無効にするまで変わりません。
HT Assist 機能は、システムの BIOS 設定で有効 / 無効を切り替えることがで
きます。
BIOS 設定を表示 / 変更する方法については、デルサポートサイト
www.support.dell.com/manuals でお使いのシステムの『ハードウェア
オーナーズマニュアル』を参照してください。
HyperTransport テクノロジ
システムの能力によっては、HyperTransport モードを HT3 に設定すること
も可能です。
出荷の時期によっては、システムおよび / またはプロセッサが HT3 に対応し
ていない場合があります。HT3 テクノロジが特定の Dell システムに追加され
たのは 2009 年初期で、HT3 プロセッサが出回るようになったのは 2009 年 5
月です。
システム起動時に、システム BIOS はシステム基板リビジョン番号および取
り付けられているすべてのプロセッサの HT 機能をチェックします。HT3 の
周波数に対応しているシステムの場合、BIOS 設定の HyperTransport
Technology フィールドがデフォルトで HT3 に設定されています。その場合
は、用途に応じて HT1 または HT3 のいずれかパフォーマンスの良い方を選
択できます。
システムが HT3 に対応していない場合、このフィールドは HT1 に設定され
ており、読み取り専用です。
2009 年 7 月____________________
本書の内容は予告なく変更されることがあります。
© 2009 すべての著作権は Dell Inc. にあります。
Dell Inc. の書面による許可のない複製は、いかなる形態においても厳重に禁じられています。
本書に使用されている商標：Dell および DELL ロゴは Dell Inc. の商標です。AMD、
AMD Opteron および HyperTransport は Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. の商標です。
商標または製品の権利を主張する事業体を表すためにその他の商標および社名が使用されて
いることがあります。Dell Inc. はデル以外の商標や社名に対する所有権を一切否認します。AMD™프로세서업데이트
HT Assist
HT Assist 기능이 활성화된 AMD Opteron™ 24XX 및 84XX 프로세서는 보다
빠른 HyperTransport™ (HT) 전송을 가능하게 합니다 . 하지만 활성화될 경우
HT Assist 기능에 의해 L3 캐쉬 크기가 6MB 에서 5MB로 감소됩니다 .
HT Assist 를활성화한후시스템을재부팅하면감소된 L3 캐시크기로보고되
며 비활성화될 때까지 유지됩니다 . HT Assist 기능은 시스템 BIOS 설정을 사
용하여 활성화 또는 비활성화할 수 있습니다 .
BIOS 설정 액세스에 관한 정보는 Dell 지원 웹사이트인
www.support.dell.com/manuals 의 하드웨어 소유자 매뉴얼을 참조하십시오 .
HyperTransport 기술
시스템처리능력에따라 HyperTransport 모드를 HT3로설정할수있습니다.
시스템및 / 또는프로세서는제품출시시기에따라 HT3 를지원할수도있고
지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다 . HT3 기술은 2009년 초반에 일부 Dell 시스템
에만 추가되었으며 2009 년 5 월부터 HT3 프로세서가 공급되었습니다 .
시스템 시작 시 시스템 BIOS 에서 시스템 보드 개정 번호와 설치된 모든 프로
세서의 HT 기능을 확인합니다 . 시스템이 HT 주파수에서 실행 가능한 경우
BIOS 설정의 HyperTransport Technology필드가 HT3 로 기본 설정됩니다 .
특정응용프로그램의 성능을최적화하는설정이 무엇인가에따라 이필드를
H1 또는 H3로 설정할 수 있습니다 .
시스템에서 HT3를지원하지않는경우이필드는 HT1으로만설정되며읽기
전용이 됩니다 .
2009년 7월____________________
본문서에수록된정보는사전통보없이변경될수있습니다.
© 2009 Dell Inc. 저작권본사소유.
Dell Inc.의서면승인 없이 어떠한 경우에도 무단복제하는 것을엄격히 금합니다.
본설명서에 사용된상표인Dell및 DELL로고는Dell Inc.의상표이며, AMD,
AMD Opteron및HyperTransport는 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.의상표입니다 .
본문서에서특정회사의표시나제품이름을지칭하기위해기타상표나상호를사용할수도있습니
다. Dell Inc. 는자사가 소유하고있는것이외에 기타 모든상표및 상호에대한어떠한소유권도없
습니다.Actualización del procesador AMD™
HT Assist
Los procesadores AMD Opteron™ 24XX y 84XX compatibles con la función HT
Assist permiten transferencias HyperTransport™ (HT) más rápidas. Sin embargo,
cuando se habilita HT Assist, el tamaño de la caché L3 se reduce de 6 MB
a 5 MB.
Esta reducción del tamaño de la caché L3 se notifica a cada reinicio del sistema
mientras HT Assist está habilitado. La función HT Assist se habilita y se
deshabilita en la configuración del BIOS del sistema.
Para obtener información sobre cómo acceder a la configuración del BIOS,
consulte el Manual del propietario del hardware correspondiente a su sistema
en la página web de asistencia de Dell en www.support.dell.com/manuals.
Tecnología HyperTransport
Según la capacidad del sistema, es posible establecer el modo de HyperTransport
en HT3.
Su sistema o sus procesadores serán o no compatibles con HT3 en función del
momento de la adquisición. La tecnología HT3 se incorporó en algunos sistemas
Dell a principios de 2009, y los procesadores HT3 se comercializaron en mayo
de 2009.
Durante el inicio del sistema, el BIOS comprueba el número de revisión de la
placa base y la compatibilidad con HT de todos los procesadores instalados. Si su
sistema es capaz de funcionar con la frecuencia HT3, el campo HyperTransport
Technology (Tecnología HyperTransport) de la configuración del BIOS toma el
valor HT3 de forma predeterminada. A continuación, puede establecer el campo
en el valor HT1 o HT3, según cuál de ellos le proporcione el mejor rendimiento
para su aplicación en particular.
Si su sistema no es compatible con HT3, este campo toma el valor HT1 y es
de sólo lectura.
Julio de 2009____________________
La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin previo aviso.
© 2009 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibida la reproducción de este material en cualquier forma sin la autorización
por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell y el logotipo de DELL son marcas registradas de Dell Inc.;
AMD, AMD Opteron y HyperTransport son marcas comerciales de Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
Otras marcas y otros nombres comerciales pueden utilizarse en este documento para hacer referencia a
las entidades que los poseen o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad
de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
53-1002576-02 ®
December 2012
Brocade M6505 16 Gbps
Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module
Hardware Reference ManualCopyright © 2012 Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Brocade, Brocade Assurance, the B-wing symbol, BigIron, DCX, Fabric OS, FastIron, MLX, NetIron, SAN Health, ServerIron,
TurboIron, VCS, and VDX are registered trademarks, and AnyIO, Brocade One, CloudPlex, Effortless Networking, ICX, NET Health,
OpenScript, and The Effortless Network are trademarks of Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in
other countries. Other brands, products, or service names mentioned may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Notice: This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning
any equipment, equipment feature, or service offered or to be offered by Brocade. Brocade reserves the right to make changes to
this document at any time, without notice, and assumes no responsibility for its use. This informational document describes
features that may not be currently available. Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability.
Export of technical data contained in this document may require an export license from the United States government.
The authors and Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. shall have no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with
respect to any loss, cost, liability, or damages arising from the information contained in this book or the computer programs that
accompany it.
The product described by this document may contain “open source” software covered by the GNU General Public License or other
open source license agreements. To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products, view the licensing
terms applicable to the open source software, and obtain a copy of the programming source code, please visit
http://www.brocade.com/support/oscd.
Brocade Communications Systems, Incorporated
Corporate and Latin American Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems, Inc.
130 Holger Way
San Jose, CA 95134
Tel: 1-408-333-8000
Fax: 1-408-333-8101
E-mail: info@brocade.com
Asia-Pacific Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems China HK, Ltd.
No. 1 Guanghua Road
Chao Yang District
Units 2718 and 2818
Beijing 100020, China
Tel: +8610 6588 8888
Fax: +8610 6588 9999
E-mail: china-info@brocade.com
European Headquarters
Brocade Communications Switzerland Sàrl
Centre Swissair
Tour B - 4ème étage
29, Route de l'Aéroport
Case Postale 105
CH-1215 Genève 15
Switzerland
Tel: +41 22 799 5640
Fax: +41 22 799 5641
E-mail: emea-info@brocade.com
Asia-Pacific Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems Co., Ltd. (Shenzhen WFOE)
Citic Plaza
No. 233 Tian He Road North
Unit 1308 – 13th Floor
Guangzhou, China
Tel: +8620 3891 2000
Fax: +8620 3891 2111
E-mail: china-info@brocade.com
Document History
Title Publication number Summary of changes Date
Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel
SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference
Manual
53-1002576-01 New document December 2012
Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel
SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference
Manual
53-1002576-02 Update Data Transmission
Ranges table
December 2012Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual iii
53-1002576-02
Contents
About This Document
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Document conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Text formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Command syntax conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Notes, cautions, and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Key terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Notice to the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Brocade resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Other industry resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Product support documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Getting technical help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Chapter 1 Brocade M6505 Product Overview
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SAN I/O Module overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating system support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hardware features and functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ports on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ISL trunking groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Access Gateway and Native Fabric modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Access Gateway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Native Fabric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Optional Brocade licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAN I/O Module front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAN I/O Module side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10iv Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
Chapter 2 Installing the SAN I/O Module
Unpacking the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Items included with the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
System reliability guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Handling static-sensitive devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Preparing the Blade Server Enclosure for the SAN I/O Module. . . .12
Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure . . . . .13
Handling SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting an SFP+ transceiver in the SAN I/O Module port . . . . . . .15
Cabling guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Data transmission ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 3 Configuring the SAN I/O Module
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Items required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Using the CMC GUI to set the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Using the CMC CLI to set the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using the SAN I/O Module CLI to set the IP address. . . . . . . . .22
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the Ethernet network . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting to the SAN I/O Module using Web Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Chapter 4 Operating the SAN I/O Module
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Activating Ports on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Activating ports with a POD license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode. . . . . 31
Disabling Access Gateway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Changing from Native Fabric mode to Access Gateway mode. . . . .33
Access Gateway mode default port mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Accessing the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Interpreting POST results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Power-on self-test LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Normal-operation LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables . . . . . . . . .39Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual v
53-1002576-02
Switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Viewing the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Upgrading or downgrading firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing the default account password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing the default account password at login . . . . . . . . . . .42
Backing up the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Locating the serial number information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Appendix A SAN I/O Module Specifications
In this appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Processor and memory specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Weight and physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Architectural specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Supported HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fibre Channel standards compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Regulatory compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FCC warning (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
BSMI statement (Taiwan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
KC statement (Republic of Korea) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
VCCI statement (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
CE statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Canadian requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Laser compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
RTC battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Regulatory compliance standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Environmental regulation compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) Disclaimer . . . . .50
China RoHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Indexvi Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual vii
53-1002576-02
About This Document
In this chapter
•How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
•Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
•Notice to the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
•Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
•Getting technical help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
•Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
How this document is organized
This document is organized to help you find information that you want as quickly and easily as
possible. The document contains the following components:
• Chapter 1, “Brocade M6505 Product Overview,”describes the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre
Channel SAN I/O Module and explains its basic concepts and features. This chapter also
provides instructions for unpacking the SAN I/O Module from its shipping container, references
to the appropriate publication for installing the SAN I/O Module into the Dell M1000e Blade
Server Enclosure, and Fibre Channel port cabling guidelines.
• Chapter 2, “Installing the SAN I/O Module,” describes the procedures needed to unpack and
install the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module for the Dell M1000e Blade
Server Enclosure.
• Chapter 3, “Configuring the SAN I/O Module,” describes how to change the IP address of the
Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module, connect the module to the Ethernet
network and fabric, and connect to the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O
Module using Web Tools.
• Chapter 4, “Operating the SAN I/O Module,” is a reference for understanding the power-on
diagnostics and LEDs supporting the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module.
Also provided are details for operating and replacing the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre
Channel SAN I/O Module, removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables, changing
between Access Gateway mode and Native Fabric mode, activating Ports on Demand (POD),
backing up the system, maintaining firmware, changing passwords, locating serial number
information, and viewing configurations.
• Appendix A, “SAN I/O Module Specifications,” provides product specifications and regulatory
compliance information.viii Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
Document conventions
This section describes text formatting conventions and important notice formats used in this
document.
Text formatting
The narrative-text formatting conventions that are used are as follows:
bold text Identifies command names
Identifies the names of user-manipulated GUI elements
Identifies keywords and operands
Identifies text to enter at the GUI or CLI
italic text Provides emphasis
Identifies variables
Identifies paths and Internet addresses
Identifies document titles
code text Identifies CLI output
Identifies command syntax examples
For readability, command names in the narrative portions of this guide are presented in mixed
lettercase: for example, switchShow. In actual examples, command lettercase is all lowercase.
Command syntax conventions
Command syntax in this manual follows these conventions:
command Commands are printed in bold.
--option, option Command options are printed in bold.
-argument, arg Arguments.
[ ] Optional elements appear in brackets.
variable Variables are printed in italics. In the help pages, values are underlined or
enclosed in angled brackets < >.
... Repeat the previous element, for example “member[;member...]”
value Fixed values following arguments are printed in plain font. For example,
--show WWN
| Boolean. Elements are exclusive. Example: --show -mode egress | ingressBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual ix
53-1002576-02
Notes, cautions, and warnings
The following notices and statements are used in this manual. They are listed below in order of
increasing severity of potential hazards.
NOTE
A note provides a tip, guidance, or advice, emphasizes important information, or provides a
reference to related information.
ATTENTION
An Attention statement indicates potential damage to hardware or data.
CAUTION
A Caution statement alerts you to situations that can be potentially hazardous to you or cause
damage to hardware, firmware, software, or data.
DANGER
A Danger statement indicates conditions or situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of these conditions
or situations.
Key terms
For definitions specific to Brocade and Fibre Channel, see the technical glossaries on MyBrocade.
See “Brocade resources” on page x for instructions on accessing MyBrocade.
For definitions of SAN-specific terms, visit the Storage Networking Industry Association online
dictionary at:
http://www.snia.org/education/dictionary
Notice to the reader
This document may contain references to the trademarks of the following corporations. These
trademarks are the properties of their respective companies and corporations.
These references are made for informational purposes only.
Corporation Referenced trademarks and products
Cisco Systems Cisco
Dell, Inc. PowerEdge
Microsoft Corporation Windows, Windows 2003, Windows 2008, Windows XP
Red Hat Inc. Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)x Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
Additional information
This section lists additional Brocade and industry-specific documentation that you might find
helpful.
Brocade resources
To get up-to-the-minute information, go to http://my.brocade.com to register at no cost for a user ID
and password.
White papers, online demonstrations, and data sheets are available through the Brocade web site
at:
http://www.brocade.com/products-solutions/products/index.page
For additional Brocade documentation, visit the Brocade web site:
http://www.brocade.com
Release notes are available on the Brocade Connect Web site and are also bundled with the
Fabric OS firmware.
Other industry resources
For additional resource information, visit the Technical Committee T11 web site. This web site
provides interface standards for high-performance and mass storage applications for Fibre
Channel, storage management, as well as other applications:
http://www.t11.org
For information about the Fibre Channel industry, visit the Fibre Channel Industry Association web
site:
http://www.fibrechannel.org
Product support documents
The following documentation is available from Dell.
• Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual
• Dell Chassis Management Controller Firmware Version 4.x User Guide
The following support documentation is provided on the Brocade web site.
• Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide
• Fabric OS Command Reference
The Open Group UNIX
VMware SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES)
XenServer XEN 6.0
Corporation Referenced trademarks and productsBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual xi
53-1002576-02
• Fabric OS MIB Reference
• Fabric OS Message Reference
• Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide
• SAN TECH NOTE - Preparing to Install the Brocade Access Gateway
• Web Tools Administrator’s Guide
• Fabric Watch Administrator’s Guide
• Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module QuickStart Guide
• Release notes for the Fabric OS version running on the SAN I/O Module
• Release notes specific to the SAN I/O Module
NOTE
Refer to the latest documentation version for the most up-to-date product information.
Getting technical help
Contact your switch support supplier for hardware, firmware, and software support, including
product repairs and part ordering. To expedite your call, have the following information available:
1. General Information
• Dell service tag (listed by the CMC)
• Switch model
• Switch operating system version
• Software name and software version, if applicable
• Error numbers and messages received
• supportSave command output
• Detailed description of the problem, including the switch or fabric behavior immediately
following the problem, and specific questions
• Description of any troubleshooting steps already performed and the results
• Serial console and Telnet session logs
• Syslog message logs
2. Switch serial number
The switch serial number and corresponding bar code are provided on the serial number label,
for example:
FT00X0054E9
FT00X0054E9
3. World Wide Name (WWN).
Use the wwn or switchShow commands to display the WWN.
4. Software licenses. Use the licenseIdShow command to display the list of licenses and
corresponding license IDs available on the unit.xii Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
Document feedback
Quality is our first concern at Brocade and we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this document. However, if you find an error or an omission, or you think that a
topic needs further development, we want to hear from you. Forward your feedback to:
documentation@brocade.com
Provide the title and version number of the document, and as much detail as possible about your
comment, including the topic heading and page number and your suggestions for improvement.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 1
53-1002576-02
Chapter
Brocade M6505 Product Overview 1
In this chapter
•SAN I/O Module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
•Operating system support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
•Hardware features and functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
•Software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
•Ports on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
•ISL trunking groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
•Access Gateway and Native Fabric modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
•Optional Brocade licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
•Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
•SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SAN I/O Module overview
The Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module is a nonblocking, embedded switch
with up to 8 external-facing Fibre Channel ports and up to 16 internal-facing Fibre Channel ports
that is custom built for the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. Although the product
may ship with a specific number of ports enabled, it can be upgraded to 24 ports through a Ports
on Demand (POD) license.
NOTE
The Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module is also referred to as the SAN I/O
Module throughout this document.
The eight external ports of the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module support
hot-pluggable Small Form Factor Pluggable plus (SFP+) optical transceivers. Only Brocade-branded
optical transceivers are supported.
Each external port is independently capable of supporting speeds of 16, 8, and 4 Gbps using
auto-sensing. Internal ports support speeds of 16 and 8 Gbps. The switch module operates in
either Brocade Access Gateway (AG) or Native Fabric (full-fabric switch) mode. The default mode is
AG, which utilizes NPIV for direct connectivity to Brocade, Cisco and/or McData SANs.2 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
1 Operating system support
Operating system support
Brocade Fabric OS has no specific host operating system (OS) dependencies. The Fabric OS in the
switches allows for any Fibre Channel-compliant device to attach to switches as long as it conforms
to the standards for device login, name service, and related Fibre Channel features.
The operating systems listed in Table 1 are for the host machine running Brocade management
applications outside the Fabric OS, such as Brocade Network Advisor (BNA). For the latest
information on operating system support for these applications, refer to the latest released
versions of BNA documentation.
Hardware features and functionality
The SAN I/O Module ships in Access Gateway mode. It provides support for the following hardware
features and functionality:
• Twelve to 24 auto-negotiating Fibre Channel (FC) ports
• Diagnostic ports
• Up to eight small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+) optical transceivers supporting speeds of
16 Gbps, 8 Gbps and 4 Gbps
• System LEDs noting system power, switch status, and management health status
• One RJ-45 connector for serial console management
• Hot pluggable—Up to 4 hot-pluggable SAN I/O Modules per Dell M1000e Blade Server
Enclosure chassis
• Runtime elements that include health monitoring, uptime, memory information, CPU usage,
user information, power, and licenses
• Two internal 100 Mbps full-duplex Ethernet ports to connect to the redundant Dell M1000e
Chassis Management Controllers (CMCs)
• One serial console port on the front panel.
TABLE 1 Supported operating systems for management server
Operating system Description
Microsoft • Windows 2003 SP1, 64-bit (Standard, Enterprise and Web)
• Windows 2008 64-bit (Standard, Enterprise and Web)
• Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V R2
Linux • Red Hat Enterprise Linux (EL) 5.5 32/64-bit (Standard and Advanced platform)
• SUSE Linux ES 11 (SP1 32/64-bit)
VMWare VMWare ESX 4.0 (U2)
XenServer XEN 6.0Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 3
53-1002576-02
Software features 1
Software features
The Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module supports the following software
features. For updates to the supported feature set, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s
Guide and product release notes for additional information.
• Access Gateway (AG) mode and Native Fabric mode. (Refer to “Access Gateway and Native
Fabric modes” on page 5.)
The SAN I/O Module ships in Access Gateway mode, but it can support the standard Native
Fabric (Switch) mode. For detailed information about AG, refer to the Brocade Access Gateway
Administrator’s Guide.
• Brocade Fabric OS (FOS), which delivers distributed intelligence throughout the network and
enables a wide range of value-added applications, such as Brocade Advanced Web Tools and
Brocade Advanced Fabric Services (on certain models)
• Dynamic Ports on Demand (DPOD) offering the flexibility to scale from 12 ports on the
Base model up to 24 ports
• Inter-Switch Link (ISL) Trunking (licensable), which allows up to eight ports (at 16, 8, or 4 Gbps
speeds) to combine to form a single, logical ISL with a speed of up to 128 Gbps (each
direction, full duplex) for optimal bandwidth utilization, automatic path failover, and load
balancing.
• Enhanced Group Management, which enables the SAN I/O Module to be managed as a group
• Detection and resolution of duplicate WWNs
• Dell DMC, iDRAC, and CMC management
• Dual and redundant firmware images
• Service levels Class 2, Class 3, and Class F (inter-switch frames)
• Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) for managing user-permission levels
• Advanced zoning, which enables you to partition your storage area network (SAN) into logical
groups of devices that can access each other
• Zoning enhancements that allow a switch with the default zone “no access” to merge with a
fabric
• Buffer credit loss detection and automatic recovery on 16 Gbps ISLs
• Importing and exporting of configuration information, including port speeds and zoning
information
• Port mirroring to monitor ingress or egress traffic from any port within the switch
• SNMP v1, v2c, and v3. (SNMP traps log errors and alarms; logs can be exported)
• TACACS+ and RADIUS remote authentication for switch management access
• IPv4 support
• AG enhancements, such as detection of unreliable N_Port links, RADIUS and LDAP support,
Advanced Performance Monitoring (APM) capability, and F_Port static mapping
• Forward error correction (FEC), which provides method error control during data transmission
by sending redundant data to ensure error-free transmission on a specified port or port range
(enabled by default)
• IP address filtering for management access by way of Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS/SSL, SSH v2, and
SNMP4 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
1 Ports on Demand
• SNMP/MIB monitoring functionality contained within the Ethernet Control MIB-II
(RFC1213-MIB)
• NTP client support (NTP V3)
• FTP support for firmware upgrades
• End-to-end optics and link validation
• Registered State Change Notification (RSCN), which notifies a device of a change within the
fabric
• Switch banner support
• Syslog remote logging capabilities
• RASlogs to indicate invalid traffic isolation zones
• Four RMON groups: history, statistics, alarms, and events
Optional features
The following optional features are available, depending on whether the SAN I/O Module is
configured in Access Gateway mode or Native Fabric mode. For detailed information on any of
these features, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide. You can also refer to
“Optional Brocade licenses” on page 6 for additional information.
• Ports on Demand (POD) licensing
• Inter-Switch Link (ISL) Trunking
• Fabric Watch
• Advanced Performance Monitoring
• Adaptive Networking
Ports on Demand
Depending on the model, the SAN I/O Module ships with either 12 or 24 active ports.
With Dynamic Ports on Demand (DPOD), physical ports are licensed as they come online. In the
Base model port set, the first 12 ports reporting (on a first-come, first-served basis) on boot-up are
assigned licenses. In the Full and ENT model port sets, the first 24 ports reporting (on a first-come,
first-served basis) on boot-up are assigned licenses. These ports may be any combination of
external or internal Fibre Channel (FC) ports. After all licenses have been assigned, you can
manually move those licenses from one port to another.
NOTE
Ports 17 and 18 are prereserved for external/SAN connectivity.
• Base model—Ships with 12 active ports. You can allocate an optional POD license to activate
the additional 12 ports.
• Full model—Ships with 24 active ports. No additional POD license is needed.
• ENT (Enterprise) model—Ships with 24 active ports. No additional POD license is needed.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 5
53-1002576-02
ISL trunking groups 1
ISL trunking groups
If your SAN I/O Module has an optional Brocade ISL Trunking license, external ports can form
trunking groups of ISLs between adjacent switches. ISL Trunking optimizes the performance and
availability of SAN fabrics while simplifying ISL management.
All external ports (0, 17 through 23) can be formed into a single 8-port trunk, or any combination of
2- to 7-port trunk. For details about Brocade ISL Trunking, refer to the Fabric OS Administrator’s
Guide.
NOTE
Only the external ports are available for trunking.
Access Gateway and Native Fabric modes
The SAN I/O Module can function in either Native Fabric mode or Brocade Access Gateway mode.
The SAN I/O Module is shipped in Access Gateway (AG) mode by default.
Access Gateway simplifies SAN deployment by using NPIV (N_Port ID Virtualization) technology.
AG mode improves SAN I/O Module scalability, manageability, and interoperability. For more
information on Access Gateway, refer to the Brocade Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE
Access Gateway cannot be connected directly into a storage array unless one of the external ports
is connected to a SAN network.
Access Gateway mode
The SAN I/O Module provides support for the following when operating in AG mode:
• Up to 8 auto-sensing (4, 8, and 16 Gbps) Fibre Channel ports. These are universal and
self-configuring ports that are capable of becoming the following types:
- F_Port (fabric-enabled)
- N_Port (NPIV-enabled)
• Up to 16 internal backplane F_Ports. Each port can automatically negotiate its speed at either
16 Gbps or 8 Gbps to match the speed of attached devices
• Dynamic fabric provisioning that supports fabric-assigned WWNs6 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
1 Optional Brocade licenses
Native Fabric mode
Native Fabric mode can be accessed by disabling the default AG mode. Once the SAN I/O Module is
in Native Fabric mode, it provides support for the following:
• Up to 8 external auto-sensing and auto-negotiating (4, 8, or 16 Gbps) Fibre Channel ports.
These universal and self-configuring ports are capable of becoming one of the following port
types:
- E_Port (expansion port)
- F_Port (fabric-enabled)
- U_Port (self-discovery based on switch type)
These external ports are capable of ISL trunking with appropriate licensing.
• Frame filtering that augments the hardware zoning capabilities of the Brocade ASIC, which
implements hardware zoning at the port level of the SAN I/O Module.
• Brocade ASIC expanded capabilities, including World Wide Name (WWN) and device-level
zoning.
• Hardware zoning implemented by firmware-accessible table per output port.
• Zoning enhancements that allow a switch with the default zone “no access” to merge with a
fabric.
• Buffer credit loss detection and automatic recovery on ISLs.
Optional Brocade licenses
Table 2 lists optional licenses that are available for use on the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre
Channel SAN I/O Module.
TABLE 2 Optional supported features
License Description
Adaptive Networking A suite of tools and capabilities that optimize behavior in the SAN. Even
under the worst congestion conditions, Adaptive Networking features can
maximize the fabric behavior and provide necessary bandwidth for
high-priority, mission-critical applications and connections.
Advanced Performance Monitoring Enables more effective end-to-end SAN performance analysis to enhance
performance tuning, increase productivity, optimize resource utilization,
and reduce costs.
Fabric Watch Continuously monitors SAN fabrics for potential faults based on thresholds
set for a variety of SAN fabric elements and events, automatically alerting
administrators to potential problems before they become costly failures.
ISL Trunking Optimizes the performance and availability of SAN fabrics while simplifying
ISL management.
Ports on Demand Allows you to obtain additional ports by way of license key upgrade. Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 7
53-1002576-02
Hardware description 1
Hardware description
This section describes the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module as shipped
from the factory. For specifications, such as installed memory, weight and physical dimensions,
facility requirements, and architectural specifications, refer to Appendix A, “SAN I/O Module
Specifications”.
SAN I/O Module front panel
All external ports and LEDs are accessible from the front panel of the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps
Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module. The front panel faces out when the SAN I/O Module is inserted in
the I/O module bays B or C of the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. Each external port has a
dedicated LED that identifies port status and port diagnostics. For a complete description of the
locations and interpretations of the LEDs, refer to “Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity” on
page 35.
Figure 1 shows details of the front panel and includes the release lever. Pressing the release latch
to open the release lever enables you to insert and remove the SAN I/O Module in and out of the
Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure.8 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
1 Hardware description
FIGURE 1 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module front panel
For more information on SAN I/O Module front panel LEDs, refer to “Interpreting SAN I/O Module
LED activity” on page 35.
1 Ports with port status LEDs 4 Power status LED
2 RJ-45 console port 5 Server management status/indicator LED
3 SAN I/O Module status LED 6 SAN I/O Module release lever
4 5
3
2
1
6Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 9
53-1002576-02
Hardware description 1
SAN I/O Module side view
The SAN I/O Module connects to the I/O module bay of the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure by
way of the backplane connectors. (Refer to Figures 2.) The SAN I/O Module seats correctly when
the release lever is closed securely.
Once the SAN I/O Module is securely seated, the backplane connectors become active, allowing
the SAN I/O Module to be configured in the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure.
FIGURE 2 SAN I/O Module side view
1 Release lever
2 Product labels
3 Backplane connectors10 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
1 SFP+ transceivers
SFP+ transceivers
The SAN I/O Module is designed to work exclusively with Brocade-branded small form-factor
pluggable plus (SFP+) optical transceivers. The SFP+ transceivers are hot-swappable, thus allowing
for connection to external devices without removing the SAN I/O Module from the Dell M1000e
Blade Server Enclosure.
For information on inserting or removing SFP+ transceivers, refer to “Removing and replacing SAN
I/O Modules” on page 37.
SFP+ transceivers provide optical connections to external devices for both short wavelength (SWL)
and long wavelength (LWL) connections. You can replace SFP+ transceivers with a new pluggable
SFP+ transceiver rather than replacing the SAN I/O Module.
The SAN I/O Module is shipped with 16Gbps Brocade-branded transceivers.
• Base model—Ships with two pre-installed SFP+ transceivers. Six additional SFP+ transceivers
can be installed.
• Full model—Ships with four pre-installed SFP+ transceivers. Four additional SFP+ transceivers
can be installed.
• ENT model—Ships fully loaded with eight pre-installed SFP+ transceivers.
NOTE
You can also insert pre-qualified 8 Gbps SFP+ transceivers in the SAN I/O Module.
For a list of supported SFP+ transceivers on the SAN I/O Module, refer to Table 3 on page 15.
For a complete list of Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers and other interoperable hardware, visit
the MyBrocade website at:
http://my.brocade.com
To register at MyBrocade, go to http://my.brocade.com/wps/portal/registration.
From the main page at my.brocade.com, select the Product Portfolio tab, then select Small
Form-Factor Pluggables (SFP) from the Filter by list box. Click Brocade Optical Transceiver Modules.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 11
53-1002576-02
Chapter
Installing the SAN I/O Module 2
In this chapter
•Unpacking the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
•Items included with the SAN I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
•System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
•Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
•Preparing the Blade Server Enclosure for the SAN I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . 12
•Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 13
•Handling SFP+ transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
•Inserting an SFP+ transceiver in the SAN I/O Module port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
•Cabling guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
•Data transmission ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Unpacking the SAN I/O Module
Perform the following steps to remove the Brocade Product Name from its shipping package:
1. Open the shipping box and inspect the contents for damage.
2. Remove the foam layer that sits on top of the SAN I/O Module.
3. Remove the switch from the surrounding protective foam.
4. After ensuring that standard electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions have been taken, slide
the SAN I/O Module from the antistatic sleeve.
Items included with the SAN I/O Module
• SFP+ transceivers: Each SAN I/O Module includes pre-installed SFP+ transceivers. The
number of pre-installed SFP+ transceivers varies based on the SAN I/O Module. The
transceivers can be activated directly out of the box.
- Base model: Two 16 Gbps SFP+ transceivers
- Full model: Four 16 Gbps SFP+ transceivers
- ENT (Enterprise) model: Eight 16 Gbps SFP+ transceivers
• Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module QuickStart Guide12 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
2 System reliability guidelines
System reliability guidelines
To help ensure proper cooling, performance, and system reliability, make sure the following
requirements are met:
• Each of the I/O module bays at the rear of the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure contains
either a SAN I/O Module or a filler panel.
• A removed hot-swappable SAN I/O Module is replaced with an identical SAN I/O Module or
filler panel within 60 seconds of removal.
• You have followed the reliability guidelines in the documentation that comes with the Dell
M1000e Blade Server Enclosure.
Handling static-sensitive devices
ATTENTION
Static electricity can damage the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure and other electronic devices.
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until you are ready
to install them.
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following precautions:
• Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.
• Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
• Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.
• Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
• While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted metal surface
of the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure or an unpainted metal surface on any other
grounded rack component in the rack in which you are installing the device for at least two
seconds. This drains static electricity from the package and from your body.
• Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the Dell M1000e Blade Server
Enclosure without setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back
into its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the Dell M1000e Blade Server
Enclosure or on a metal surface.
• Take additional care when you handle devices during cold weather. Heating reduces indoor
humidity and increases static electricity.
• Some types of chassis come with electrostatic discharge (ESD) connectors. If the chassis is
equipped with an ESD connector, see the documentation that comes with the Dell M1000e
Blade Server Enclosure for using the ESD connector.
Preparing the Blade Server Enclosure for the SAN I/O Module
Before the SAN I/O Module can be inserted in the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure, make sure
the following conditions are met:
• The I/O module bay into which the SAN I/O Module will be inserted is ready to receive the SAN
I/O Module.
• All power requirements specific to the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure are met.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 13
53-1002576-02
Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure 2
• Any protective cover on the SAN I/O Module backside connector is removed.
• If you are replacing an existing SAN I/O Module with a new module, the new SAN I/O Module
should be ready to be inserted within 60 seconds from the removal of the old module to
maintain the proper cooling level in the chassis.
Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure
Complete the following steps to insert the SAN I/O Module in the Dell M1000e Blade Server
Enclosure.
1. Unpack the SAN I/O Module from its shipping box, as described in “Unpacking the SAN I/O
Module” on page 11.
2. Verify that the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure I/O module bay into which the SAN I/O
Module is being inserted is empty and that any filler panel or dust cover is removed.
A maximum of four SAN I/O Modules can be installed in the Dell M1000e Blade Server
Enclosure.
NOTE
The SAN I/O Module is designed to work only in I/O module bays B1/B2 and C1/C2 of the Dell
M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. Make sure to comply with installation requirements stated in
the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual.
3. Press the release latch on the SAN I/O Module to free the release lever, as shown in Figure 3.
FIGURE 3 SAN I/O Module latching mechanism (closed position)
1 Release latch 2 Release lever14 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
2 Inserting the SAN I/O Module in the Blade Server Enclosure
4. Ensure that the release lever is fully extended so the SAN I/O Module can be seated properly in
the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure, as shown in Figure 4.
FIGURE 4 SAN I/O Module latching mechanism (open position)
5. With the port side facing you and the release lever fully extended, slide the SAN I/O Module in
the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure I/O module bay.
6. Press the release lever upward until the release latch clicks and locks the lever in place.
This locks the SAN I/O Module into the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure I/O module bay.
Locking the SAN I/O Module into the I/O module bay provides power (if the power is on in the
Blade Server Enclosure) and activates (powers on) the switch and switch LEDs.
The switch then runs self-diagnostic tests (such as POST).
When the SAN I/O Module is inserted in the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure, the physical
Ethernet connection is established through the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure Chassis
Management Controller (CMC). Also, the SAN I/O Module serial port connection becomes
available through the CMC CLI connect switch-x interface.
NOTE
Once inserted, the SAN I/O Module can be accessed remotely. Ensure that the SAN I/O Module
is not being modified from any other connection until configuration is complete. Refer to
Chapter 3, “Configuring the SAN I/O Module,” for additional information about configuring the
SAN I/O Module.
1 Release latch 2 Release lever
1
2Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 15
53-1002576-02
Handling SFP+ transceivers 2
Handling SFP+ transceivers
Before installing an SFP+ transceiver, be aware of the following:
• The housing on the SFP+ transceiver includes an integral guide key that is designed to prevent
you from inserting the transceiver incorrectly.
• Use minimal pressure when you insert an SFP+ transceiver in the port. Forcing the transceiver
into the port can cause damage to the transceiver or the SAN I/O Module port.
• You can insert or remove an SFP+ transceiver while the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure
is powered on.
• You must first insert the SFP+ transceiver in the port before connecting the cables.
• You must remove the cable from the SFP+ transceiver before you remove the SFP+ transceiver
from the SAN I/O Module.
Table 3 lists Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers that are supported on the SAN I/O Module.
To order SFP+ transceivers, contact your sales representative.
Inserting an SFP+ transceiver in the SAN I/O Module port
DANGER
All fiber-optic interfaces use Class 1 lasers.
DANGER
Laser radiation. Do not view directly with optical instruments. Class 1 laser products.
Your SAN I/O Module ships from the factory with a certain number of pre-installed SFP+
transceivers. The number of pre-installed transceivers will vary based on your SAN I/O Module
model.
To insert additional SFP+ transceivers in your SAN I/O Module, complete the following procedure. If
you are replacing an SFP+ transceiver, refer to “Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and
cables” on page 39.
ATTENTION
Be sure to use only Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers. (Refer to Table 3).
TABLE 3 Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers and part numbers
Transceiver type Device support Device description Brocade part number Dell part number
SFP+ 16 Gbps FC SWL, 1-pack, BR XDL-000192 2D0N2
SFP+ 16 Gbps FC SWL, 8-pack, BR XDL-000193 MTW83
SFP+ 8 Gbps FC SWL, 1-pack, BR XDL-000163 KP1HM
SFP+ 8 Gbps FC SWL, 8-pack, BR XDL-000164 X3T0316 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
2 Cabling guidelines
1. Review the section “Handling SFP+ transceivers” on page 15.
2. If your SAN I/O Module ships with insert plugs in the unused external ports, remove the insert
plugs from the ports to be used.
3. Insert the SFP+ transceiver into a port until it is firmly seated and the latching mechanism
clicks.
NOTE
SFP+ Transceivers are keyed to ensure correct orientation. If an SFP+ transceiver does not
install easily, ensure that it is correctly oriented.
4. Connect the cable to the SFP+ transceiver. Refer to “Cabling guidelines” on page 16.
For instructions specific to the type of transceiver, visit the MyBrocade web site at:
http://my.brocade.com
The cables used in trunking groups must meet specific requirements. For a list of these
requirements, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide.
5. After the diagnostics have completed, cable the SAN I/O Module according to instructions
provided by the manufacturer. For more information, refer to the documentation that came
with your embedded switch.
6. Configure the Ethernet IP address on the SAN I/O Module as described in “Connecting to the
SAN I/O Module using Web Tools” on page 24.
Cabling guidelines
After modifying the IP address of the SAN I/O Module, it is recommended that you cable all external
ports to fabric connections before bringing the SAN I/O Module online.
Begin by cabling the ports from the top (ports 17 and 18) and working down as needed (ports 19,
20, 21, 22, 23, and 0). At a minimum, for all licensed variants of the SAN I/O Module, ports 17 and
18 are pre-licensed at the factory as part of Dynamic Ports On Demand (DPOD).
To avoid damage to the fiber-optic cables, follow these guidelines:
• Do not route the cable along a folding cable-management arm.
• When you attach the cable to a device on slide rails, leave enough slack in the cable so that it
does not bend to a radius of less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) when the device is extended, or
becomes pinched when the device is retracted.
• Tie wraps are not recommended for optical cables because they are easily overtightened.
CAUTION
A 50-micron cable should not be bent to a radius less than 2 inches under full tensile load and
1.2 inches with no tensile load.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 17
53-1002576-02
Data transmission ranges 2
Data transmission ranges
Table 4 provides the data transmission ranges for the transceivers, port speeds, and cable types.
TABLE 4 Supported optical tranceivers, speeds, cables, and distances
Transceiver
type
Form
factor
Link Speed1
1. 16Gb SFP+ optical transceivers support 16/8/4 Gbps speeds, and 8Gb SFP+ optical transceivers support 8/4/2 Gbps speeds.
SWL SFP+ 2 Gbps 150 m (492 ft.) 300 m (984 ft.) 500 m (1640 ft.) N/A N/A
SWL SFP+ 4 Gbps 70 m (229 ft.) 150 m (492 ft.) 380 m (1264 ft.) 400 m (1312 ft.) N/A
SWL SFP+ 8 Gbps 21 m (68 ft.) 50 m (164 ft.) 150 m (492 ft.) 190 m (623 ft.) N/A
SWL SFP+ 16 Gbps 15 m (49 ft.) 35 m (115 ft.) 100 m (328 ft.) 125 m (410 ft.) N/A
Multi-node media
(50 microns)
(OM1)
Multi-mode media
(50 microns)
(OM2)
Multi-mode media
(50 microns)
(OM3)
Multi-mode media
(50 microns)
(OM4)
Single-mode
media18 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
2 Data transmission rangesBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 19
53-1002576-02
Chapter
Configuring the SAN I/O Module 3
In this chapter
•Items required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
•Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
•Connecting to the SAN I/O Module using Web Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
•Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
•Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
NOTE
Although the SAN I/O Module is configured at the factory for Access Gateway (AG) mode, you can
enable it for Fabric OS Native mode. For more information, refer to “Changing from Access Gateway
mode to Native Fabric mode” on page 31.
Items required
The following items are required for configuring and connecting the SAN I/O Module for use in a
network and fabric:
• The SAN I/O Module to be installed in the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure.
• If required, a management workstation (computer) that has a terminal emulator (such as
HyperTerminal) or a keyboard, video, and mouse (KVM) device. This is only required if you are
not changing the SAN I/O Module IP address through the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure
GUI or CLI management programs.
• An unused IP address and corresponding subnet mask and gateway address, unless DHCP is
used.
• If required, a serial cable to connect to the SAN I/O Module serial console port.
NOTE
The serial cable is only required if you are not changing the SAN I/O Module IP address through
the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure GUI or CLI management programs.
• Access to an FTP server for backing up the SAN I/O Module configuration. 20 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
3 Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address
• Access to the following publications:
- Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual
- Dell Chassis Management Controller Firmware Version 4.x User Guide
- Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference
- Brocade Fabric OS Message Reference
- Brocade SAN TECH NOTE – Preparing to Install the Brocade Access Gateway
- Brocade Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide
- Brocade Web Tools Administrator’s Guide
- Release notes for the Fabric OS version running on the SAN I/O Module
- Release notes specific to the SAN I/O Module
Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address
By default, the IP address for the SAN I/O Module is configured as 10.77.77.77 with a default
Ethernet subnetmask of 255.255.255.0.
Reset the IP address using any of the following three methods. The IP address values are stored on
the SAN I/O Module.
• “Using the CMC GUI to set the IP address” on page 20
• “Using the CMC CLI to set the IP address” on page 21
• “Using the SAN I/O Module CLI to set the IP address” on page 22
NOTE
It is recommended that you set the IP address using the Dell M1000e Blade Server Chassis
Management Controller (CMC). From the CMC, you can set the IP address using either the GUI or the
CLI.
Using the CMC GUI to set the IP address
To modify the SAN I/O Module IP address using the CMC GUI, perform the following steps:
1. Select I/O Module Overview from the left navigation panel.
2. Click the Setup tab.
3. Enter the new information in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields as appropriate,
then click Apply.
4. To enable DHCP, select DHCP Enabled, then click Apply.
Refer to Figure 5 on page 21.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 21
53-1002576-02
Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address 3
FIGURE 5 CMC Setup tab
Refer to the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual that comes with your Dell
M1000e Blade Server Enclosure for more information.
Using the CMC CLI to set the IP address
To modify the SAN I/O Module IP address through the Chassis Management Controller (CMC) CLI,
perform the following steps:
1. Establish a Telnet session to the CMC CLI.
2. At the command prompt, enter connect switch-x where x is the bay in which the SAN I/O
Module is installed. For example, switch-x can be one of the following values:
• Switch-3 for SAN I/O Module installed in bay B1.
• Switch-4 for SAN I/O Module installed in bay B2.
• Switch-5 for SAN I/O Module installed in bay C1.
• Switch-6 for SAN I/O Module installed in bay C2.
3. Log in to the default administrative account using the following default settings:
Login: admin
Password: password
4. When prompted, either change the administrative password, or press Ctrl-C to bypass.
5. Enter the ipAddrSet command to change the IP address of the selected SAN I/O Module.
switch:admin> ipaddrset
6. Follow on-screen instructions and supply the correct information, as shown in the following
example:
switch:admin> ipaddrset
Ethernet IP Address [10.77.77.77]:10.32.53.47
Ethernet Subnetmask [255.255.255.0]:255.255.240.022 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
3 Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address
Fibre Channel IP Addresss [none]:
Fibre Channel Subnetmask [none]:
Gateway IP Address [0.0.0.0]:10.32.48.1
DHCP [Off]:
IP address is being changed...Done.
7. Enter ipAddrShow to verify the IP address was correctly set.
switch:admin> ipaddrshow
Ethernet IP Address: 10.32.53.47
Ethernet Subnetmask: 255.255.240.0
Fibre Channel IP Addresss: none
Fibre Channel Subnetmask: none
Gateway IP Address 10.32.48.1
DHCP: Off
Refer to the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual that comes with your Blade
Server Enclosure for information on using the CMC connect command.
Using the SAN I/O Module CLI to set the IP address
Perform the following tasks to change the IP address on the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre
Channel SAN I/O Module using the SAN I/O Module’s CLI.
Task 1: Establish a terminal session with the SAN I/O Module
Complete the following steps to establish a terminal emulation session between the SAN I/O
Module and a management workstation used for managing the SAN I/O Module. Once this session
is established, you can log in to the SAN I/O Module and use its CLI commands to manage the
module.
1. Connect a serial cable between the serial console port on the SAN I/O Module and the
management workstation that can establish a terminal emulation session with the SAN I/O
Module.
2. Disable any serial communication programs that are running on the workstation.
3. Using a terminal emulator application (such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY connection manager
on a PC or TERM in a LINUX or UNIX environment), establish a terminal session to the SAN I/O
Module from the management workstation. You will use this connection if you want to reset the
IP address of the SAN I/O Module using CLI commands and perform other configuration tasks.
For Windows 2003, 2008
a. Click Start and select Programs > Accessories > Communications.
b. Select HyperTerminal and enter a name for the connection.
c. From the HyperTerminal window, click the Connect menu and select an available COM
port.
d. Click OK.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 23
53-1002576-02
Modifying the SAN I/O Module IP address 3
e. From the COM Port Properties window, select the following configuration values.
f. Log in using the default administrative account:
Login: admin
Password: password
g. When prompted, either change the administrative password, or press Ctrl-C to bypass.
For LINUX or UNIX
a. Enter the following command at the command prompt:
tip /dev/ttyb -9600
b. When the terminal application stops reporting information, press Enter to display the login
prompt.
c. Log in using the default administrative account:
Login: admin
Password: password
d. When prompted, either change the administrative password, or press Ctrl-C to bypass.
Task 2: Change the IP address
1. Verify that the SAN I/O Module has completed power-on self-test (POST). When POST is
complete, the port status and SAN I/O Module power and status LEDs return to a standard
healthy state.
2. Enter the ipAddrSet command.
switch:admin> ipaddrset
3. Follow on-screen instructions and supply the correct information, as shown in the following
examples.
switch:admin> ipaddrset
Ethernet IP Address [10.77.77.77]:10.32.53.47
Ethernet Subnetmask [255.255.255.0]:255.255.240.0
Fibre Channel IP Addresss [none]:
Fibre Channel Subnetmask [none]:
Gateway IP Address [0.0.0.0]:10.32.48.1
DHCP [Off]:
IP address is being changed...Done.
Bits per second 9600
Databits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control None24 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
3 Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the Ethernet network
4. Enter ipAddrShow at the prompt to verify that the address was set correctly.
switch:admin> ipaddrshow
Ethernet IP Address: 10.32.53.47
Ethernet Subnetmask: 255.255.240.0
Fibre Channel IP Addresss: none
Fibre Channel Subnetmask: none
Gateway IP Address 10.32.48.1
DHCP: Off
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the Ethernet network
Once you have successfully set the appropriate IP address of the SAN I/O Module, you can
establish an Ethernet connection through the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure Chassis
Management Controller (CMC) to a remote management workstation for any additional
configuration. The management workstation must be on the same Ethernet subnet as the CMC.
NOTE
Ensure that the SAN I/O Module is not being modified from any other connection until configuration
is complete.
Once an Ethernet connection is established, you can configure the SAN I/O Module by way of
Telnet/SSH using the switch CLI, or by launching Web Tools.
Connecting to the SAN I/O Module using Web Tools
Complete the following steps to connect to the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O
Module using Web Tools.
1. On the management console, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer.
The web browser must be connected to the same network as the SAN I/O Module.
2. Enter the IP address of the SAN I/O Module in the Address field, then press Enter.
NOTE
Web Tools requires any browser that conforms to HTML version 4.0, JavaScript version 1.0, and Java
Plug-in 1.6.0_24 or later.
For more information about using Web Tools, refer to the Brocade Web Tools Administrator’s Guide.
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric
NOTE
Refer to “Cabling guidelines” on page 16 before beginning the following procedure.
Before beginning the following steps, determine whether the SAN I/O Module is in Brocade Access
Gateway or Native Fabric mode. This affects the configuration process. Using the Brocade M6505
16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module CLI, enter the ag ––modeShow command to determine the
current operating mode.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 25
53-1002576-02
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric 3
If you are in AG mode and want to change to Native Fabric mode before connecting the SAN I/O
Module to the fabric, refer to “Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode” on
page 31.
1. If the Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module is in Native Fabric mode,
continue to step 2 and step 3. If the Module is in Access Gateway mode, go on to step 4.
2. Log in to the SAN I/O Module through a Telnet connection using the admin account.
3. Modify the domain ID if required using Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O
Module CLI commands.
The default domain ID is 1. If the SAN I/O Module is not powered on until after it is connected
to the fabric and the default domain ID is already in use, the domain ID for the new SAN I/O
Module is automatically reset to a unique value. If the SAN I/O Module is connected to the
fabric after it has been powered on and the default domain ID is already in use, the fabric
segments.
To find the domain IDs that are currently in use, run the fabricShow command on another SAN
I/O Module or switch in the fabric. Identify an unused domain ID:
a. Disable the SAN I/O Module being configured using the switchDisable command.
b. Enter the configure command at the root prompt.
The command prompts display sequentially. Enter a new value at the Domain prompt or
press Enter to accept the default value. The SAN I/O Module now has a unique domain ID
and can join the fabric. The following sample is an example of command output.
Fabric parameters (yes, y, no, n): [no] y
Data field size: (256..2112) [2112]
Sequence Level Switching: (0..1) [0]
Disable Device Probing: (0..1) [0]
Suppress Class F Traffic: (0..1) [0]
Switch PID Format: (1..2) [1]Configure...
Domain: (1..239) [1] 155
R_A_TOV: (4000..120000) [10000]
E_D_TOV: (1000..5000) [2000]
WAN_TOV: (0..30000) [0]
MAX_HOPS: (7..19) [7]
Per-frame Route Priority: (0..1) [0]
Long Distance Fabric: (0..1) [0]
BB credit: (1..27) [16]
Insistent Domain ID Mode (yes, y, no, n): [no]
Virtual Channel parameters (yes, y, no, n): [no]
F-Port login parameters (yes, y, no, n): [no]
Zoning Operation parameters (yes, y, no, n): [no]
RSCN Transmission Mode (yes, y, no, n): [no]
Arbitrated Loop parameters (yes, y, no, n): [no]
System services (yes, y, no, n): [no]
Portlog events enable (yes, y, no, n): [no]
ssl attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]
http attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]
snmp attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]
rpcd attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]
cfgload attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]
webtools attributes (yes, y, no, n): [no]26 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
3 Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric
System (yes, y, no, n): [no]
WARNING: The domain ID will be changed. The port level zoning may be
affected.
c. Re-enable the SAN I/O Module by entering the switchEnable command.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 seconds for the newly added SAN I/O Module to appear in the fabric
display with its newly assigned domain ID.
4. If you must install SFP+ transceivers, install them in the external Fibre Channel ports, as
required.
a. If necessary, remove the end caps from the SFP+ transceiver.
b. Orient the SFP+ transceiver correctly and insert it in a port until it is firmly seated and the
latching mechanism clicks.
c. Repeat substeps a, b, and c for the remaining ports, as required.
NOTE
Only Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers are supported for use with the SAN I/O Module.
5. Connect the cables to the transceivers.
The transceivers are keyed to ensure correct orientation. If a transceiver does not install easily,
ensure that it is correctly oriented and that the end caps have been removed. The cables used
in trunking groups must meet specific requirements. For a list of these requirements, see the
Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide.
ATTENTION
A cable should not be bent to a radius less than 5.08 cm (2 inches) under full tensile load and
3.048 cm (1.2 inches) with no tensile load.
Tie wraps are not recommended for optical cables because they are easily overtightened.
a. Orient a cable connector so that the key (the ridge on one side of connector) aligns with
the slot in the transceiver.
b. Insert the cable into the transceiver until the latching mechanism clicks. For instructions
specific to cable type, refer to the cable manufacturer’s documentation.
c. Repeat substeps a and b for the remaining transceivers, as required.
6. Check the LEDs to verify that all components are functional.
For information about LED patterns, refer to the “Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity” on
page 35.
7. Verify the correct operation of the SAN I/O Module by entering the switchShow command from
the switch Telnet session.
This command provides information about SAN I/O Module and port status.
8. Verify the correct operation of the SAN I/O Module in the fabric by entering the fabricShow
command from the switch Telnet session.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 27
53-1002576-02
Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabric 3
9. Back up the SAN I/O Module configuration to an FTP server by typing the configUpload
command and following the prompts.
This command uploads the SAN I/O Module configuration to the server, making it available for
downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module if necessary. Brocade recommends backing up
the configuration on a regular basis to ensure that a complete configuration is available for
downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module.
For specific instructions about how to back up the configuration, see the Brocade Fabric OS
Administrator’s Guide. The switchShow, fabricShow, and configUpload commands are
described in detail in the Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference.28 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
3 Connecting the SAN I/O Module to the fabricBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 29
53-1002576-02
Chapter
Operating the SAN I/O Module 4
In this chapter
•Interoperability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
•Activating Ports on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
•Changing from Native Fabric mode to Access Gateway mode . . . . . . . . . . . 33
•Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode . . . . . . . . . . . 31
•Access Gateway mode default port mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
•Accessing the SAN I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
•Interpreting POST results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
•Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
•Interpreting POST results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
•Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
•Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
•Switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
•Viewing the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
•Upgrading or downgrading firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
•Changing the default account password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
•Backing up the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
•Locating the serial number information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Interoperability
The SAN I/O Module supports interoperability for the features and functions listed in Table 5.
TABLE 5 Interoperability
Feature/Function Description
Link initialization The SAN I/O Module comes online automatically after it is seated securely in
one of the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure I/O module bays.
Routing Fabric Shortest Path First (FSPF)—A link state path selection protocol that
directs traffic along the shortest path between the source and destination
based upon the link cost.
Registered state change
notification (RSCN)
Notifies a device of a change within the fabric.
SNMP facilities v1, v2c, and v3
Translative mode Private target support on fabrics.30 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Activating Ports on Demand
Activating Ports on Demand
Ports on Demand (POD) licensing allows you to enable up to 24 ports from the initial 12 ports on
the Base model. You can add optional Ports on Demand (POD) licenses using either Brocade Web
Tools or a Telnet connection. Do not use the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure Chassis
Management Controller (CMC) software.
NOTE
Only the Base model requires the use of POD licensing to increase the amount of active ports. The
Full model and ENT model already have all ports enabled.
Ports on Demand is ready to be unlocked in the SAN I/O Module firmware. A POD license may be
supplied with the SAN I/O Module software, or you can purchase the license separately from your
SAN I/O Module vendor, who will provide you with a key to unlock it.
Once you have installed the license key, you must enable the ports. You can do so without
disrupting SAN I/O Module operation, or you can disable and re-enable the SAN I/O Module to
activate all ports.
If you remove a POD license, ports that were enabled by that license are disabled.
Activating ports with a POD license
You can activate ports with a POD license while the SAN I/O Module is connected to existing SANs,
or before connecting to an existing SAN.
For SAN I/O Modules already connected to existing storage networks, complete the following steps:
1. Add the POD license using Web Tools or the CLI.
2. Enable each newly licensed port using Web Tools or the CLI.
NOTE
This method is non-disruptive to existing servers and storage connecting to the SAN I/O
Module.
Trunking Supported only between two Brocade switches.
Advanced Performance
Monitoring
Enhancements include:
• Coexistence of Top Talkers and APM on 16 Gbps platforms
• E_Port Top Talkers support and E_Port end-to-end monitor support on
16 Gbps platforms
• APM support on AG that provides end-to-end monitors and frame
monitors
TABLE 5 Interoperability (Continued)
Feature/Function DescriptionBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 31
53-1002576-02
Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode 4
For new SAN I/O Module installations, perform the following procedure before connecting to an
existing SAN.
ATTENTION
Do not use this method if the SAN I/O Module is operating in an existing SAN because traffic will be
disrupted.
1. Disable the SAN I/O Module.
NOTE
If Secure Fabric OS is enabled, you cannot use Telnet or SSH to disable the SAN I/O Module.
For details about using Web Tools, refer to the Brocade Web Tools Administrator’s Guide. For
details about the CLI, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference.
2. Add the POD license using Web Tools or the CLI.
3. Enable the SAN I/O Module using Web Tools or the CLI. When the SAN I/O Module is enabled,
the newly added POD ports become enabled.
Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode
The SAN I/O Module ships from the factory in Access Gateway (AG) mode. If your SAN I/O Module is
currently configured in AG mode, you can enable the module for Native Fabric (fabric switch) mode
by disabling AG mode. When you do this, the module automatically reboots in Native Fabric mode.
Note that once the switch reboots to Native Fabric mode, it will not join the SAN automatically.
Refer to the Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide for instructions on how to join the switch into
your SAN fabric.
Determine if the SAN I/O Module is running in AG mode by entering the switchShow command to
display the current switch configuration. If running in Native Fabric mode, the switchMode
parameter should display Access Gateway Mode.
For complete instructions on disabling Access Gateway mode using the CLI and joining the switch
to the fabric, refer to the “Disabling Access Gateway Mode” section in the Brocade Access Gateway
Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE
Disabling Access Gateway mode is disruptive because the switch is disabled and rebooted. Always
back up the current configuration before enabling or disabling Access Gateway mode. Enabling
Access Gateway mode clears the security and zone databases. Disabling Access Gateway mode
clears the F_Port to N_Port mapping.32 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Changing from Access Gateway mode to Native Fabric mode
Disabling Access Gateway mode
To disable AG mode on the SAN I/O Module, perform the following procedure.
1. Before disabling a switch in AG mode, save the current configuration file using the
configUpload command in case you need this configuration again.
2. Enter the switchDisable command.
switch:admin> switchdisable
This command disables all user ports on a switch. All Fibre Channel ports are taken offline. If
the switch is part of a fabric, the remaining switches reconfigure. You must disable the switch
before making configuration changes.
3. Enter the ag --modeDisable command.
switch:admin> ag --modedisable
WARNING 1: Changing from Access Gateway mode to Switch mode will set zoning to
"all access".
WARNING 2: Disabling agmode will remove all the configuration data on the
switch including N_Port configuration and F_Port to N_Port mapping. Please
backup your configuration using configupload.
This operation will reboot the switch.
Do you want to continue? (yes, y, no, n): [no] y
Access Gateway mode was disabled successfully
Switch is being rebooted...Wait for the switch to come up in “Native”mode.
4. Log in to the switch and verify that the switch is set to Native Fabric mode using the
switchShow command.
switch:admin> switchshow
The switch mode should display “Native.”
SH3_1737:root> switchshow
switchName: SH3_1737
switchType: 130.0
switchState: Online
switchMode: Native
switchRole: Subordinate
switchDomain: 2
switchId: fffc02
switchWwn: 10:00:00:27:f8:0a:d8:83
zoning: ON (cfg_sh3_sanblaze)
switchBeacon: OFF
FC Router: OFF
FC Router BB Fabric ID: 1
Address Mode: 0
NOTE
You can also use the ag --modeShow command. The console will display the message,
“Access Gateway mode is NOT enabled.”
Refer to the Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide for more information on changing from
AG mode to Native Fabric mode.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 33
53-1002576-02
Changing from Native Fabric mode to Access Gateway mode 4
Changing from Native Fabric mode to Access Gateway mode
Converting to Access Gateway (AG) mode allows you to use the module as a device management
tool that transparently connects hosts to the fabric. Refer to the Brocade Access Gateway
Administrator’s Guide for information on changing from Native Fabric mode to AG mode.
Access Gateway mode default port mapping
The SAN I/O Module can contain 24 total ports. Of these, F_Ports are ports 1 through 16 and
N_Ports are ports 0 and 17 through 23.
In Access Gateway mode, the SAN I/O Module F_Ports are mapped to N_Ports. The following table
lists the factory-default F_Port to N_Port mapping for Access Gateway mode. For more information
on changing port mapping and managing ports in Access Gateway mode, refer to the Brocade
Access Gateway Administrator’s Guide.
Table 6 shows Access Gateway mapping information.
NOTE
Automatic failover and automatic failback are enabled on all N_Ports.
Accessing the SAN I/O Module
The SAN I/O Module is managed as a single element. It has a single IP address and appears as a
separate entity to the Telnet protocol and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
When SNMP devices send SNMP messages to a management console running SAN management
software, the information is stored in a Management Information Base (MIB). The SAN I/O Module
Fabric OS supports the FibreAlliance Fibre Channel Management (FCMGMT) MIBs, allowing the
provision of needed information to a SAN administrator.
In addition, the Brocade Fabric Access Layer (API) and the Storage Management Initiative (SMI)
provide facilities for the discovery and management of physical and logical elements in a SAN.
Using the Fabric Access interface to the Fabric OS, a client application can retrieve information and
modify the configuration of Brocade switches in the fabric.
Secure Telnet access is available using Secure Shell (SSH), a network security protocol for secure
remote login and other secure network services over an insecure network.
Brocade Web Tools management is available through a secure browser using Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS). The SSL/TLS security protocol provides data encryption,
server authentication, message integrity, and optional client authentication for a TCP/IP
connection. Because SSL/TLS is built into all major browsers and web servers, installing a digital
certificate enables the SSL/TLS capabilities.
TABLE 6 AG mapping
N_Port 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 0
F_Port 1, 2 3, 4 5, 6 7, 8 9, 10 11, 12 13, 14 15, 1634 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Interpreting POST results
Interpreting POST results
The power-on self-test (POST) system check is performed each time the SAN I/O Module is powered
on, rebooted, or reset. Refer to the following sample output:
POST1: Started running Tue Nov 9 20:27:57 GMT 2004
POST1: Test #1 - Running turboramtest
POST1: Test #2 - Running centralmemorytest
POST1: Test #3 - Running cmitest
POST2: Running diagshow
POST1: Script PASSED with exit status of 0 Tue Nov 9 20:28:10 GMT 2004 took
(0:
0:13)
POST2: Started running Tue Nov 9 20:28:12 GMT 2004
POST2: Test #1 - Running camtest
POST2: Test #2 - Running txdpath
POST2: Test #3 - Running spinsilk (SERDES)
POST2: Running diagshow
POST2: Script PASSED with exit status of 0 Tue Nov 9 20:29:11 GMT 2006 took
(0:
0:59)
Initializing Ports ....
Port Initialization Completed
Enabling switch...
Perform the following steps to determine POST completion status.
1. Verify the LEDs on the SAN I/O Module indicate that switch status is healthy. LED patterns are
described in “Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity” on page 35.
If any of the LEDs does not display a healthy state, verify the LEDs are not set to beacon. Use
the switchShow command or Web Tools to verify the LED state. For information about how to
enable and disable beaconing, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide or the
Brocade Web Tools Administrator’s Guide.
2. Use the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure’s Chassis Management Controller (CMC) GUI to
verify that the SAN I/O Module is working correctly.
For details, refer to the Dell PowerEdge M1000e Enclosure Owner’s Manual that comes with
your Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure.
3. Review the system log for errors.
Any errors detected during POST are written to the system log. Access this log using the
errShow command. For more information, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command
Reference. For information about error messages, see the Brocade Fabric OS Message
Reference.Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 35
53-1002576-02
Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity 4
Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity
The SAN I/O Module uses LEDs to indicate status, as shown in Figure 6.
FIGURE 6 SAN I/O Module front panel LEDs
LEDs are used to indicate switch health, status of the external ports, and power to the SAN I/O
Module. LEDs are also used to indicate diagnostics and test results.
For details about the meaning of each LED state, refer to the following sections:
• “Power-on self-test LEDs” on page 36
• “Normal-operation LEDs” on page 36
1 FC external port status 3 SAN I/O Module power status
2 SAN I/O Module status 4 Server management status/indicator
3 4
2
136 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity
Power-on self-test LEDs
The SAN I/O Module LEDs flash in various patterns during bootup, power-on self-test (POST), or
other diagnostic tests. This is normal and does not indicate a problem unless the LEDs do not
indicate a healthy state after all boot processes and diagnostic tests are complete.
• If POST fails, LEDs appear yellow.
• If POST is successful, LEDs appear green.
NOTE
The SAN I/O Module will continue to operate after POST indicates a fatal error. Although the SAN I/O
Module continues to operate, it will not operate normally. It is therefore recommended that you
check the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure Chassis Management Controller (CMC) error log and
resolve the condition as soon as possible.
Normal-operation LEDs
After POST is complete and if no diagnostics are being run, LEDs are used to monitor the state and
health of the SAN I/O Module, which are listed in Table 7. The green and amber port LEDs are
shown as steady, flashing, or flickering, depending on the SAN I/O Module operating mode. When
LEDs are off, there is no light or signal carrier (for example, no module or cable) for the media
interface. The green and amber switch LEDs are shown as steady or flashing depending on
whether the SAN I/O Module has power, is up and running, or results in an error.
TABLE 7 Interpreting front panel LEDs during normal operation
LED type LED color and state Description
LED (diagnostic) Off (no light) • No light or signal carrier (no module or no cable
for media interface)
• No license
Steady amber Receiving light or signal carrier, but not yet online
Slow flashing amber
(2-second intervals)
Disabled (result of diagnostics or portDisable
command)
Fast flashing amber
(1/2- second intervals)
Error (fault with port)
FC external port status LED Off (no light) • No light or signal carrier (no module or no cable
for media interface)
• No license
Steady green • Online (connected with external device over
cable)
• Normal active port, but no activity
Slow flashing green Online, but segmented (loopback cable or
incompatible switch)
Fast flashing green Internal loopback (diagnostic)
Flickering green Normal active port (frames flowing through port)
Steady amber Signal is present but not online
Slow flashing amber Disabled port (less than 2-second interval)
Fast flashing amber Error or fault with port (less than 1/2-second interval)Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 37
53-1002576-02
Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules 4
Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules
Complete the following steps to remove and replace a failed SAN I/O Module.
NOTE
Before beginning this procedure, ensure that you have a replacement SAN I/O Module or filler panel
available because you do not want to leave the slot on the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure
open for an extended period of time. The slot must be filled with either a replacement SAN I/O
Module or a filler panel to maintain proper air flow.
1. Back up the SAN I/O Module configuration to an FTP server using the copy configUpload
command, then complete the prompts that follow. For more information on backing up a
configuration, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide.
The configUpload command uploads the SAN I/O Module configuration to the server, making it
available for downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module, if necessary.
NOTE
It is recommended that you back up the configuration on a regular basis to ensure that a
complete configuration is available for downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module.
2. Using the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure, ensure that all port activity used in the SAN
I/O Module and all services are stopped.
For details about port management, refer to the documentation that comes with your Dell
M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. Verify there is no activity by viewing the SAN I/O Module
LEDs. For details about LED activity, refer to “Interpreting SAN I/O Module LED activity” on
page 35.
3. Disconnect all cables from the SFP+ transceivers, then remove the transceivers from the
external ports. For more information, refer to “Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and
cables” on page 39.
SAN I/O Module status LED Off (no light) SAN I/O Module is off or power supplies for the Blade
Server or onboard DCC have failed
Steady green No errors and all ports are ready for use
Steady amber Boot-up state, port(s) offline, or in reset state
Blinking (green or amber) One or more environmental ranges are exceeded, or
error log contains diagnostic error messages
NOTE: The LED may blink during testing.
SAN I/O Module power LED Off (no light) SAN I/O Module is off or power supplies for the Dell
M1000e Blade Server Enclosure or onboard DCC
have failed
Green Normal operation and power supply is functioning.
properly. Power is supplied by the Dell M1000e Blade
Server Enclosure
Server management LED Blue or Amber Indicates management health status; controlled by
Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure CMC
For details, refer to the Dell PowerEdge M1000e
Enclosure Owner’s Manual.
TABLE 7 Interpreting front panel LEDs during normal operation (Continued)38 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Removing and replacing SAN I/O Modules
For added convenience, you can refer to Figure 7, which provides the generic process for
removing an SFP+ transceiver from a port.
FIGURE 7 Removing an SFP+ transceiver from a port
4. Disconnect the RJ-45 Ethernet cable from the COM serial port.
5. Press the release latch to free the release lever. Refer to Figure 3 on page 13.
6. Gently pull the release lever down and toward you to release the SAN I/O Module.
You will feel the SAN I/O Module unseat and move out of the I/O module bay approximately
0.6 cm (0.25 inch).
7. Slide the SAN I/O Module out of the I/O module bay and set it aside.
8. Insert the replacement SAN I/O Module in the I/O module bay of the Dell M1000e Blade
Server Enclosure. You must complete this step within 60 seconds.
ATTENTION
If you are not inserting a replacement SAN I/O Module in the I/O module bay, use a filler panel
to fill the empty slot to maintain proper air flow and cooling. Do not leave the slot empty.
9. Reinsert the SFP+ transceivers that you removed in step 3.
1 Cable release clip 3 Opening the bale on the SFP+
2 Disconnecting the cable 4 Removing the SFP+
SFP Bale
1 3
Cable
Release
2
SFP
4Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 39
53-1002576-02
Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables 4
10. Reconnect the cables that you disconnected in step 3.
For additional information about connecting cables, refer to “Installation and safety guidelines
when handling cables” on page 16, and the documentation that comes with the SFP+
transceivers to which the cables have been connected.
11. (Optional) Reconnect the RJ-45 Ethernet cable that you disconnected in step 4.
12. Establish a connection to the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure from the Chassis
Management Controller (CMC).
Removing and replacing SFP+ transceivers and cables
1. Review “Installation and safety guidelines when handling cables” on page 16.
2. Disconnect the cable from the SFP+ transceiver.
3. Remove the SFP+ transceiver according to the manufacturer’s instructions, or as shown in
Figure 7.
The figure illustrates the process for removing the cable from the transceiver, and then
removing the transceiver from the port.
NOTE
The appearance of your SFP+ transceivers might differ slightly from the transceiver shown in
Figure 7, but the steps for removal are the same.
4. Insert the replacement SFP+ transceiver in the external port on the SAN I/O Module until it is
firmly seated and the latching mechanism clicks.
SFP+ transceivers are keyed to ensure correct orientation. If a transceiver does not install
easily, ensure that it is correctly oriented.
ATTENTION
Be sure to use only Brocade-branded SFP+ transceivers. If unapproved products are used, a
fault will occur on the port.
For instructions specific to the type of transceiver, visit the MyBrocade web site at:
http://my.brocade.com
5. Insert the cable in the SFP+ transceiver until the latching mechanism clicks.
NOTE
Before inserting the cables, it is recommended that you refer to “Installation and safety
guidelines when handling cables” on page 16.
CAUTION
A 50-micron cable should not be bent to a radius less than 2 inches under full tensile load and
1.2 inches with no tensile load.40 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Switch management
Switch management
You can access the SAN I/O Module from either the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure Chassis
Management Controller (CMC), or directly from the SAN I/O Module.
Managing the SAN I/O Module can be performed using Web Tools, through Brocade Network
Advisor (BNA) management software, which offers a holistic view of the SAN, or through the CLI,
which is accessible using Telnet/SSH, or the local RJ-45 serial port.
• Brocade Web Tools—An embedded graphical user interface (GUI) that enables administrators
to monitor and manage single or small fabrics, switches, and ports. Web Tools is launched
directly from a web browser or from the Brocade Network Advisor. Refer to the Brocade Web
Tools Administrator’s Guide for details about using the application.
• Brocade Network Advisor (BNA)—A management application that provides centralized
management of the network using a graphical user interface (GUI), as well as quick access to
all product configuration applications. Refer to the Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual
for details about using the application.
• Command-line interface (CLI)—The command-line interface uses Fabric OS. (Refer to the
product release notes for version information.) Refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command
Reference Manual for supported commands.
From the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure CMC, you can connect to the SAN I/O Module by:
• Entering the connect switch-x command at the command prompt, which connects by way of an
internal serial port.
• From the CMC GUI by selecting I/O Module Overview from the left navigation panel, which
launches the Web Tools application.
• Using Telnet or SSH to access the SAN I/O Module CLI.
• Through the CMC Ethernet physical connection after assigning an IP address to the SAN I/O
Module.
Viewing the configuration
Use the configShow -all command to display all configuration data for the SAN I/O Module.
A sample configuration is provided.
switch :admin> configshow -all
[Configuration upload Information]
Configuration Format = 2.0
date = Tue Oct 7 14:54:20 2008
FOS version = v6.2.0.0
Number of LS = 3
[Chassis Configuration Begin]
[fcRouting]
fcRoute.backboneFabricId:100
fcRoute.fcrState:2
fcRouteParam.maxLsanCount:3000
fcRoute.port.8.xportAdmin:DISABLED
fcRoute.port.8.fabricId:4
fcRoute.port.8.ratov:10000
fcRoute.port.8.edtov:2000
fcRoute.port.8.frontConfigDid:160
fcRoute.port.8.portType:400Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 41
53-1002576-02
Upgrading or downgrading firmware 4
fcRoute.port.8.portMode:0
fcRoute.port.8.autoElp:7
fcRoute.port.9.xportAdmin:DISABLED
fcRoute.port.9.fabricId:5
fcRoute.port.9.ratov:10000
fcRoute.port.9.edtov:2000
fcRoute.port.9.frontConfigDid:160
fcRoute.port.9.portType:400
fcRoute.port.9.portMode:0
fcRoute.port.9.autoElp:7
fcRouteParam.port.8.rportCost:0
fcRouteParam.port.9.rportCost:0
fcRoute.xlate.persistxdState:1
fcRouteParam.lsan.tagCnt:0
For more information on command options, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference.
Upgrading or downgrading firmware
Use the firmwareDownload command to download firmware from a remote host. You can download
firmware interactively. A sample configuration is provided.
switch:admin> firmwaredownload
Server Name or IP Address: 192.168.32.10
User Name: admin
File Name: ~admin/dist/FOS7.0.0/
Network Protocol(1-auto-select, 2-FTP, 3-SCP, 4-SFTP) [1]:
Password:********
For more information on command options, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference.
Changing the default account password
The SAN I/O Module automatically prompts you to change the default account password after
logging in for the first time. If you do not change the password, you are prompted to do so after
each subsequent login until the default password has been changed.
The default account password can be changed from its original value only when prompted
immediately following the login; the password cannot be changed using the passwd command later
in the session. If you skip the prompt and then later decide to change the password, you must log
out and then log in again.
The passwd command changes the password for your own account.
Use the “admin” account to log in to the switch for the first time and to perform the basic
configuration tasks. The default password for all of these accounts is “password”.42 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Backing up the configuration
Changing the default account password at login
1. Connect to the SAN I/O Module and log in using the default administrative account.
2. At each of the “Enter new password” prompts, enter a new password.
User-defined passwords can have from 8 through 40 characters. They must begin with an
alphabetic character and can include numeric characters, the period (.), and the
underscore ( _ ). Passwords are case-sensitive.
A sample output of changing passwords is provided.
login: admin
Password:
Please change your passwords now.
Use Control-C to exit or press 'Enter' key to proceed.
for user - root
Changing password for root
Enter new password:
Password changed.
Saving password to stable storage.
Password saved to stable storage successfully.
(output truncated)
For more information on setting passwords, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide.
Backing up the configuration
Prior to backing up a configuration for the SAN I/O Module, you can check the configuration by
initiating the configShow and fabricShow commands.
• The configShow command displays switch and port status.
• The fabricShow command displays fabric membership information.
Complete the following steps to back up the switch configuration to an FTP server.
1. Open a Telnet or SSH session to the SAN I/O Module.
2. Enter configUpload, which uploads the switch configuration to the server, making it available
for downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module, if necessary.
3. Follow the prompts to upload the configuration.
NOTE
It is recommended that you back up the configuration on a regular basis to ensure that a complete
configuration is available for downloading to a replacement SAN I/O Module.
For specific instructions about how to back up a configuration, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS
Administrator’s Guide. For detailed information about the commands used in backing up a
configuration, refer to the Brocade Fabric OS Command Reference. Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 43
53-1002576-02
Locating the serial number information 4
Locating the serial number information
Before contacting service support, be sure to obtain the SAN I/O Module serial number.
NOTE
When contacting service support, you will also need the Dell service tag. The service tag label is
located on the outside of SAN I/O Module; however, the label is not visible when the SAN I/O Module
is inserted in the Dell M1000e Blade Server Enclosure. You can access the service tag number using
cli commands.
To locate the serial number, invoke the chassisShow command. The SAN I/O Module serial number
is displayed, along with other data.
If your SAN I/O Module was shipped as a single unit, the service tag and serial number are one and
the same when viewing the command output. In the sample configuration output provided below,
the serial number and service tag are shown as 8RTYJN1.
CHASSIS/WWN Unit: 1
Header Version: 2
Factory Part Num: 40-1000789-04
Factory Serial Num: CFU0428H00W
Manufacture: Day: 12 Month: 7 Year: 2012
Update: Day: 30 Month: 8 Year: 2012
Time Alive: 21 days
Time Awake: 3 days
ID: BRD0000CA
Part Num: SLKWRM0000E14
Serial Num: 8RTYJN1
For additional Dell service tag information, refer to Dell Chassis Management Controller Firmware
Version 4.x User Guide.44 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
4 Locating the serial number informationBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 45
53-1002576-02
Appendix
SAN I/O Module Specifications A
In this appendix
•Processor and memory specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
•Weight and physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
•Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
•Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
•Architectural specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
•Supported HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
•Fibre Channel standards compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
•Regulatory compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
•Environmental regulation compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Processor and memory specifications
Table 8 lists processor and memory used in the SAN I/O Module.
Weight and physical dimensions
Table 9 lists the weight and physical dimensions of the SAN I/O Module.
TABLE 8 Processor and memory specifications
Memory type Value
PowerPC 440EPX processor 667 MHz
SDRAM 1 GB DDR2 - for system memory at 64 bits with
8 ECC operating at 166 MHz
Boot Flash 4 MB
Compact Flash 1 GB
TABLE 9 Weight and physical dimensions
Dimension Measurement
Height 32.48 mm (1.27 in)
Width 272.75 mm (10.74 in)
Depth 307.24 mm (12.09 in)
Weight 2.10 kg (4.65 pounds) without media46 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
A Environmental specifications
Environmental specifications
Table 10 lists the environmental specifications for the SAN I/O Module.
Electrical specifications
Table 11 lists the electrical specifications for the SAN I/O Module.
Architectural specifications
The SAN I/O Module meets the specifications shown in Table 12.
TABLE 10 Environmental specifications
Condition Operating Non-operating
Temperature 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F) -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F)
Humidity 10% to 90%, non-condensing at
29°C (84.2°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing at
38°C (100.4 °F)
Altitude Up to 3,048 m (10,000 ft) 10,668 m (35,000 ft)
Shock 20 G for 6 ms 50 G with velocity change of 4216
mm/sec squared
Vibration 0.4 G at 5–500 Hz for 60 minutes 0.5 G at 2–200 Hz for 15 minutes
Air flow 30°C (86 °F) Ambient: Approx. 3CFM
40°C (104°F) Ambient: Approx. 9CFM
None required
TABLE 11 Electrical specifications
Feature Description
DC input 12V and 3.3V from chassis
Power consumption 30W (idle) to 40W (maximum)
TABLE 12 Architectural specifications
Feature Description
Scalability Refer to the current Brocade Scalability Guidelines publication.
Certified maximum Refer to the current Brocade Scalability Guidelines publication.
Performance 4.25/8.50/14.025 Gbps line speed, full duplex
Fabric latency
(Native Fabric mode only)
<1.2 µsec with no contention
Maximum frame size 2112-byte payload
Class of service Class 2
Class 3
Class F (interswitch frames)Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 47
53-1002576-02
Supported HBAs A
Supported HBAs
For information regarding supported Fibre Channel mezzanine adapters, refer to Dell-specific
product information.
For additional information, refer to your Dell PowerEdge documentation.
Fibre Channel standards compliance
The SAN I/O Module meets or exceeds the Fibre Channel standards for compliance, performance,
and feature capabilities as defined in the Brocade standards compliance list. This information is
available at:
http://www.brocade.com/products/interop/standards_compliance.jsp
Regulatory compliance
This section describes the regulatory compliance requirements for the Product Name.
FCC warning (US only)
This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own
expense.
Port types Fabric OS Native mode
• E_Port (expansion port)
• F_Port (fabric-enabled port)
• U_Port (self-discovery based on switch type)
AG mode
• F_Port (fabric-enabled port)
• N_Port (NPIV-enabled port)
Fabric services
(Native Fabric mode only)
Simple Name Server, Registered State Change Notification (RSCN)
TABLE 12 Architectural specifications (Continued)
Feature Description48 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
A Regulatory compliance
BSMI statement (Taiwan)
KC statement (Republic of Korea)
VCCI statement (Japan)
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by
Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment,
radio disturbance might arise. When such trouble occurs, the user might be required to take
corrective actions.
CE statement
ATTENTION
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product might cause radio interference,
and the user might be required to take corrective measures.
The standards compliance label on the SAN I/O Module contains the CE mark which indicates that
this system conforms to the provisions of the following European Council directives, laws, and
standards:
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC and the Complementary Directives
92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC
• Low Voltage Directive (LVD) 73/23/EEC and the Complementary Directive 93/68/EEC
• EN50082-2/EN55024:1998 (European Immunity Requirements)
- EN61000-3-2/JEIDA (European and Japanese Harmonics Spec)
- EN61000-3-3Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 49
53-1002576-02
Regulatory compliance A
Canadian requirements
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations, ICES-003 Class A.
Laser compliance
This equipment contains Class 1 laser products and complies with FDA Radiation Performance
Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter I and the international laser safety standard EN60825-1:1994
+A1+A2.
CAUTION
Use only optical transceivers that are qualified by Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. and
comply with the FDA Class 1 radiation performance requirements defined in 21 CFR Subchapter
I, and with IEC825-2 to EN60825-1:1994 +A1+A2. Optical products that do not comply with
these standards might emit light that is hazardous to the eyes.
RTC battery
ATTENTION
Do not attempt to replace the real-time clock (RTC) battery. There is danger of explosion if the battery
is incorrectly replaced or disposed of. Contact your switch supplier if the real-time clock begins to
lose time.
Regulatory compliance standards
Table 13 lists the regulatory compliance standards for which the SAN I/O Module is certified.
TABLE 13 Regulatory compliance standards
Country Standards Agency Certifications and Markings
Safety EMC Safety EMC
United States Bi-Nat UL/CSA 60950-1
2nd Ed or latest
ANSI C63.4 cCSAus FCC Class A and
Statement
Canada Bi-Nat UL/CSA 60950-1
2nd Ed or latest
ICES-003 Class A cCSAus ICES A and Statement
Japan CISPR22 and JEIDA
(Harmonics)
VCCI-A and Statement
European Union EN60950-1 or latest EN55022 and
EN55024
TUV Type CE marking
Australia, New Zealand EN55022 or CISPR22
or AS/NZS CISPR22
C-Tick mark
Korea KN22 and KN24 KC mark Class A50 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
A Environmental regulation compliance
Environmental regulation compliance
This section describes the China ROHS environmental regulatory compliance requirements for the
SAN I/O Module.
Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) Disclaimer
In no event do the EPUP logos shown on the product and field-replaceable units (FRUs) alter or
expand that warranty that Brocade provides with respect to its products as set forth in the
applicable contract between Brocade and its customer. Brocade hereby disclaims all other
warranties and representations with respect to the information contained on this CD including the
implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement.
The EPUP assumes that the product will be used under normal conditions in accordance with the
operating manual of the product.
China RoHS
The contents included in this section are per the requirements of the People's Republic of China-
Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information products.
Names and Contents of the Toxic and Hazardous Substances or Elements
In accordance with China's Management Measures on the Control of Pollution caused by Electronic
Information products (Decree No. 39 by the Ministry of Information Industry), the following
information is provided regarding the names and concentration level of Hazardous substances (HS)
which may be contained in this product.
⦃ֱՓ⫼ᳳ䰤 (EPUP) ܡ䋷ໄᯢ˖
EPUP ᷛᖫϡӮߎ⦄ѻક FRU ⱘᬍ㺙ѻકЁˈгϡӮᇍ Brocade
᠔ᦤկⱘⳌ݇ѻકֱׂᴵℒ˄䆹ֱׂᴵℒ Brocade
ঞ݊ᅶ᠋䯈䖒៤ⱘ䗖⫼ড়ৠЁ߫ߎ˅䖯㸠㸹DŽᇍѢℸ CD
ϞࣙⱘⳌֵ݇ᙃˈབ䗖䫔ᗻǃ䩜ᇍ⡍ᅮ⫼䗨ⱘ䗖⫼ᗻ䴲։ᴗᗻⱘᱫ⼎ֱ䆕ˈBr
ocade ℸ䚥䞡ໄᯢᴀ݀ৌᇍѢϢϞ䗄ֵᙃⳌ݇ⱘ᠔᳝݊Ҫֱ䆕䰜䗄ὖϡ䋳䋷DŽ
EPUP ؛䆒Āѻક᪡ݠāЁ⊼ᯢⱘᐌ㾘ᴵӊϟՓ⫼䆹ѻકDŽ
䙉ᅜ⦃๗⊩㾘
Ё RoHS
ᴀ㡖Ёࣙⱘݙᆍ䛑䙉ᅜњЁढҎ⇥݅lj⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક∵ᶧࠊㅵ⧚ࡲ⊩NJⱘ
㽕∖DŽBrocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual 51
53-1002576-02
Environmental regulation compliance A
X indicates that the concentration of such hazardous/toxic substance in all the units of
homogeneous material of such component is higher than the SJ/T11363-2006 Requirements for
Concentration Limits.
O indicates that no such substances are used or that the concentration is within the
aforementioned limits.
China ROHS Hazardous Substances/Toxic Substances (HS/TS) Concentration Chart
Name of the
Component
Hazardous/Toxic Substance/Elements
Lead (PB) Mercury
(Hg)
Cadium
(CD)
Hexavalent
Chromium
(CR6+)
Polybrominated
Biphenyl (PBB)
Polybrominated
Diphenyl Ether
(PBDE)
Fibre Channel
Switch
XOOO O O
PCBA cards X O O O O O
SFPs (optical
cable
connectors)
XOOO O O
Sheet Metal X O O O O O
Mechanical
brackets and
Slides
XOOO O O
Software/
Documentation
CDs
OO O O O O
CHINA ROHS᳝ᆇ⠽䋼/᳝↦⠽䋼(HS/TS)䰤䞣߫㸼
᳝↦Ϣ᳝ᆇ⠽䋼ܗ㋴ⱘৡ⿄ঞ䞣
ḍЁⱘ<<⬉ᄤֵᙃѻક∵ᶧࠊㅵ⧚ࡲ⊩>>
(ֵᙃѻϮ䚼39োҸ)ˈᴀ݀ৌᦤկҹϟ᳝݇ѻકЁৃ㛑᳝ⱘ᳝ᆇ⠽䋼(HS)ⱘৡ⿄ঞ䞣∈ᑇⱘ
ֵᙃDŽ
Џ㽕䚼ӊৡ⿄ ᳝ᆇ/᳝↦⠽䋼ܗ㋴
䪙
˄PB˅
∲
Hg˅
䬝
CD˅
݁Ӌ䫀
˄CR6+˅
⒈㘨㣃
˄PBB˅
⒈Ѡ㣃䝮
PB˅DE˅
ܝ㑸䗮䘧Ѹᤶᴎ XOO O O O
㒓䏃ᵓ䚼ӊ XOO O O O
SFP˄ܝ㑸 XOO O O O
༈˅
䩷䞥ӊ XOO O O O
O OO O O O
ᴎẄᬃᶊঞ⒥䔼 XOO O O O
䕃ӊ/᭛ḷܝⲬ
X 㸼⼎ℸ㉏䚼ӊݙৠ䋼ᴤ᭭Ёⱘ᳝ᆇ/᳝↦䞣催ѢSJ/T11363-2006ⱘ䰤䞣㽕∖DŽ
O 㸼⼎Փ⫼ℸ㉏⠽䋼݊䞣ԢѢϞ䗄䰤䞣㽕∖DŽ
˄ ˄52 Brocade M6505 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware Reference Manual
53-1002576-02
A Environmental regulation complianceBrocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide 53
53-1002576-02
Index
A
access gateway
enhancements, 3
storage arrays, 5
access gateway mode, 1, 3, 5
default port mapping, 33
Adaptive Networking
license, 6
Advanced Performance Monitoring
enhancements, 30
license, 6
ag --modeShow command, 32
ag --modeDisable command, 32
architectural specifications, 46
ASIC, 6
Australia
regulatory compliance, 50
B
backplane connectors, 9
base model, 11
battery statement, 49
beacon, 34
boot, 36
Brocade ASIC, 6
Brocade Fabric OS cli, 40
Brocade ISL Trunking
license, 5
Brocade Network Advisor, 40
Brocade Web Tools, 40
BSMI statement (Taiwan), 48
C
cables
caution, 16, 39
guidelines, 16
part numbers, 17
radius, 16
Canada
regulatory compliance, 49
Canadian requirements, 49
caution
indicator, ix
CE statement, 48
chassisShow command, 43
China RoHS, 50, 52
commands
ag --modeDisable, 32
ag --modeShow, 32
chassisShow, 43
configShow, 40, 42
configUpload, 27, 32, 37, 42
configure, 25
connect, 22
connect switch, 21
connect switch-x, 14, 21, 40
errShow, 34
fabricShow, 27, 42
firmwareDownload, 41
ipAddrSet, 23
ipAddrShow, 22
licenseIdShow, xi
passwd, 41
supportSave, xi
switchDisable, 25, 32
switchShow, xi, 27, 31, 32, 34
wwn, xi
configShow command, 40, 42
configUpload command, 27, 32, 37, 42
configuration
backing up, 42
configure command, 25
connect command, 22
connect switch-x command, 14, 21, 4054 Brocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide
53-1002576-02
Index
D
diagnostics, 16
LED operation, 36
dimensions, 45
DPOD (see dynamic ports on demand)
dynamic ports on demand, 3, 4
licensing, 4
E
electrostatic discharge, 11
enhanced group management, 3
enterprise model, 11
EPUP disclaimer, 50
errShow command, 34
ESD, 11
Ethernet connection, 14
European Union
regulatory compliance, 50
external ports, 1
F
Fabric OS, 2, 33
native mode, 5
release notes, x
fabric OS, 3
fabric OS native mode
changing from access gateway mode, 31
Fabric Watch
license, 6
fabricShow command, 27, 42
FCC warning (US only), 47
Fibre Channel
auto-negotiating ports, 2
auto-sensing ports, 5
ports, 1
Fibre Channel standards compliance, 47
firmwareDownload command, 41
FSPF, 29
FTP
firmware upgrades, 4
FTP server, 42
full model, 11
full-duplex
Ethernet ports, 2
G
guidelines
reliability, 12
static-sensitive devices, 12
H
handling
optical transceivers, 15
static-sensitive devices, 12
hazardous substances, 51
host OS, 2
I
internal ports, 1
Internet Explorer, 24
interoperability, 29
interpreting
LED activity, 35
POST results, 35
IP address
filtering, 3
modify using CMC CLI, 21
modify using CMC GUI, 21
modify using module CLI, 22
modifying default, 20
ipAddrSet command, 23
ipAddrShow command, 22
ISL Trunking, 3
groups, 5, 6
license, 6
J
Japan
regulatory compliance, 50
Java, 24Brocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide 55
53-1002576-02
Index
K
KC statement (Republic of Korea), 48
Korea
regulatory compliance, 50
L
laser compliance, 49
LED, 34, 35
LED activity
interpreting, 35
LEDs
ACT led, 36
diagnostics, 36
LINK led, 36
management health status, 2
normal operation, 36
port and port status, 8
POST, 36
power status, 8
server management status, 8
switch status, 2, 8
system power, 2
licenseIdShow command, xi
licenses
Adaptive Networking, 6
Advanced Performance Monitoring, 6
BNA, 6
Fabric Watch, 6
ISL Trunking, 6
Ports on Demand, 6
link initialization, 29
M
management
Brocade Network Advisor, 40
cli, 40
Web Tools, 40
management tool, 34
media
multi-mode, 17
models
base, 11
enterprise, 11
full, 11
multi-mode media, 17
N
native fabric mode, 1
port types, 6
New Zealand
regulatory complaince, 50
NPIV, 1, 5
NTP
client support, 4
O
operating system support, 33
operating systems
supported, 2
optical cabling, 16
optical transceivers
connection types, 10
guidelines, 15
handling, 15
inserting, 16
orientation, 16, 39
part numbers, 15
pre-installed, 10
removing, 39
replacing, 39
SFP+, 2
speed, 17
wavelength, 10
optional features
access gateway mode, 7
P
passwd command, 41
password
changing initial prompt, 42
port mapping, 33
port mirroring, 3
port negotiation, 33
ports
external, 1
internal, 1
serial console, 2
speed, 1
Ports on Demand
license, 656 Brocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide
53-1002576-02
Index
ports on demand
dynamic, 4
POST, 16, 34
LEDs
bootup, 36
results, 35
R
RBAC, 3
RCSN, 29
regulatory compliance, 47
Australia, 50
BSMI statement (Taiwan), 48
Canada, 49
Canadian requirements, 49
CE statement, 48
environmental, 50
European Union, 50
FCC warning (US only), 47
Japan, 50
KC statement (Republic of Korea), 48
Korea, 50
laser compliance, 49
New Zealand, 50
RTC battery, 49
United States, 49
VCCI staetment (Japan), 48
release latch, 13
locking, 14
operating, 14
release lever, 7, 13, 14
operating, 14, 38
reliability guidelines, 12
remote access, 14
role-based access control, 3
routing, 29
RTC battery statement, 49
runtime elements, 2
S
SAN I/O Module
accessing, 33
backplane connectors, 9
characteristics, 7
connecting to Ethernet, 24
connecting to fabric, 24
front panel, 7
hardware description, 7
nonport side, 9
physical dimensions and weight, 45
release latch, 13
release lever, 7, 13
removing, 37
replacing, 37
side view, 9
status, 35
serial console port, 2
serial number, xi
locating, 43
service level classes, 3
service tag, xi, 43
SFP+ (see also optical transceivers), 2, 10
SNMP
supported versions, 3
SNMP facilities, 29
specifications, 45
SSH, 42
static-sensitive devices, handling, 12
substances
hazardous, 51
hazardous concentration chart, 51
toxic, 51
supported HBAs, 47
supportSave command, xi
switch
serial number, xi
switch management
Brocade Network Advisor, 40
cli, 40
Web Tools, 40
switchDisable command, 25, 32
switchShow command, xi, 27, 31, 32, 34
system LEDs, 2Brocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide 57
53-1002576-02
Index
T
Telnet, 42
terminal session with I/O module, 22
toxic substances, 51
transceivers (see also optical transceivers), 10
translative mode, 29
trunking, 30
U
United States
regulatory compliance, 49
V
VCCI statement, 48
W
warning
indicator, ix
web browser, 24
Web Tools, 24
Java, 24
using to connect SAN I/O Module, 24
weight, 45
wwn command, xi
Z
zoning, 3, 6, 3358 Brocade M6505 16/8 Gbps Fibre Channel SAN I/O Module Hardware User’s Guide
53-1002576-02
Index
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Inspiron are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Windows and the Windows start button logo are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell under
license.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any
proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
December 2010 Rev. A00
Regulatory model: P07T series
Regulatory type: P07T001
Before You Begin
Battery Memory Module(s)
Keyboard
Hard Drive
Palm Rest
Power Button Board Wireless Mini-Card(s)
Audio Board
Coin-Cell Battery
Display
Camera Middle Cover
AC Adapter Connector
System Board
Processor Heat Sink
Speakers
Flashing the BIOS
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Back to Contents Page
AC Adapter Connector
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the AC Adapter Connector
Replacing the AC Adapter Connector
Removing the AC Adapter Connector
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
7. Remove the middle cover (see Removing the Middle Cover).
8. Remove the audio board (see Removing the Audio Board).
9. Lift and remove the bracket off the computer base as shown in the illustration.
10. Disconnect the AC adapter connector cable from the connector on the system board.
11. Make note of the cable routing and carefully dislodge the AC adapter connector cable from the routing guides.
12. Lift the AC adapter connector off the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 bracketReplacing the AC Adapter Connector
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Route the AC adapter connector cable and place the AC adapter connector on the computer base.
3. Connect the AC adapter connector cable to the connector on the system board.
4. Replace the bracket that secures the AC adapter connector on the computer base.
5. Replace the audio board (see Replacing the Audio Board).
6. Replace the middle cover (see Replacing the Middle Cover).
7. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
8. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
9. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
10. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
11. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
1 AC adapter connector cable 2 AC adapter connector
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Audio Board
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Audio Board
Replacing the Audio Board
Removing the Audio Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Disconnect the Mini-Card antenna cables from the Mini-Card(s).
7. Disconnect the audio cable and the speaker cable from their connectors on the audio board.
8. Remove the three screws that secure the audio board to the computer base.
9. Lift the audio board out of the computer base.
Replacing the Audio Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the connectors on the audio board with the slots on the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface.
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 audio cable connector 2 screws (3)
3 audio board 4 speaker cable connector
5 Mini-Cards3. Replace the three screws that secure the audio board to the computer base.
4. Connect the audio cable and the speaker cable to their respective connectors on the audio board.
5. Connect the Mini-Card antenna cables to the Mini-Card(s).
6. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
7. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
8. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
9. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Battery
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Battery
Replacing the Battery
Removing the Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Turn off the computer (see Turning Off Your Computer) and turn it over.
3. Slide the battery release latches to the unlock position.
4. Slide the battery out of the battery bay.
Replacing the Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Slide the battery into the battery bay, until it clicks into place.
Back to Contents Page
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Do not use batteries designed for
other Dell computers.
1 battery release latches (2) 2 battery
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Back to Contents Page
Before You Begin
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Recommended Tools
Turning Off Your Computer
Before Working Inside Your Computer
This manual provides instructions for removing and installing components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the
following conditions exist:
l You have performed the steps in Turning Off Your Computer and Before Working Inside Your Computer.
l You have read the safety information that shipped with your computer.
l A component can be replaced or—if purchased separately—installed by performing the removal procedure in the reverse order.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
l Phillips screwdriver
l Small flat-blade screwdriver
l Plastic scribe
l BIOS executable update program available at support.dell.com
Turning Off Your Computer
1. Save and close all open files and exit all open programs.
2. Shut down the operating system:
Click Start and then click Shut Down.
3. Ensure that the computer is turned off. If your computer did not automatically turn off when you shut down the operating system, press and hold the
power button until the computer turns off.
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help to ensure your own personal safety.
1. Ensure that the work surface is flat and clean to prevent the computer cover from being scratched.
2. Turn off your computer (see Turning Off Your Computer) and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all telephone or network cables from the computer.
CAUTION: To avoid losing data, save and close all open files and exit all open programs before you turn off your computer.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component by its edges, not by its pins.
CAUTION: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its pull-tab, not on the cable itself. Some cables have connectors with locking
tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep
them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented
and aligned.
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer.
CAUTION: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug the cable from the network device. 4. Press and eject any installed cards from the 7-in-1 Media Card Reader.
5. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets.
6. Disconnect all attached devices from your computer.
7. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
8. Turn the computer top-side up, open the computer, and press the power button to ground the system board.
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer. Back to Contents Page
Flashing the BIOS
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
The BIOS may require flashing when an update is available or when replacing the system board. To flash the BIOS:
1. Turn on the computer.
2. Go to support.dell.com/support/downloads.
3. Click Select Model.
4. Locate the BIOS update file for your computer:
If you have your computer's Service Tag:
a. Click Enter a Service Tag.
b. Enter your computer's Service Tag in the Enter a service tag: field, click Go, and proceed to step 5.
If you do not have your computer's Service Tag:
a. Select the type of product in the Select Your Product Family list.
b. Select the product brand in the Select Your Product Line list.
c. Select the product model number in the Select Your Product Model list.
d. Click Confirm.
5. A list of results appear on the screen. Click BIOS.
6. Click Download Now to download the latest BIOS file.
The File Download window appears.
7. Click Save to save the file on your desktop. The file downloads to your desktop.
8. Click Close if the Download Complete window appears.
The file icon appears on your desktop and is titled the same as the downloaded BIOS update file.
9. Double-click the file icon on the desktop and follow the instructions on the screen.
Back to Contents Page
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located on a label at the bottom of your computer.
NOTE: If you have selected a different model and want to start over again, click Start Over on the top right of the menu.Back to Contents Page
Internal Module With Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Removing the Bluetooth Module
Replacing the Bluetooth Module
If you ordered a card with Bluetooth® wireless technology with your computer, it is already installed.
Removing the Bluetooth Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
5. Remove the screw that secures the Bluetooth module to the connector on the system board.
6. Lift the Bluetooth module away from the system board.
Replacing the Bluetooth Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the connector on the Bluetooth module with the connector on the system board and press the Bluetooth module until it is fully seated.
3. Replace the screw that secures the Bluetooth module to the system board.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 Bluetooth module 2 screw4. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
5. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
6. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.Back to Contents Page
Camera
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Camera
Replacing the Camera
Removing the Camera
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
7. Remove the display bezel (see Removing the Display Bezel).
8. Disconnect the camera cable from the connector on the camera module.
9. Lift the camera module off the display back cover.
Replacing the Camera
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Place the camera module on the display back cover using the alignment posts.
3. Press down on the camera module to secure it to the display back cover.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 display back cover 2 camera module
3 camera cable connector4. Connect the camera cable to the connector on the camera module.
5. Replace the display bezel (see Replacing the Display Bezel).
6. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
7. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
8. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
9. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
10. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Coin-Cell Battery
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery
Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery
Removing the Coin-Cell Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Disconnect the coin-cell battery cable from the connector on the system board.
7. The coin-cell battery is glued to the system board. Using a plastic scribe, gently pry the coin-cell battery off the system board.
Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. With the adhesive side of the coin-cell battery facing down, press the coin-cell battery on to the system board.
3. Connect the coin-cell battery cable to the connector on the system board.
4. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
5. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
6. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
7. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 coin-cell battery 2 system board connectorBack to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Processor Module
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Removing the Processor Module
Replacing the Processor Module
Removing the Processor Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
5. Remove the processor heat sink (see Removing the Processor Heat Sink).
6. To loosen the ZIF socket, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver and rotate the ZIF-socket cam screw counterclockwise until it comes to the cam stop.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
CAUTION: To prevent intermittent contact between the ZIF-socket cam screw and the processor when removing or replacing the processor, press
to apply slight pressure to the center of the processor while turning the cam screw.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the processor, hold the screwdriver so that it is perpendicular to the processor when turning the cam screw.
1 ZIF socket 2 pin-1 corner
3 ZIF-socket cam screw
CAUTION: To ensure maximum cooling for the processor, do not touch the heat transfer areas on the processor thermal-cooling assembly. The
oils in your skin can reduce the heat transfer capability of the thermal pads.
CAUTION: When removing the processor module, pull the module straight up. Be careful not to bend the pins on the processor module.7. Lift the processor module from the ZIF socket.
Replacing the Processor Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the pin-1 corner of the processor module with the pin-1 corner of the ZIF socket, then insert the processor module.
When the processor module is properly seated, all four corners are aligned at the same height. If one or more corners of the module are higher than the
others, the module is not seated properly.
3. Tighten the ZIF socket by turning the cam screw clockwise to secure the processor module to the system board.
4. Replace the processor heat sink (see Replacing the Processor Heat Sink).
5. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
6. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
7. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
NOTE: If a new processor is installed, you will receive a new thermal-cooling assembly, which will include an affixed thermal pad, or you will receive a
new thermal pad along with documentation to illustrate proper installation.
NOTE: The pin-1 corner of the processor module has a triangle that aligns with the triangle on the pin-1 corner of the ZIF socket.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the processor module, hold the screwdriver perpendicular to the processor module when turning the cam screw.
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.Back to Contents Page
Processor Heat Sink
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Processor Heat Sink
Replacing the Processor Heat Sink
Removing the Processor Heat Sink
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the system board (see Removing the System Board).
3. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board connector.
4. Loosen the four captive screws that secure the processor heat sink to the system board in sequential order (indicated next to the captive screws).
5. Remove the processor heat sink from the system board.
Replacing the Processor Heat Sink
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the four captive screws on the processor heat sink with the screw holes on the system board and tighten the screws in sequential order (indicated
next to the captive screws).
3. Connect the fan cable to the system board connector.
4. Replace the system board (see Replacing the System Board).
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
WARNING: If you remove the processor heat sink from the computer when the heat sink is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the processor heat sink.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 fan cable 2 captive screws (4)
3 processor heat sink
NOTE: The original thermal pad can be reused if the original processor and processor heat sink are reinstalled together. If either the processor or
processor heat sink is replaced, use the thermal pad provided in the kit to ensure that thermal conductivity is achieved.
NOTE: This procedure assumes that you have already removed the processor heat sink and are ready to replace it.
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page
Display
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Display Assembly
Display Bezel
Display Panel
Display-Panel Brackets
Display Assembly
Removing the Display Assembly
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Disconnect the Mini-Card antenna cables from the Mini-Card(s).
7. Make note of the cable routing and carefully dislodge the Mini-Card antenna cables from the routing guides.
8. Disconnect the display cable from the system board connector.
9. Remove the two screws (one on each side) that secure the display assembly to the computer base.
10. Lift and remove the display assembly off the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 display cable connector 2 Mini-Card antenna cablesReplacing the Display Assembly
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Place the display assembly in position and replace the two screws (one on each side) that secure the display assembly to the computer base.
3. Connect the display cable to the system board connector.
4. Route the Mini-Card antenna cables through the routing guides on the computer base.
5. Connect the Mini-Card antenna cables to the Mini-Card(s).
6. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
7. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
8. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
9. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Display Bezel
Removing the Display Bezel
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
3. Remove the two rubber pads covering the screws on the display bezel.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the display bezel to the display back cover.
5. Using your fingertips, carefully pry up the inside edges of the display bezel to remove it from the display back cover.
1 display assembly 2 screws (2)
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.
CAUTION: The display bezel is extremely fragile. Be careful when removing it to prevent damaging the bezel. Replacing the Display Bezel
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the display bezel over the display back cover, and gently snap into place.
3. Replace the two screws that secure the display bezel to the display back cover.
4. Replace the two rubber pads that cover the display bezel screws.
5. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
Display Panel
Removing the Display Panel
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
3. Remove the display bezel (see Removing the Display Bezel).
4. Remove the four screws that secure the display panel to the display back cover.
5. Disconnect the camera cable from the connector on the camera module.
1 rubber pads (2) 2 screws (2)
3 display bezel
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. 6. Lift the display panel off the display back cover.
7. Turn the display panel over and place it on a clean surface.
8. Peel the tape covering the display cable and lift the display cable off the back of the display panel.
9. Lift the tape that secures the display cable to the display cable connector and disconnect the display cable.
Replacing the Display Panel
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Connect the display cable to the display cable connector and secure it with the tape.
3. Place the display cable on the back of the display panel and secure it with the tape.
4. Turn the display panel over and place it on the display back cover.
5. Connect the camera cable to the connector on the camera module.
6. Replace the four screws that secure the display panel to the display back cover.
1 camera cable connector 2 display panel
3 screws (4)
1 back of the display panel 2 display cable
3 display cable connector 4 tape7. Replace the display bezel (see Replacing the Display Bezel).
8. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
Display-Panel Brackets
Removing the Display-Panel Brackets
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
3. Remove the display bezel (see Removing the Display Bezel).
4. Remove the display panel (see Removing the Display Panel).
5. Gently peel the aluminum foil that covers the display-panel bracket screws.
6. Remove the four screws that secure the display-panel brackets to the display back cover.
7. Lift the display-panel brackets off the display back cover.
Replacing the Display-Panel Brackets
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Place the display-panel brackets on the display back cover.
3. Replace the four screws that secure the display-panel brackets to the display back cover.
4. Adhere the aluminum foil over the display-panel bracket screws.
5. Replace the display panel (see Replacing the Display Panel).
6. Replace the display bezel (see Replacing the Display Bezel).
7. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.
1 display-panel brackets (2) 2 aluminum foil
3 screws (4)Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Hard Drive
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Hard Drive
Replacing the Hard Drive
Removing the Hard Drive
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Remove the two screws that secure the hard-drive assembly to the computer base.
5. Using the pull-tab, slide the hard-drive assembly to the side to disconnect it from the connector on the system board.
6. Lift the hard-drive assembly out of the computer base.
7. Remove the four screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive.
8. Lift the hard-drive bracket off the hard drive.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
WARNING: If you remove the hard drive from the computer when the drive is hot, do not touch the metal housing of the hard drive.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To prevent data loss, turn off your computer (see Turning Off Your Computer) before removing the hard drive. Do not remove the hard
drive while the computer is On or in Sleep state.
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
CAUTION: Hard drives are extremely fragile. Exercise care when handling the hard drive.
NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for hard drives from sources other than Dell.
NOTE: If you are installing a hard drive from a source other than Dell, you need to install an operating system, drivers, and utilities on the new hard
drive.
CAUTION: When the hard drive is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging (see "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge"
in the safety instructions that shipped with your computer).
1 screws (2) 2 hard-drive assembly
3 pull-tabReplacing the Hard Drive
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the new hard drive from its packaging.
Save the original packaging for storing or shipping the hard drive.
3. Place the hard drive in the hard-drive bracket.
4. Replace the four screws that secure the hard-drive bracket to the hard drive.
5. Place the hard-drive assembly in the computer base.
6. Using the pull-tab, slide the hard-drive assembly into the connector on the system board.
7. Replace the two screws that secure the hard-drive assembly to the computer base.
8. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
9. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
10. Install the operating system for your computer, as needed. See "Restoring Your Operating System" in the Setup Guide.
11. Install the drivers and utilities for your computer, as needed.
Back to Contents Page
1 hard-drive bracket 2 hard drive
3 screws (4)
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Middle Cover
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Middle Cover
Replacing the Middle Cover
Removing the Middle Cover
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
7. Remove the two screws that secure the middle cover to the computer base.
8. Turn the computer over.
9. Gently pry out the middle cover and remove it from the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer. Replacing the Middle Cover
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the tabs on the middle cover with the slots on the computer base and snap the middle cover into place.
3. Turn the computer over.
4. Replace the two screws that secure the middle cover to the computer base.
5. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
6. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
7. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
8. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
9. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
1 middle cover
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Power Button Module
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Removing the Power Button Module
Replacing the Power Button Module
Removing the Power Button Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
5. Turn the palm rest over.
6. Remove the screw that secures the power button module to the palm rest.
7. Peel the power button cable off the palm rest.
8. Lift and slide the power button module from under the latch.
Replacing the Power Button Module
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Slide the power button module under the latch and align the screw hole on the power button module with the screw hole on the palm rest.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 screw 2 power button cable
3 power button module 4 latch3. Replace the screw that secures the power button module to the palm rest.
4. Adhere the power button cable to the palm rest.
5. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
6. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
7. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.Back to Contents Page
Keyboard
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Keyboard
Replacing the Keyboard
Removing the Keyboard
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the three screws that secure the keyboard to the computer base.
4. Turn the computer over and open the display as far as possible.
5. Slide a plastic scribe between the keyboard and palm rest and pry and lift the keyboard to disengage it from the tabs on the palm rest.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
CAUTION: The keycaps on the keyboard are fragile, easily dislodged, and time- consuming to replace. Be careful when removing and handling the
keyboard.
CAUTION: Be extremely careful when removing and handling the keyboard. Failure to do so could result in scratching the display panel. 6. Carefully lift the keyboard and slide the keyboard tabs out of the slots on the palm rest.
7. Turn the keyboard over and place it on the palm rest.
8. Lift the connector latch and disconnect the keyboard cable from the connector on the system board.
9. Lift the keyboard off the palm rest.
Replacing the Keyboard
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Slide the keyboard cable into the connector on the system board and press down on the connector latch to secure the keyboard cable.
3. Align the tabs at the bottom of the keyboard with the slots on the palm rest and lower the keyboard into place.
4. Gently press around the edges of the keyboard to secure the keyboard under the tabs on the palm rest.
5. Close the display and turn the computer over.
6. Replace the three screws that secure the keyboard to the computer base.
7. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
1 plastic scribe 2 keyboard
3 palm rest
1 keyboard cable 2 connector latch
3 keyboard tabs (5) 4 keyboardBack to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Memory Module(s)
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Memory Module(s)
Replacing the Memory Module(s)
You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. See "Specifications" in the Setup Guide that shipped with your
computer or at support.dell.com/manuals for information on the memory supported by your computer.
Your computer has two user-accessible SODIMM connectors that can be accessed from the bottom of your computer.
Removing the Memory Module(s)
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Loosen the captive screw that secures the memory-module cover to the computer base.
4. Lift the memory-module cover off the computer base.
5. Use your fingertips to carefully spread apart the securing clips on each end of the memory module connector until the memory module pops up.
6. Remove the memory module from the memory-module connector.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
NOTE: Memory modules purchased from Dell™ are covered under your computer warranty.
1 tabs (2) 2 memory-module cover
3 captive screw
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module connector, do not use tools to spread the memory module securing clips. Replacing the Memory Module(s)
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the notch in the memory module with the tab in the memory-module connector.
3. Slide the memory module firmly into the memory-module connector at a 45-degree angle, and press the memory module down until it clicks into place. If
you do not hear the click, remove the memory module and reinstall it.
4. Slide the tabs on the memory-module cover into the slots on the computer base and gently press the memory-module cover into place.
5. Tighten the screw that secures the memory-module cover to the computer base.
6. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
7. Connect the AC adapter to your computer and an electrical outlet.
8. Turn on the computer.
As the computer boots, it detects the memory module(s) and automatically updates the system configuration information.
To confirm the amount of memory installed in the computer, click
Start ® Control Panel® System and Security® System.
1 memory-module connector 2 securing clips (2)
3 memory module
CAUTION: If you need to install memory modules in two connectors, install a memory module in the lower connector before you install a memory module in the upper connector.
NOTE: If the memory module is not installed properly, the computer may not boot.
1 tab 2 notchBack to Contents PageBack to Contents Page
Wireless Mini-Card(s)
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Mini-Card(s)
Replacing the Mini-Card(s)
If you ordered a wireless Mini-Card with your computer, the card is already installed.
Your computer has one full Mini-Card slot and one half Mini-Card slot:
l One full Mini-Card slot — supports Mobile broadband or Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN), GPS, or TV tuner module
l One half Mini-Card slot — supports Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), WLAN/Bluetooth® combo, or Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
(WiMax)
Removing the Mini-Card(s)
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Disconnect the antenna cables from the Mini-Card.
7. Remove the screw that secures the Mini-Card to the system board.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
CAUTION: When the Mini-Card is not in the computer, store it in protective antistatic packaging (see "Protecting Against Electrostatic Discharge"
in the safety instructions that shipped with your computer).
NOTE: Dell does not guarantee compatibility or provide support for Mini-Cards from sources other than Dell.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration of the computer when it was sold, the Mini- Card slots may or may not have Mini-Cards installed in them.
NOTE: Your computer can only support either one WWAN Mini-Card or one TV Tuner card in the full Mini-Card slot at a time. 8. Lift the Mini-Card out of the system board connector.
Replacing the Mini-Card(s)
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the new Mini-Card from its packaging.
3. Insert the Mini WLAN
-Card connector at a 45-degree angle into the appropriate system board connector. For example, the WLAN card connector is labeled
.
4. Press the other end of the Mini-Card down into the slot on the system board and replace the screw that secures the Mini-Card to the system board.
5. Connect the appropriate antenna cables to the Mini-Card you are installing. The following table provides the antenna cable color scheme for the MiniCards supported by your computer.
6. Secure the unused antenna cables in the protective mylar sleeve.
7. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
8. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
9. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
10. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
11. Install the drivers and utilities for your computer, as required.
1 antenna cables (2) 2 screw
3 Mini-Card
CAUTION: Use firm and even pressure to slide the card into place. If you use excessive force, you may damage the connector.
CAUTION: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the connectors on the card and on the system
board, and realign the card.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the Mini-Card, never place cables under the card.
Connectors on the Mini-Card Antenna Cable Color Scheme
WWAN (2 antenna cables)
Main WWAN (white triangle)
Auxiliary WWAN (black triangle)
WLAN (2 antenna cables)
Main WLAN (white triangle)
Auxiliary WLAN (black triangle)
TV tuner (1 antenna cable)
white with gray stripe
black with gray stripe
white
black
blackBack to Contents Page
NOTE: If you are installing a wireless Mini-Card from a source other than Dell, you must install the appropriate drivers and utilities. Back to Contents Page
Optical Drive
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Removing the Optical Drive
Replacing the Optical Drive
Removing the Optical Drive
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Remove the screw that secures the optical drive to the computer base.
5. Slide the optical drive out of the optical drive bay.
Replacing the Optical Drive
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Slide the optical drive into the optical drive bay until it is fully seated.
3. Replace the screw that secures the optical drive to the computer base.
4. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
5. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 optical drive 2 screwBack to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.Back to Contents Page
Palm Rest
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Palm Rest
Replacing the Palm Rest
Removing the Palm Rest
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Close the display and turn the computer over.
6. Using a plastic scribe, remove the two rubber caps that cover the palm rest screws on the computer base.
7. Remove the four screws that secure the palm rest to the computer base.
8. Turn the computer over and open the display as far as possible.
9. Remove the three screws that secure the palm rest to the computer base.
10. Lift the connector latch and pull the pull-tab to disconnect the touch pad cable and the power button board cable from their connectors on the system
board.
11. Slide a plastic scribe between the computer base and the palm rest, and pry out the palm rest off the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 rubber caps (2) 2 screws (4)
CAUTION: Carefully separate the palm rest from the computer base to avoid damage to the palm rest. Replacing the Palm Rest
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the palm rest on the computer base and gently snap the palm rest into place.
3. Slide the touch pad cable and the power button board cable into their connectors on the system board and press down on the connector latch to secure
the cables.
4. Replace the three screws that secure the palm rest to the computer base.
5. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
6. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
7. Close the display and turn the computer over.
8. Replace the four screws that secure the palm rest to the computer base.
9. Replace the two rubber caps that cover the palm rest screws on the computer base.
10. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
1 power button board cable connector 2 screws (3)
3 touch pad cable connector 4 plastic scribe
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Power Button Board
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Power Button Board
Replacing the Power Button Board
Removing the Power Button Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
4. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
5. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
6. Turn the palm rest over and remove the screw that secures the power button board to the palm rest.
7. Lift the power button board off the palm rest.
Replacing the Power Button Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the screw hole on the power button board with the screw hole on the palm rest.
3. Replace the screw that secures the power button board to the palm rest.
4. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
5. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 power button board 2 screw
3 back of the palm rest6. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
7. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
Back to Contents Page
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents Page
Battery
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Removing the Battery
Replacing the Battery
Removing the Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Shut down the computer and turn it over.
3. Slide the battery lock latch to the unlock position.
4. Slide the battery release latch to the side.
5. Slide and lift the battery out of the battery bay.
Replacing the Battery
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Align the tabs on the battery with the slots on the battery bay.
3. Slide the battery into the battery bay until it clicks into place.
4. Slide the battery lock latch to the lock position.
Back to Contents Page
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the computer, use only the battery designed for this particular Dell computer. Do not use batteries designed for
other Dell computers.
1 battery release latch 2 battery 3 battery lock latch Back to Contents Page
Speakers
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the Speakers
Replacing the Speakers
Removing the Speakers
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the system board (see Removing the System Board).
3. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector on the audio board.
4. Remove the four screws (two on each speaker) that secure the speakers to the computer base.
5. Lift the speakers off the computer base.
Replacing the Speakers
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Place the speakers in the computer base.
3. Replace the four screws (two on each speaker) that secure the speakers to the computer base.
4. Connect the speaker cable to the connector on the audio board.
5. Replace the system board (see Replacing the System Board).
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 speakers (2) 2 screws (4)
3 speaker cable connector
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer. Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page
System Board
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1121 Service Manual
Removing the System Board
Replacing the System Board
Removing the System Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. Remove the battery (see Removing the Battery).
3. Remove the memory module(s) (see Removing the Memory Module(s)).
4. Remove the keyboard (see Removing the Keyboard).
5. Follow the instructions from step 4 to step 6 in Removing the Hard Drive.
6. Remove the palm rest (see Removing the Palm Rest).
7. Remove the Mini-Card(s) (see Removing the Mini-Card(s)).
8. Remove the display assembly (see Removing the Display Assembly).
9. Remove the middle cover (see Removing the Middle Cover).
10. Disconnect the audio cable from the connectors on the system board and the audio board.
11. Remove the coin-cell battery (see Removing the Coin-Cell Battery).
12. Remove the screw that secures the system board to the computer base.
13. Lift the system board up slightly and disconnect the AC adapter connector cable from the system board.
14. Lift the system board completely off the computer base.
WARNING: Before working inside your computer, read the safety information that shipped with your computer. For additional safety best
practices information, see the Regulatory Compliance Homepage at www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance.
CAUTION: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell™
is not covered by your warranty.
CAUTION: To avoid electrostatic discharge, ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap or by periodically touching an unpainted metal
surface (such as a connector on your computer).
CAUTION: To help prevent damage to the system board, remove the main battery (see Removing the Battery) before working inside the
computer.
1 system board connector 2 audio cable
3 audio board connector 15. If you are replacing the system board, remove the processor fan and heat sink assembly (see Removing the Processor Heat Sink).
Replacing the System Board
1. Follow the instructions in Before You Begin.
2. If removed, replace the processor fan and heat sink assembly (see Replacing the Processor Heat Sink).
3. Connect the AC adapter connector cable to the system board.
4. Align the connectors on the system board with the slots on the computer base, and use the alignment posts on the computer base to correctly place the
system board.
5. Replace the screw that secures the system board to the computer base.
6. Replace the coin-cell battery (see Replacing the Coin-Cell Battery).
7. Connect the audio cable to the connectors on the system board and the audio board.
8. Replace the middle cover (see Replacing the Middle Cover).
9. Replace the display assembly (see Replacing the Display Assembly).
10. Replace the Mini-Card(s) (see Replacing the Mini-Card(s)).
11. Replace the palm rest (see Replacing the Palm Rest).
12. Follow the instructions from step 5 to step 7 in Replacing the Hard Drive.
13. Replace the keyboard (see Replacing the Keyboard).
14. Replace the memory module(s) (see Replacing the Memory Module(s)).
15. Replace the battery (see Replacing the Battery).
16. Turn on the computer.
17. Enter the service tag:
a. Ensure that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the main battery is installed properly.
1 system board 2 screw
3 AC adapter connector cable
CAUTION: Before turning on the computer, replace all screws and ensure that no stray screws remain inside the computer. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the computer.
NOTE: After you have replaced the system board, enter the computer's Service Tag into the BIOS of the replacement system board. b. Press during POST to enter the system setup program.
c. Navigate to the Security tab and enter the Service Tag in the Set Service Tag field.
Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page
Dell™ Inspiron™ N5020/M5030 Service Manual
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Inspiron are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and is used by Dell
under license; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and the Windows Vista start button logo are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any
proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
June 2010 Rev. A00
Back to Contents Page
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
www.dell.com | support.dell.com
Dell™ XPS™ 200
Owner’s Manual
Model DHP
*
Not present on certain computers.
front-panel
door (push to
open)
power button
power light
diagnostic lights
headphone connector
front-panel door (open)
microphone connector
optional floppy drive or
Media Card Reader*
network connector
IEEE 1394 connector
voltage selection switch
USB 2.0 connectors (5)
center/LFE connector
modem connector
CD or DVD drive light
USB 2.0 connectors (2)
IEEE 1394 connector
power connector
integrated video connector
S/PDIF-out connector
microphone/side-surround sound connector
PCI Express x16 card slot
PCI Express x1 card slot
line-out connector
line-in connector
rear-surround sound
connector
hard-drive activity lightNotes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the
problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows®
operating systems are not applicable.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2006 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp,
DellNet, and PowerConnect are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, Intel SpeedStep, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel
Corporation; Microsoft, Windows, and Outlook are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Model DHP
September 2006 P/N TD649 Rev. A03Contents 3
Contents
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Setting Up a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Connecting a USB Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using a Media Card Reader (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting a TV (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing the Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Setting Up a Home and Office Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting to a Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Network Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting Up Your Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Playing a CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Adjusting the Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Copying CDs and DVDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to Copy a CD or DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using Blank CDs and DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Helpful Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hibernate Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Options Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Understanding Intel® Viiv™ Technology (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Contents
Using Intel® Viiv™ Quick Resume Technology (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Enabling the QRT Feature in System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Enabling the QRT feature in the Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Hyper-Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 Solving Problems
Troubleshooting Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Battery Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Drive Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CD and DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Hard drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Media Card Reader Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
IEEE 1394 Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Lockups and Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The computer does not start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The computer stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
A program stops responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
A program crashes repeatedly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
A program is designed for an earlier Windows operating system . . . . . 35
A solid blue screen appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Other software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mouse Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Network Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Contents 5
Sound and Speaker Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
No sound from speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
No sound from headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Video and Monitor Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
If the screen is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
If the screen is difficult to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3 Troubleshooting Tools
Diagnostic Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
What Is a Driver? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Reinstalling Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Restoring Your Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using MicrosoftWindows XP System Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4 Removing and Installing Parts
Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Turning Off Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Before Working Inside Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Front and Back View of the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Back View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Removing the Computer Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Inside View of Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
System Board Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Contents
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DDR2 Memory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Installing Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Removing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting Drive Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Drive Interface Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Power Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Removing a Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Installing a Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CD/DVD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Removing a CD/DVD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Installing a CD/DVD Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Media Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Removing a Media Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Installing a Media Card Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Floppy Drive (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Removing a Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Installing a Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Replacing the Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Replacing the External Modem Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Replacing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Replacing the Computer Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Contents 7
5 Appendix
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Entering System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
System Setup Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Clearing Forgotten Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Clearing CMOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cleaning Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Computer, Keyboard, and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CDs and DVDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . 110
Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . 110
FCC Notices (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
FCC Class B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Contacting Dell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 ContentsFinding Information 9
Finding Information
NOTE: Some features may not be available for your computer or in certain countries.
NOTE: Additional information may ship with your computer.
What Are You Looking For? Find it Here
• Warranty information
• Terms and Conditions (U.S. only)
• Safety instructions
• Regulatory information
• Ergonomics information
• End User License Agreement
Dell™ Product Information Guide
• How to set up my computer Setup Diagram10 Finding Information
• Service Tag and Express Service Code
• Microsoft Windows License Label
Service Tag and Microsoft Windows License
These labels are located on your computer.
• Use the Service Tag to
identify your computer
when you use
support.dell.com or
contact technical
support.
• Enter the Express Service Code to direct your call when
contacting technical support.
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles
from technicians, online courses, frequently asked
questions
• Community — Online discussion with other Dell
customers
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such
as memory, the hard drive, and the operating system
• Customer Care — Contact information, service call and
order status, warranty, and repair information
• Service and support — Service call status and support
history, service contract, online discussions with
technical support
• Reference — Computer documentation, details on my
computer configuration, product specifications, and
white papers
• Downloads — Certified drivers, patches, and software
updates
• Desktop System Software (DSS)— If you reinstall the
operating system for your computer, you should also
reinstall the DSS utility. DSS provides critical updates
for your operating system and support for Dell™
3.5-inch USB floppy drives, Intel® Pentium®
M
processors, optical drives, and USB devices. DSS is
necessary for correct operation of your Dell computer.
The software automatically detects your computer and
operating system and installs the updates appropriate
for your configuration.
Dell Support Website — support.dell.com
NOTE: Select your region to view the appropriate support
site.
Corporate, government, and education customers can also
use the customized Dell Premier Support website at
premier.support.dell.com. The website may not be available
in all regions.
What Are You Looking For? Find it HereFinding Information 11
• How to use Windows XP
• Documentation for my computer
• Documentation for devices (such as a modem)
Windows Help and Support Center
1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support.
2Type a word or phrase that describes your problem and
click the arrow icon.
3 Click the topic that describes your problem.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
What Are You Looking For? Find it Here12 Finding InformationSetting Up and Using Your Computer 13
Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Setting Up a Printer
NOTICE: Complete the operating system setup before you connect a printer to the computer.
See the documentation that came with the printer for setup information, including how to:
• Obtain and install updated drivers.
• Connect the printer to the computer.
• Load paper and install the toner or ink cartridge.
• Contact the printer manufacturer for technical assistance.
Printer Cable
Your printer connects to your computer with a USB cable. Your printer may not come with a printer
cable, so if you purchase a cable separately, ensure that it is compatible with your printer. If you
purchased a printer cable at the same time you purchased your computer, the cable may arrive in
the computer box. 14 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Connecting a USB Printer
NOTE: You can connect USB devices while the computer is turned on.
1 Complete the operating system setup, if you have not already done so.
2 Install the printer driver if necessary. See the documentation that came with your printer.
3 Attach the USB printer cable to the USB connectors on the computer and the printer. The
USB connectors fit only one way.
Using a Media Card Reader (Optional)
Use the Media Card Reader to transfer data directly to your computer.
The Media Card Reader supports the following memory types:
• xD-Picture Card
• SmartMedia (SMC)
• CompactFlash Type I and II (CF I/II)
• MicroDrive Card
• SecureDigital Card (SD)
• MultiMediaCard (MMC)
• Memory Stick (MS/MS Pro)
USB printer cable
USB connector on computer
USB connector
on printerSetting Up and Using Your Computer 15
For information on installing a Media Card Reader, see "Installing a Media Card Reader" on
page 83.
To use the Media Card Reader:
1 Check the media or card to determine the proper orientation for insertion.
2 Slide the media or card into the appropriate slot until it is completely seated in the connector.
If you encounter resistance, do not force the media or card. Check the card orientation and try
again.
Connecting a TV (Optional)
NOTE: To connect a TV to your computer, you must have a video card that has TV-out functionality and
an S-video cable, which is available at most consumer electronics stores. An S-video cable is not
included with your computer.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Connect one end of the S-video cable to the TV-OUT connector on the back of the computer.
3 Connect the other end of the S-video cable to the S-video input connector on your TV.
xD-Picture Card
and SmartMedia (SMC)
Memory Stick
(MS/MS Pro)
SecureDigital Card (SD)/
MultiMediaCard (MMC)
CompactFlash Type I
and II (CF I/II) and
MicroDrive Card16 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Changing the Display Settings
1 After you connect the TV, turn on the computer.
The Microsoft® Windows® desktop displays on the monitor.
2 Enable clone mode or extended desktop mode in the display settings.
• In clone mode, the monitor and TV display the same image.
• In extended desktop mode, you can drag objects from one screen to the other, effectively
doubling the amount of viewable work space.
For information on changing the display settings for your graphics card, see the user’s guide in
the Help and Support Center (click the Start button, click Help and Support, click User and
system guides, click Device guides, and then click the guide for your graphics card).
Setting Up a Home and Office Network
Connecting to a Network Adapter
NOTE: Plug the network cable into the network adapter connector on the computer. Do not plug the
network cable into the modem connector on the computer. Do not plug a network cable into a telephone
wall jack.
1 Connect the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back of your computer.
Insert the cable until it clicks into place, and then gently pull it to ensure that it is secure.
2 Connect the other end of the network cable to a network device.
network device
network adapter connector on computer
network cable
network adapter
connectorSetting Up and Using Your Computer 17
Network Setup Wizard
The Microsoft® Windows® XP operating system provides a Network Setup Wizard to guide you
through the process of sharing files, printers, or an Internet connection between computers in a
home or small office.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ Communications, and then
click Network Setup Wizard.
2 On the welcome screen, click Next.
3 Click Checklist for creating a network.
NOTE: Selecting the connection method This computer connects directly to the Internet enables the
integrated firewall provided with Windows XP Service Pack 1 (SP1) or later operating systems.
4 Complete the checklist and required preparations.
5 Return to the Network Setup Wizard and follow the instructions on the screen.
Connecting to the Internet
NOTE: ISPs and ISP offerings vary by country.
To connect to the Internet, you need a modem or network connection and an Internet service
provider (ISP), such as AOL or MSN. Your ISP will offer one or more of the following Internet
connection options:
• Dial-up connections that provide Internet access through a telephone line. Dial-up
connections are considerably slower than DSL and cable modem connections.
• DSL connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your existing telephone
line. With a DSL connection, you can access the Internet and use your telephone on the same
line simultaneously.
• Cable modem connections that provide high-speed Internet access through your local cable
TV line.
If you are using a dial-up connection, connect a telephone line to the modem connector on your
computer and to the telephone wall jack before you set up your Internet connection. If you are
using a DSL or cable modem connection, contact your ISP for setup instructions.
Setting Up Your Internet Connection
To set up an AOL or MSN connection:
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Double-click the MSN Explorer or AOL icon on the Microsoft® Windows® desktop.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the setup.18 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
If you do not have an MSN Explorer or AOL icon on your desktop or if you want to set up an
Internet connection with a different ISP:
1 Save and close any open files, and exit any open programs.
2 Click the Start button and click Internet Explorer.
The New Connection Wizard appears.
3 Click Connect to the Internet.
4 In the next window, click the appropriate option:
• If you do not have an ISP and want to select one, click Choose from a list of Internet
service providers (ISPs).
• If you have already obtained setup information from your ISP but you did not receive a
setup CD, click Set up my connection manually.
• If you have a CD, click Use the CD I got from an ISP.
5 Click Next.
If you selected Set up my connection manually, continue to step 6. Otherwise, follow the
instructions on the screen to complete the setup.
NOTE: If you do not know which type of connection to select, contact your ISP.
6 Click the appropriate option under How do you want to connect to the Internet?, and then
click Next.
7 Use the setup information provided by your ISP to complete the setup.
If you are having problems connecting to the Internet, see "E-Mail, Modem, and Internet
Problems" on page 31. If you cannot connect to the Internet but have successfully connected in the
past, the ISP might have a service outage. Contact your ISP to check the service status, or try
connecting again later.
Playing a CD or DVD
NOTICE: Do not press down on the CD or DVD tray when you open or close it. Keep the tray closed when
you are not using the drive.
NOTICE: Do not move the computer when you are playing CDs or DVDs.
1 Press the eject button on the front of the drive.
2 Place the disc, label side up in the center of the tray
3 Press the disc into the center of the tray until it clicks into place.Setting Up and Using Your Computer 19
4 Press the eject button or gently push in the tray.
To format CDs for storing data, to create music CDs, or to copy CDs, see the CD software that
came with your computer.
NOTE: Ensure that you follow all copyright laws when you create CDs.20 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
A CD player includes the following basic buttons:
A DVD player includes the following basic buttons:
For more information on playing CDs or DVDs, click Help on the CD or DVD player (if available).
Play.
Move backward within the current track.
Pause.
Move forward within the current track.
Stop.
Go to the previous track.
Eject.
Go to the next track.
Stop.
Play.
Fast forward.
Pause.
Fast reverse.
Go to the next title or chapter.
Go to the previous title or chapter.Setting Up and Using Your Computer 21
Adjusting the Volume
NOTE: When the speakers are muted, you do not hear the CD or DVD playing.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs → Accessories→ Entertainment, and then click
Volume Control.
2 In the Volume Control window, click and drag the bar in the Volume Control column and
slide it up or down to increase or decrease the volume.
For more information on volume control options, click Help in the Volume Control window.
Adjusting the Picture
If an error message notifies you that the current resolution and color depth are using too much
memory and preventing DVD playback, adjust the display properties.
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Appearance and Themes.
3 Under Pick a task..., click Change the screen resolution.
4 In the Display Properties window, click and drag the bar in Screen resolution to change the
setting to 800 by 600 pixels.
5 Click the drop-down menu under Color quality, and then click Medium (16 bit).
6 Click OK.
Copying CDs and DVDs
NOTE: Ensure that you observe all copyright laws when creating CDs or DVDs.
This section applies only to computers that have a CD-RW, DVD+/-RW, or CD-RW/DVD
(combo) drive.
NOTE: The types of CD or DVD drives offered by Dell™ may vary by country.
The following instructions explain how to make an exact copy of a CD or DVD. You can also use
Sonic DigitalMedia for other purposes, such as creating music CDs from audio files stored on
your computer or backing up important data. For help, open Sonic DigitalMedia and then click
the question mark icon in the upper-right corner of the window.
How to Copy a CD or DVD
NOTE: CD-RW/DVD combo drives cannot write to DVD media. If you have a CD-RW/DVD combo drive
and you experience recording problems, check for available software patches on the Sonic support
website at www.sonic.com.
The DVD-writable drives installed in Dell computers can write to and read DVD+/-R,
DVD+/-RW and DVD+R DL (dual layer) media, but cannot write to and may not read
DVD-RAM or DVD-R DL media.22 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
NOTE: Most commercial DVDs have copyright protection and cannot be copied using Sonic
DigitalMedia.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Sonic→ DigitalMedia Projects, and then
click Copy.
2 Under the Copy tab, click Disc Copy.
3 To copy the CD or DVD:
• If you have one CD or DVD drive, ensure that the settings are correct and click the Disc
Copy button. The computer reads your source CD or DVD and copies the data to a
temporary folder on your computer hard drive.
When prompted, insert a blank CD or DVD into the drive and click OK.
• If you have two CD or DVD drives, select the drive into which you have inserted your
source CD or DVD and click the Disc Copy button. The computer copies the data from
the source CD or DVD to the blank CD or DVD.
Once you have finished copying the source CD or DVD, the CD or DVD that you have
created automatically ejects.
Using Blank CDs and DVDs
CD-RW drives can write to CD recording media only (including high-speed CD-RW) while
DVD-writable drives can write to both CD and DVD recording media.
Use blank CD-Rs to record music or permanently store data files. After creating a CD-R, you
cannot write to that CD-R again (see the Sonic documentation for more information). Use
blank CD-RWs to write to CDs or to erase, rewrite, or update data on CDs.
Blank DVD+/-Rs can be used to permanently store large amounts of information. After you
create a DVD+/-R disc, you may not be able to write to that disc again if the disc is "finalized" or
"closed" during the final stage of the disc creation process. Use blank DVD+/-RWs if you plan
to erase, rewrite, or update information on that disc later.
CD-Writable Drives
DVD-Writable Drives
Media Type Read Write Rewritable
CD-R Yes Yes No
CD-RW Yes Yes Yes
Media Type Read Write Rewritable
CD-R Yes Yes No
CD-RW Yes Yes YesSetting Up and Using Your Computer 23
Helpful Tips
• Use Microsoft® Windows® Explorer to drag and drop files to a CD-R or CD-RW only after
you start Sonic DigitalMedia and open a DigitalMedia project.
• Use CD-Rs to burn music CDs that you want to play in regular stereos. CD-RWs do not play
in most home or car stereos.
• You cannot create audio DVDs with Sonic DigitalMedia.
• Music MP3 files can be played only on MP3 players or on computers that have MP3 software
installed.
• Commercially available DVD players used in home theater systems may not support all
available DVD formats. For a list of formats supported by your DVD player, see the
documentation provided with your DVD player or contact the manufacturer.
• Do not burn a blank CD-R or CD-RW to its maximum capacity; for example, do not copy a
650-MB file to a blank 650-MB CD. The CD-RW drive needs 1–2 MB of the blank space to
finalize the recording.
• Use a blank CD-RW to practice CD recording until you are familiar with CD recording
techniques. If you make a mistake, you can erase the data on the CD-RW and try again. You
can also use blank CD-RWs to test music file projects before you record the project
permanently to a blank CD-R.
• See the Sonic website at www.sonic.com for additional information.
DVD+R Yes Yes No
DVD-R Yes Yes No
DVD+RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD-RW Yes Yes Yes
DVD+R DL Yes Yes No
DVD-R DL Maybe No No
DVD-RAM Maybe No No
Media Type Read Write Rewritable24 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Power Management
The Microsoft® Windows® XP power management features can reduce the amount of electricity
your computer uses when it is on and you are not using it. You can reduce power to just the monitor
or the hard drive, or you can use standby mode or hibernate mode to reduce power to the entire
computer. When the computer exits from a power conservation mode, the Windows desktop is
restored to the state it was in before it entered the mode.
NOTE: Windows XP Professional includes security and networking features not available in
Windows XP Home Edition. When a Windows XP Professional computer is connected to a network,
different options related to security and networking appear in certain windows.
Standby Mode
Standby mode conserves power by turning off the display and the hard drive after a time-out.
When the computer exits from standby mode, it returns to the operating state it was in before it
entered standby mode.
To set standby mode to automatically activate after a defined period of inactivity:
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Power Options.
To immediately activate standby mode without a period of inactivity, click the Start button, click
Turn Off Computer, and then click Stand by.
To exit from standby mode, press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse.
NOTICE: If your computer loses power while in standby mode, it may lose data.
Hibernate Mode
Hibernate mode conserves power by copying system data to a reserved area on the hard drive and
then completely turning off the computer. When the computer exits from hibernate mode, the
desktop is restored to the state it was in before it entered hibernate mode.
To activate hibernate mode:
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Power Options.
4 Define your hibernate settings on the Power Schemes tab, Advanced tab, and Hibernate tab.
To exit from hibernate mode, press the power button. The computer may take a short time to exit
from hibernate mode. Pressing a key on the keyboard or moving the mouse does not bring the
computer out of hibernation, because the keyboard and the mouse do not function when the
computer is in hibernate mode.Setting Up and Using Your Computer 25
Because hibernate mode requires a special file on your hard drive with enough disk space to store
the contents of the computer memory, Dell creates an appropriately sized hibernate mode file
before shipping the computer to you. If the computer’s hard drive becomes corrupted,
Windows XP recreates the hibernate file automatically.
Power Options Properties
Define your standby mode settings, hibernate mode settings, and other power settings in the Power
Options Properties window. To access the Power Options Properties window:
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Power Options.
4 Define your power settings on the Power Schemes tab, Advanced tab, and Hibernate tab.
Power Schemes Tab
Each standard power setting is called a scheme. If you want to select one of the standard Windows
schemes installed on your computer, choose a scheme from the Power schemes drop-down menu.
The settings for each scheme appear in the fields below the scheme name. Each scheme has
different settings for starting standby mode or hibernate mode, turning off the monitor, and
turning off the hard drive.
The Power schemes drop-down menu displays the following schemes:
• Always On (default) — If you want to use your computer with no power conservation.
• Home/Office Desk — If you use your computer as a home or office computer and you require
minimal power conservation.
• Portable/Laptop — If your computer is a portable computer that you use for traveling.
• Presentation — If you want your computer to run without interruption (using no power
conservation).
• Minimal Power Management — If you want your computer to run with minimal power
conservation.
• Max Battery — If your computer is a portable computer and you run your computer from
batteries for extended periods of time.
If you want to change the default settings for a scheme, click the drop-down menu in the Turn off
monitor, Turn off hard disks, System stand by, or System hibernates field, and then select a timeout from the displayed list. Changing the time-out for a scheme field permanently changes the
default settings for that scheme, unless you click Save As and enter a new name for the changed
scheme.
NOTICE: If you set the hard drive (hard disk) to time-out before the monitor does, your computer may
appear to be locked up. To recover, press any key on the keyboard or click the mouse. To avoid this
problem, always set the monitor to time-out before the hard drive.26 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab allows you to:
• Place the power options icon in the Windows taskbar for quick access.
• Set the computer to prompt you for your Windows password before the computer exits from
standby mode or hibernate mode.
• Program the power button to activate standby mode, activate hibernate mode, or turn off the
computer.
To program these functions, click an option from the corresponding drop-down menu and
click OK.
Hibernate Tab
The Hibernate tab allows you to enable hibernate mode. If you want to use the hibernate settings
you defined on the Power Schemes tab, click the Enable hibernate support check box on the
Hibernate tab.
For more information on power management options:
1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support.
2 In the Help and Support window, click Performance and maintenance.
3 In the Performance and maintenance window, click Conserving power on your computer.
Understanding Intel® Viiv™ Technology (Optional)
Intel Viiv technology is a technology aimed at the digital home enthusiast that includes:
• A BIOS with Quick Resume
• Device drivers
This technology allows the user’s system to quickly return to an active state after non-use
Intel Viiv technology is an option for systems that are ordered with Microsoft® Windows® XP
Media Center Edition 2005 and dual core processors.
Using Intel® Viiv™ Quick Resume Technology (Optional)
When running in the Intel Viiv Quick Resume Technology (QRT) mode, your power button is
used as a quick on/off feature. Pressing the power button once causes the display to go blank and
the audio to mute. In this mode, the computer is still operating as indicated by the power button
indicator and diagnostic lights 1, 2, and 4 being lit. Also, you may notice that the hard drive
indicator may blink when the hard drive is being accessed by an external device.
To resume normal computer operation, briefly press the power button, press any key on the
keyboard, move the mouse, or press a button on the optional Microsoft® Windows® XP Media
Center Edition 2005 remote control.Setting Up and Using Your Computer 27
Enabling the QRT Feature in System Setup
The QRT drivers must be installed before this feature becomes active. These drivers are installed
when this option is ordered. Also, Quick Resume is enabled in system setup when this feature is
ordered.
1 Enter system setup (see page 100).
2 Press the arrow keys to highlight the Power Management menu option and press to
access the menu.
3 Press the up- and down-arrow keys to highlight the Quick Resume option and press
to access the menu.
4 Press the left- and right-arrow keys to highlight the On option and press to enable
the Quick Resume feature.
Enabling the QRT feature in the Operating system
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Under or pick a Control Panel icon, click Power Options.
4 Click the Away tab.
5 Ensure that the check boxes for Enable away mode and Options are checked.
6 Click the Advanced tab.
7 From the When I press the power button on my computer drop-down menu, select Do
Nothing.
8 From the When I press the sleep button on my computer drop-down menu, select Do
Nothing.
Hyper-Threading
Hyper-Threading is an Intel® technology that can enhance overall computer performance by
allowing one physical processor to function as two logical processors, capable of performing certain
tasks simultaneously. It is recommended that you use the Microsoft® Windows® XP Service Pack 1
(SP1) or later operating system because Windows XP is optimized to take advantage of
Hyper-Threading technology. While many programs can benefit from Hyper-Threading, some
programs have not been optimized for Hyper-Threading and may require an update from the
software manufacturer. Contact the software manufacturer for updates and information about
using Hyper-Threading with your software.28 Setting Up and Using Your Computer
To determine if your computer is using Hyper-Threading technology:
1 Click the Start button, right-click My Computer, and then click Properties.
2 Click Hardware and click Device Manager.
3 In the Device Manager window, click the plus (+) sign next to Processors. If Hyper-Threading
is enabled, the processor is listed twice.
You can enable or disable Hyper-Threading through system setup. For more information on
accessing system setup, see page 100.Solving Problems 29
Solving Problems
Troubleshooting Tips
Follow these tips when you troubleshoot your computer:
• If you added or removed a part before the problem started, review the installation procedures
and ensure that the part is correctly installed.
• If a peripheral device does not work, ensure that the device is properly connected.
• If an error message appears on the screen, write down the exact message. This message may
help technical support personnel diagnose and fix the problem(s).
• If an error message occurs in a program, see the program’s documentation.
Battery Problems
CAUTION: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the
battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used
batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
Drive Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
REPLACE THE BATTERY — If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on
the computer, or if an incorrect time or date displays during start-up, replace the battery (see page 92).
If the battery still does not work properly, contact Dell (see page 111).
ENSURE THAT MICROSOFT® WINDOWS® RECOGNIZES THE DRIVE — Click the Start button and
click My Computer. If the floppy, CD, or DVD drive, is not listed, perform a full scan with your
antivirus software to check for and remove viruses. Viruses can sometimes prevent Windows from
recognizing the drive.30 Solving Problems
CD and DVD drive problems
NOTE: High-speed CD or DVD drive vibration is normal and may cause noise, which does not indicate a
defect in the drive or the CD or DVD.
NOTE: Because of different regions worldwide and different disc formats, not all DVD titles work in all
DVD drives.
Problems writing to a CD/DVD-RW drive
TEST THE DRIVE —
• Insert another floppy disk, CD, or DVD to eliminate the possibility that the original one is defective.
• Insert a bootable floppy disk and restart the computer.
NOTE: This system supports an optional USB floppy drive.
CLEAN THE DRIVE O R DISK — See page 108.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
RUN THE HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTER — See page 51.
RUN THE DELL DIAGNOSTICS — See page 48.
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL —
• Click the speaker icon in the lower-right corner of your screen.
• Ensure that the volume is turned up by clicking the slidebar and dragging it up.
• Ensure that the sound is not muted by clicking any boxes that are checked.
CHECK THE SPEAKERS AND SUBWOOFER — See "Sound and Speaker Problems" on page 41.
CLOSE OTHER PROGRAMS — The CD/DVD-RW drive must receive a steady stream of data when
writing. If the stream is interrupted, an error occurs. Try closing all programs before you write to the
CD/DVD-RW.
TURN OFF STANDBY MODE IN WINDOWS BEFORE WRITING T O A CD/DVD-RW DISC — See page 24
or search for the keyword standby in Windows Help for information on power management modes.Solving Problems 31
Hard drive problems
E-Mail, Modem, and Internet Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: Connect the modem to an analog telephone jack only. The modem does not operate while it is
connected to a digital telephone network.
RUN CHECK DISK —
1 Click the Start button and click My Computer.
2 Right-click Local Disk C:.
3 Click Properties.
4 Click the Tools tab.
5 Under Error-checking, click Check Now.
6 Click Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors.
7 Click Start.
CHECK THE MICROSOFT OUTLOOK® EXPRESS SECURITY SETTINGS — If you cannot open your
e-mail attachments:
1 In Outlook Express, click Tools, click Options, and then click Security.
2 Click Do not allow attachments to remove the checkmark.
CHECK THE TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTION —
CHECK THE TELEPHONE JACK —
CONNECT THE MODEM DIRECTLY T O THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK —
US E A DIFFERENT TELEPHONE LINE —
• Verify that the telephone line is connected to the jack on the modem. (The jack has either a green label
or a connector-shaped icon next to it.)
• Ensure that you hear or feel a click when you insert the telephone line connector into the modem.
• Disconnect the telephone line from the modem and connect it to a telephone. Listen for a dial tone.
• If you have other telephone devices sharing the line, such as an answering machine, fax machine, surge
protector, or line splitter, then bypass them and use the telephone to connect the modem directly to the
telephone wall jack. If you are using a line that is 3 m (10 ft) or more in length, try a shorter one.
RUN THE MODEM HELPER DIAGNOSTICS — Click the Start button, point to All Programs, and then
click Modem Helper. Follow the instructions on the screen to identify and resolve modem problems.
(Modem Helper is not available on certain computers.)32 Solving Problems
Error Messages
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
If the message is not listed, see the documentation for the operating system or the program that
was running when the message appeared.
VERIFY THAT THE MODEM I S COMMUNICATING WITH WINDOWS —
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Click Printers and Other Hardware.
3 Click Phone and Modem Options.
4 Click the Modems tab.
5 Click the COM port for your modem.
6 Click Properties, click the Diagnostics tab, and then click Query Modem to verify that the modem is
communicating with Windows.
If all commands receive responses, the modem is operating properly.
ENSURE THAT YOU ARE CONNECTED T O THE INTERNET — Ensure that you have subscribed to an
Internet provider. With the Outlook Express e-mail program open, click File. If Work Offline has a
checkmark next to it, click the checkmark to remove it and connect to the Internet. For help, contact
your Internet service provider.
A FILENAME CANNOT CONTAIN ANY O F THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS: \ / : * ? “ < > | — Do not
use these characters in filenames.
A REQUIRED .DLL FILE WAS NOT FOUND — The program that you are trying to open is missing an
essential file. To remove and then reinstall the program:
1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Add or Remove Programs.
2 Select the program you want to remove.
3 Click the Change or Remove Program icon.
4 See the program documentation for installation instructions.
drive letter :\ I S NOT ACCESSIBLE. TH E DEVICE I S NOT READY — The drive cannot read the disk.
Insert a disk into the drive and try again.
INSERT BOOTABLE MEDIA — Insert a bootable floppy disk or CD.
NOTE: This system supports an optional USB floppy drive.Solving Problems 33
Media Card Reader Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
IEEE 1394 Device Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NON-SYSTEM DISK ERROR — Remove the floppy disk from the drive and restart your computer.
NOTE: This system supports an optional USB floppy drive.
NO T ENOUGH MEMORY O R RESOURCES. CLOSE SOME PROGRAMS AND TRY AGAIN — Close all
windows and open the program that you want to use. In some cases, you might have to restart your
computer to restore computer resources. If so, run the program that you want to use first.
OPERATING SYSTEM NOT FOUND — Contact Dell (see page 111).
NO DRIVE LETTER I S ASSIGNED —
When Microsoft Windows XP detects the Media Card Reader, the device is automatically assigned a
drive letter as the next logical drive after all other physical drives in the system. If the next logical drive
after the physical drives is mapped to a network drive, Windows XP does not automatically assign a
drive letter to the Media Card Reader.
To manually assign a drive for the Media Card Reader:
1 Right-click My Computer and select Manage.
2 Select the Disk Management option.
3 Right-click the corresponding drive letter in the right pane that needs to be changed.
4 Select Drive Letter and Paths.
5 From the drop-down list, select the new drive letter assignment for the Media Card Reader.
6 Click OK to confirm your selection.
NOTE: The Media Card Reader appears as a mapped drive only when it is connected. Each of the four
Media Card Reader slots are mapped to a drive even if no media is installed. If you attempt to access the
Media Card Reader when no media is inserted, you are prompted to insert media.
ENSURE THAT THE CABLE FOR THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE I S PROPERLY INSERTED INTO THE DEVICE AND
INTO THE CONNECTOR ON THE COMPUTER34 Solving Problems
Keyboard Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
Lockups and Software Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
The computer does not start up
ENSURE THAT THE IEEE 1394 DEVICE I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS —
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Click Printers and Other Hardware.
If your IEEE 1394 device is listed, Windows recognizes the device.
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A DELL IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Contact Dell (see page 111).
IF YOU HAVE PROBLEMS WITH A NON-DELL IEEE 1394 DEVICE — Contact the manufacturer of the
IEEE 1394 device.
CHECK THE KEYBOARD CABLE —
• Ensure that the keyboard cable is firmly connected to the computer.
• Reconnect the keyboard cable as shown on the setup diagram for your computer.
• Check the cable connector for damaged or frayed cables.
• Remove keyboard extension cables and connect the keyboard directly to the computer.
TEST THE KEYBOARD — Connect a properly working keyboard to the computer, and try using the
keyboard.
RUN THE HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTER — See page 51.
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC LIGHTS — See page 45.
ENSURE THAT THE POWER CABLE I S FIRMLY CONNECTED T O THE COMPUTER AND T O THE ELECTRICAL
OUTLETSolving Problems 35
The computer stops responding
NOTICE: You might lose data if you are unable to perform an operating system shutdown.
A program stops responding
A program crashes repeatedly
NOTE: Software usually includes installation instructions in its documentation or on a floppy disk or CD.
A program is designed for an earlier Windows operating system
A solid blue screen appears
TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or
moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer
turns off. Then restart your computer.
EN D THE PROGRAM —
1 Press simultaneously.
2 Click Applications.
3 Click the program that is no longer responding.
4 Click End Task.
CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION — If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program.
RUN THE PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY WIZARD —
The Program Compatibility Wizard configures a program so that it runs in an environment similar to
non-Windows XP operating system environments.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories, and then click Program Compatibility
Wizard.
2 In the welcome screen, click Next.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
TURN THE COMPUTER OFF — If you are unable to get a response by pressing a key on your keyboard or
moving your mouse, press and hold the power button for at least 8 to 10 seconds until the computer
turns off. Then restart your computer.36 Solving Problems
Other software problems
Memory Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
CHECK THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION O R CONTACT THE SOFTWARE MANUFACTURER FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION —
• Ensure that the program is compatible with the operating system installed on your computer.
• Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements needed to run the software. See
the software documentation for information.
• Ensure that the program is installed and configured properly.
• Verify that the device drivers do not conflict with the program.
• If necessary, uninstall and then reinstall the program.
BACK U P YOUR FILES IMMEDIATELY
US E A VIRUS-SCANNING PROGRAM T O CHECK THE HARD DRIVE, FLOPPY DISKS, O R CDS
SAVE AND CLOSE ANY OPEN FILES O R PROGRAMS AND SHUT DOWN YOUR COMPUTER THROUGH THE
START MENU
IF YOU RECEIVE AN INSUFFICIENT MEMORY MESSAGE —
• Save and close any open files and exit any open programs you are not using to see if that resolves the
problem.
• See the software documentation for minimum memory requirements. If necessary, install additional
memory (see page 66).
• Reseat the memory modules (see page 66) to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating
with the memory.
• Run the Dell Diagnostics (see page 48).Solving Problems 37
Mouse Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
IF YOU EXPERIENCE OTHER MEMORY PROBLEMS —
• Reseat the memory modules (see page 66) to ensure that your computer is successfully communicating
with the memory.
• Ensure that you are following the memory installation guidelines (see page 65).
• Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For more information about the type of memory supported by
your computer, see "Memory" on page 95.
• Run the Dell Diagnostics (see page 48).
CLEAN THE MOUSE — See page 109.
CHECK THE MOUSE CABLE —
1 Check the cable connector for damaged or frayed cables.
2 Remove mouse extension cables, if used, and connect the mouse directly to the computer.
3 Reconnect the mouse cable as shown on the setup diagram for your computer.
RESTART THE COMPUTER —
1 Simultaneously press to display the Start menu.
2Type u, press the keyboard arrow keys to highlight Shut down or Turn Off, and then press .
3 After the computer turns off, reconnect the mouse cable as shown on the setup diagram for your
computer.
4 Start the computer.
TEST THE MOUSE — Connect a properly working mouse to the computer, and try using the mouse.
CHECK THE MOUSE SETTINGS —
1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware.
2 Click Mouse.
3Try adjusting the settings.
REINSTALL THE MOUSE DRIVER — See page 50.
RUN THE HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTER — See page 51.38 Solving Problems
Network Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
Power Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
CHECK THE NETWORK CABLE CONNECTOR — Ensure that the network cable is firmly inserted into
both the network connector on the back of the computer and the network jack.
CHECK THE NETWORK LIGHTS ON THE BACK O F THE COMPUTER — If the link integrity light is off,
that indicates no network communication exists. Replace the network cable. For a description of
network lights, see "Controls and Lights" on page 98.
RESTART THE COMPUTER AND LOG ON T O THE NETWORK AGAIN
CHECK YOUR NETWORK SETTINGS — Contact your network administrator or the person who set up
your network to verify that your network settings are correct and that the network is functioning.
RUN THE HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTER — See page 51.
IF THE POWER LIGHT I S GREEN AND THE COMPUTER I S NOT RESPONDING — See "Diagnostic Lights"
on page 45.
IF THE POWER LIGHT I S BLINKING GREEN — The computer is in standby mode. Press a key on the
keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power button to resume normal operation.Solving Problems 39
Printer Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your printer, contact the printer’s manufacturer.
IF THE POWER LIGHT I S OFF — The computer is either turned off or is not receiving power.
• Reseat the power cable into both the power connector on the back of the computer and the electrical
outlet.
• If the computer is plugged into a power strip, ensure that the power strip is plugged into an electrical
outlet and that the power strip is turned on. Also bypass power protection devices, power strips, and
power extension cables to verify that the computer turns on properly.
• Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another device, such as a lamp.
• Ensure that the main power cable and front panel cable are securely connected to the system board (see
page 64).
IF THE POWER LIGHT I S STEADY AMBER — A device might be malfunctioning or incorrectly installed.
• Ensure that the processor cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 64).
• Remove and then reinstall the memory modules (see page 66).
• Remove and then reinstall any cards (see page 68).
• Remove and then reinstall the graphics card, if applicable (see page 72).
IF THE POWER LIGHT I S BLINKING AMBER — The computer is receiving electrical power, but an
internal power problem might exist.
• Ensure that the voltage selection switch is set to match the AC power at your location (if applicable).
• Ensure that the processor power cable is securely connected to the system board (see page 64).
ELIMINATE INTERFERENCE — Some possible causes of interference are:
• Power, keyboard, and mouse extension cables
• Too many devices on a power strip
• Multiple power strips connected to the same electrical outlet
CHECK THE PRINTER DOCUMENTATION — See the printer documentation for setup and
troubleshooting information.
ENSURE THAT THE PRINTER I S TURNED ON40 Solving Problems
Scanner Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: If you need technical assistance for your scanner, contact the scanner’s manufacturer.
CHECK THE PRINTER CABLE CONNECTIONS —
• See the printer documentation for cable connection information.
• Ensure that the printer cables are securely connected to the printer and the computer (see page 13).
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another
device, such as a lamp.
VERIFY THAT THE PRINTER I S RECOGNIZED B Y WINDOWS —
1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware.
2 Click View installed printers or fax printers.
If the printer is listed, right-click the printer icon.
3 Click Properties and click the Ports tab. For a USB printer, ensure that the Print to the following
port(s): setting is USB.
REINSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER — See the printer documentation for instructions.
CHECK THE SCANNER DOCUMENTATION — See the scanner documentation for setup and
troubleshooting information.
UNLOCK THE SCANNER — Ensure that your scanner is unlocked if it has a locking tab or button.
RESTART THE COMPUTER AND TRY THE SCANNER AGAIN
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS —
• See the scanner documentation for cable connection information.
• Ensure that the scanner cables are securely connected to the scanner and the computer.Solving Problems 41
Sound and Speaker Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
No sound from speakers
NOTE: The volume control in some MP3 players overrides the Windows volume setting. If you have been
listening to MP3 songs, ensure that you did not turn the player volume down or off.
VERIFY THAT THE SCANNER I S RECOGNIZED B Y MICROSOFT WINDOWS —
1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Printers and Other Hardware.
2 Click Scanners and Cameras.
If your scanner is listed, Windows recognizes the scanner.
REINSTALL THE SCANNER DRIVER — See the scanner documentation for instructions.
CHECK THE SPEAKER CABLE CONNECTIONS — Ensure that the speakers are connected as shown on
the setup diagram supplied with the speakers. If you purchased a sound card, ensure that the speakers
are connected to the card.
ENSURE THAT THE SUBWOOFER AND THE SPEAKERS ARE TURNED ON — See the setup diagram
supplied with the speakers. If your speakers have volume controls, adjust the volume, bass, or treble to
eliminate distortion.
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right
corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted.
DISCONNECT HEADPHONES FROM THE HEADPHONE CONNECTOR — Sound from the speakers is
automatically disabled when headphones are connected to the computer’s front-panel headphone
connector.
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another
device, such as a lamp.
ELIMINATE POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE — Turn off nearby fans, fluorescent lights, or halogen lamps to
check for interference.42 Solving Problems
No sound from headphones
Video and Monitor Problems
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTE: See the monitor documentation for troubleshooting procedures.
If the screen is blank
RUN THE SPEAKER DIAGNOSTICS — SE E YOUR SPEAKER DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE
INFORMATION.
REINSTALL THE SOUND DRIVER — See page 50.
RUN THE HARDWARE TROUBLESHOOTER — See page 51.
CHECK THE HEADPHONE CABLE CONNECTION — Ensure that the headphone cable is securely inserted
into the headphone connector (see page 57).
ADJUST THE WINDOWS VOLUME CONTROL — Click or double-click the speaker icon in the lower-right
corner of your screen. Ensure that the volume is turned up and that the sound is not muted.
CHECK THE MONITOR CABLE CONNECTION —
• Ensure that the graphics cable is connected as shown on the setup diagram for your computer.
• If you are using a graphics extension cable and removing the cable solves the problem, the cable is
defective.
• Swap the computer and monitor power cables to determine if the power cable is defective.
• Check the connector for bent or broken pins. (It is normal for monitor cable connectors to have missing
pins.)
CHECK THE MONITOR POWER LIGHT — If the power light is off, firmly press the button to ensure that
the monitor is turned on. If the power light is lit or blinking, the monitor has power. If the power light is
blinking, press a key on the keyboard or move the mouse.Solving Problems 43
If the screen is difficult to read
TEST THE ELECTRICAL OUTLET — Ensure that the electrical outlet is working by testing it with another
device, such as a lamp.
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC LIGHTS — See page 45.
CHECK THE MONITOR SETTINGS — See the monitor documentation for instructions on adjusting the
contrast and brightness, demagnetizing (degaussing) the monitor, and running the monitor self-test.
MOVE THE SUBWOOFER AWAY FROM THE MONITOR — If your speaker system includes a subwoofer,
ensure that the subwoofer is at least 60 cm (2 ft) away from the monitor.
MOVE THE MONITOR AWAY FROM EXTERNAL POWER SOURCES — Fans, fluorescent lights, halogen
lamps, and other electrical devices can cause the screen image to appear "shaky." Turn off nearby devices
to check for interference.
ROTATE THE MONITOR T O ELIMINATE SUNLIGHT GLARE AND POSSIBLE INTERFERENCE
ADJUST THE WINDOWS DISPLAY SETTINGS —
1 Click the Start button, click Control Panel, and then click Appearance and Themes.
2 Click Display and click the Settings tab.
3Try different settings for Screen resolution and Color quality.44 Solving ProblemsTroubleshooting Tools 45
Troubleshooting Tools
Diagnostic Lights
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on
the front panel (see page 57). When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. If the computer
malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. After the computer
completes POST, all four lights turn off before booting to the operating system.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution
The computer is in a normal "off"
condition or a possible pre-BIOS failure
has occurred.
Plug the computer into a working
electrical outlet and press the power
button.
A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see page 111).
Memory modules are detected, but a
memory failure has occurred.
• If you have two or more memory
modules installed, remove the
modules, reinstall one module (see
page 66), and then restart the
computer. If the computer starts
normally, reinstall an additional
module. Continue until you have
identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
• If available, install properly working
memory of the same type into your
computer (see page 65).
• If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see page 111).46 Troubleshooting Tools
A possible graphics card failure has
occurred.
• If the computer has a graphics card,
remove the card, reinstall it (see
page 68), and then restart the
computer.
• If the problem still exists, install a
graphics card that you know works and
restart the computer.
• If the problem persists or the computer
has integrated graphics, contact Dell
(see page 111).
A possible floppy or hard drive failure has
occurred.
Reseat all power and data cables and
restart the computer.
A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable
connections, and then restart the
computer.
No memory modules are detected. • If you have two or more memory
modules installed, remove the
modules, reinstall one module (see
page 66), and then restart the
computer. If the computer starts
normally, reinstall an additional
module. Continue until you have
identified a faulty module or
reinstalled all modules without error.
• If available, install properly working
memory of the same type into your
computer (see page 65).
• If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see page 111).
Memory modules are detected, but a
memory configuration or compatibility
error exists.
• Ensure that no special memory
module/memory connector placement
requirements exist (see page 65).
• Verify that the memory modules that
you are installing are compatible with
your computer (see page 65).
• If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see page 111).
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested ResolutionTroubleshooting Tools 47
A possible expansion card failure has
occurred.
1 Determine if a conflict exists by
removing a card (not a graphics card)
(see page 68) and restarting the
computer.
2 If the problem persists, reinstall the
card that you removed, remove a
different card, and then restart the
computer.
3Repeat this process for each card. If the
computer starts normally, troubleshoot
the last card removed from the
computer for resource conflicts (see
page 51).
4 If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see page 111).
The system is operating in the quick
resume mode. See "Using Intel® Viiv™
Quick Resume Technology (Optional)"
on page 26 for additional information.
• Press the power button
• Move the mouse
• Press any key on the keyboard
• Press any key on the optional MCE
remote control
Another failure has occurred. • Ensure that the cables are properly
connected to the system board from
the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD
drive (see page 64).
• If there is an error message on your
screen identifying a problem with a
device (such as the floppy drive or hard
drive), check the device to make sure it
is functioning properly.
• The operating system is attempting to
boot from a device (such as the floppy
drive or hard drive); check system
setup (see page 99) to make sure the
boot sequence is correct for the devices
installed on your computer.
• If the problem persists, contact Dell
(see page 111).
The computer is in a normal operating
condition after POST.
NOTE: The computer turns off all four
diagnostic lights before booting to
Windows after POST.
None.
Light Pattern Problem Description Suggested Resolution48 Troubleshooting Tools
Dell Diagnostics
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
When to Use the Dell Diagnostics
If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in "Solving Problems" on
page 29 and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance.
NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers.
1 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2 When the DELL™ logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the
Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer (see page 55) and try again.
3 When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press .
4 When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run (see
page 48).
Dell Diagnostics Main Menu
1 After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the
option you want.
2 If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a
description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow
the instructions on the screen.
If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see page 111).
Option Function
Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to
20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run
Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the
problem quickly.
Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes
an hour or more and requires you to answer questions
periodically.
Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want
to run.
Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows
you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you
are having.Troubleshooting Tools 49
NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell,
technical support will ask for your Service Tag.
3 If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab
described in the following table for more information.
4 Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and
restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen.
Drivers
What Is a Driver?
A driver is a program that controls a device such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard. All devices require
a driver program.
A driver acts like a translator between the device and any other programs that use the device. Each
device has its own set of specialized commands that only its driver recognizes.
Dell ships your computer to you with required drivers already installed—no further installation or
configuration is needed.
Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, come with your Microsoft® Windows® operating
system. You may need to install drivers if you:
• Upgrade your operating system.
• Reinstall your operating system.
• Connect or install a new device.
Tab Function
Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions
encountered.
Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the
problem description.
Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the
test.
Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device.
The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all
devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests,
and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane
of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the
components installed on your computer or all devices attached to
your computer.
Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings.50 Troubleshooting Tools
If you experience a problem with any device, identify whether the driver is the source of your
problem and, if necessary, update the driver.
Windows XP
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Click System.
4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab.
5 Click Device Manager.
6 Scroll down the list to see if any device has an exclamation point (a yellow circle with a [!]) on
the device icon.
If an exclamation point is next to the device name, you may need to reinstall the driver or
install a new driver (see page 50).
Reinstalling Drivers
NOTICE: The Dell Support website at support.dell.com provides approved drivers for Dell™ computers.
If you install drivers obtained from other sources, your computer might not work correctly.
Using Windows XP Device Driver Rollback
If a problem occurs on your computer after you install or update a driver, use Windows XP Device
Driver Rollback to replace the driver with the previously installed version.
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Under Pick a Category, click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Click System.
4 In the System Properties window, click the Hardware tab.
5 Click Device Manager.
6 Right-click the device for which the new driver was installed and click Properties.
7 Click the Drivers tab.
8 Click Roll Back Driver.
If Device Driver Rollback does not resolve the problem, then use System Restore to return your
computer to the operating state that existed before you installed the new driver.
Manually Reinstalling Drivers
1 After copying the driver files to your hard drive, click the Start button and right-click My
Computer.
2 Click Properties.Troubleshooting Tools 51
3 Click the Hardware tab and click Device Manager.
4 Double-click the type of device for which you are installing the driver.
5 Double-click the name of the device for which you are installing the driver.
6 Click the Driver tab and click Update Driver.
7 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and click Next.
8 Click Browse and browse to the location to which you previously extracted the driver files.
9 When the name of the appropriate driver appears, click Next.
10 Click Finish and restart your computer.
Resolving Software and Hardware Incompatibilities
If a device is either not detected during the operating system setup or is detected but incorrectly
configured, you can use the Hardware Troubleshooter to resolve the incompatibility.
To resolve incompatibilities using the Hardware Troubleshooter:
1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support.
2 Type hardware troubleshooter in the Search field and click the arrow to start the search.
3 Click Hardware Troubleshooter in the Search Results list.
4 In the Hardware Troubleshooter list, click I need to resolve a hardware conflict on my
computer, and click Next.
Restoring Your Operating System
You can restore your operating system in the following ways:
• Microsoft Windows XP System Restore returns your computer to an earlier operating state
without affecting data files.
• Dell PC Restore by Symantec restores your hard drive to the operating state it was in when
you purchased the computer. Dell PC Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive
and removes any applications installed after you received the computer.
NOTE: Dell PC Restore is available only on computers purchased in certain regions.
Using MicrosoftWindows XP System Restore
The Microsoft Windows XP operating system provides System Restore to allow you to return your
computer to an earlier operating state (without affecting data files) if changes to the hardware,
software, or other system settings have left the computer in an undesirable operating state. See the
Windows Help and Support Center for information on using System Restore. To access help, see
page 11.52 Troubleshooting Tools
NOTICE: Make regular backups of your data files. System Restore does not monitor your data files or
recover them.
NOTE: The procedures in this document were written for the Windows default view, so they may not
work if you set your Dell™ computer to the Windows Classic view.
Creating a Restore Point
1 Click the Start button and click Help and Support.
2 Click System Restore.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Restoring the Computer to an Earlier Operating State
If problems occur after you install a device driver, use Device Driver Rollback (see page 50) to
resolve the problem. If that is unsuccessful, then use System Restore.
NOTICE: Before you restore the computer to an earlier operating state, save and close any open files
and exit any open programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system
restoration is complete.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click
System Restore.
2 Ensure that Restore my computer to an earlier time is selected and click Next.
3 Click a calendar date to which you want to restore your computer.
The Select a Restore Point screen provides a calendar that allows you to see and select restore
points. All calendar dates with available restore points appear in boldface type.
4 Select a restore point and click Next.
If a calendar date has only one restore point, then that restore point is automatically selected.
If two or more restore points are available, click the restore point that you prefer.
5 Click Next.
The Restoration Complete screen appears after System Restore finishes collecting data and
then the computer restarts.
6 After the computer restarts, click OK.
To change the restore point, you can either repeat the steps using a different restore point, or you
can undo the restoration.Troubleshooting Tools 53
Undoing the Last System Restore
NOTICE: Before you undo the last system restore, save and close all open files and exit any open
programs. Do not alter, open, or delete any files or programs until the system restoration is complete.
1 Click the Start button, point to All Programs→ Accessories→ System Tools, and then click
System Restore.
2 Click Undo my last restoration and click Next.
Enabling System Restore
If you reinstall Windows XP with less than 200 MB of free hard-disk space available, System
Restore is automatically disabled. To see if System Restore is enabled:
1 Click the Start button and click Control Panel.
2 Click Performance and Maintenance.
3 Click System.
4 Click the System Restore tab.
Ensure that Turn off System Restore is unchecked.
Using Dell PC Restore by Symantec
NOTE: Dell PC Restore is available only on computers purchased in certain regions.
Use Dell PC Restore by Symantec only as the last method to restore your operating system. PC
Restore restores your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you purchased the computer.
Any programs or files added since you received your computer—including data files—are
permanently deleted from the hard drive. Data files include documents, spreadsheets, e-mail
messages, digital photos, music files, and so on. If possible, back up all data before using PC
Restore.
NOTICE: Using PC Restore permanently deletes all data on the hard drive and removes any applications or
drivers installed after you received your computer. If possible, back up the data before using PC Restore.
To use PC Restore:
1 Turn on the computer.
During the boot process, a blue bar with www.dell.com appears at the top of the screen.
2 Immediately upon seeing the blue bar, press .
If you do not press in time, let the computer finish restarting, and then
restart the computer again.
NOTICE: If you do not want to proceed with PC Restore, click Reboot in the following step.
3 On the next screen that appears, click Restore.
4 On the next screen, click Confirm.
The restore process takes approximately 6–10 minutes to complete.54 Troubleshooting Tools
5 When prompted, click Finish to reboot the computer.
NOTE: Do not manually shut down the computer. Click Finish and let the computer completely reboot.
6 When prompted, click Yes.
The computer restarts. Because the computer is restored to its original operating state, the
screens that appear, such as the End User License Agreement, are the same ones that
appeared the first time the computer was turned on.
7 Click Next.
The System Restore screen appears and the computer restarts.
8 After the computer restarts, click OK.
Removing Dell PC Restore
NOTICE: Removing Dell PC Restore from the hard drive permanently deletes the PC Restore utility from
your computer. After you have removed Dell PC Restore, you will not be able to use it to restore your
computer’s operating system.
Dell PC Restore enables you to restore your hard drive to the operating state it was in when you
purchased your computer. It is recommended that you do not remove PC Restore from your
computer, even to gain additional hard-drive space. If you remove PC Restore from the hard drive,
you cannot ever recall it, and you will never be able to use PC Restore to return your computer’s
operating system to its original state.
To remove PC Restore:
1 Log on to the computer as a local administrator.
2 In Windows Explorer, go to c:\dell\utilities\DSR.
3 Double-click the filename DSRIRRemv2.exe.
NOTE: If you do not log on as a local administrator, a message appears stating that you must log on
as administrator. Click Quit, and then log on as a local administrator.
NOTE: If the partition for PC Restore does not exist on your computer’s hard drive, a message
appears stating that the partition was not found. Click Quit; there is no partition to delete.
4 Click OK to remove the PC Restore partition on the hard drive.
5 Click Yes when a confirmation message appears.
The PC Restore partition is deleted and the newly available disk space is added to the free
space allocation on the hard drive.
6 Right-click Local Disk (C) in Windows Explorer, click Properties, and verify that the
additional disk space is available as indicated by the increased value for Free Space.
7 Click Finish to close the PC Restore Removal window.
8 Restart the computer.Removing and Installing Parts 55
Removing and Installing Parts
Before You Begin
This chapter provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer.
Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist:
• You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 55 and "Before
Working Inside Your Computer" on page 55.
• You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide.
• A component can be replaced or—if purchased separately—installed by performing the
removal procedure in reverse order.
Recommended Tools
The procedures in this document may require the following tools:
• Small flat-blade screwdriver
• Phillips screwdriver
Turning Off Your Computer
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn
off your computer.
1 Shut down the operating system:
a Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then
click Turn Off Computer.
b In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off.
The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes.
2 Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and
attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system,
press and hold the power button for 4 seconds.
Before Working Inside Your Computer
Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to
help ensure your own personal safety.56 Removing and Installing Parts
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a
card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor
by its edges, not by its pins.
NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to
servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty.
NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable
itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press
in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly
aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both
connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside
the computer.
1 Turn off your computer (see page 55).
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it
from the network wall jack.
2 Disconnect any telephone or network cables from the computer.
3 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then
press the power button to ground the system board.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before opening the cover.
4 Remove the computer cover (see page 61).
NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted
metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an
unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Removing and Installing Parts 57
Front and Back View of the Computer
Front View
NOTE: The front-panel door does not close when you are using certain Flash Media or IEEE 1394, USB,
or headphone connectors.
2
3
5
4
1
6
12
8
9
7
11
10
1 CD/DVD drive eject
button
Press this button to eject a CD/DVD from the drive.
2 CD/DVD drive-activity
light
The drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD
drive.58 Removing and Installing Parts
3 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks
or cameras (see "System Setup" on page 99 for more information on booting to a USB
device).
It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically
remain connected, such as printers and keyboards.
4 IEEE 1394 connector Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices, such as digital video cameras.
It is recommended that you use the back IEEE 1394 connector for devices that typically
remain connected, such as external hard drives and other storage devices.
5 power button Press this button to turn on the computer.
NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer.
Instead, perform an operating system shutdown.
6 power light The power light illuminates and blinks or remains solid to indicate different states:
• No light — The computer is turned off.
• Steady green — The computer is in a normal operating state.
• Blinking green — The computer is in a power-saving state.
• Blinking or solid amber — See "Power Problems" on page 38.
7 front-panel door release
button
Press this button to access the front-panel connectors.
8 microphone connector Use the pink microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for
voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.
9 headphone connector Use the green headphone connector to attach headphones and most kinds of speakers.
10 hard-drive activity light The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to
the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is
operating.
11 diagnostic lights For more information on what each diagnostic light means, see "Diagnostic Lights" on
page 45.
12 front-panel door This panel covers the CD/DVD drive, the Media Card Reader, and the optional floppy
drive.Removing and Installing Parts 59
Back View
1 voltage selection switch See the safety instructions in the Product
Information Guide for more information.
2 power connector Insert the power cable.
3 back panel connectors Plug IEEE 1394, USB and other devices into the
appropriate connector.
4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI Express
cards.
2
1
3
460 Removing and Installing Parts
12 4
9
8
3 5
6
7
13 12 11 10
1 link integrity light • Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the
computer.
• Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the
computer.
• Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network.
2 network adapter
connector
To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a
network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect
the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back
panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely
attached.
NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector.
On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card.
It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network.
If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure
reliable operation.
3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A
high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on"
state.
4 modem connector Use the modem connector to connect your computer to the Internet.
5 surround sound
connector
Use the black surround sound connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers.
6 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette
player, CD player, or VCR.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.Removing and Installing Parts 61
Removing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide.
1 Shut down the computer through the Start menu (see page 55).
2 Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and
attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn
them off now.
NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it
from the network wall jack.
3 Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer.
4 Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then
press the power button to ground the system board.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before opening the cover.
NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk
top space.
7 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector to attach headphones and most speakers with
integrated amplifiers.
On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card.
8 microphone/side
surround sound
connector
Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for
voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program.
On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.
9 center/LFE connector LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Audio channel found in digital surround sound
audio schemes that carries only low frequency information of 80 Hz and below.
The LFE channel drives a subwoofer to provide extremely low bass extension.
Systems not using subwoofers can shunt the LFE information to the main
speakers in the surround sound set-up.
10 S/PDIF connector This connector is used to transmit digital audio without going through an analog
audio conversion process.
11 VGA connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the
computer.
12 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as
printers and keyboards.
It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you
connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.
13 IEEE 1394 connector Attach high-speed serial multimedia devices, such as digital video cameras.62 Removing and Installing Parts
NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the
computer or the surface on which it is resting.
5 Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up.
6 Pull back the cover latch release on the top panel.
7 Locate the two hinge tabs on the bottom edge of the computer.
8 Grip the sides of the computer cover and pivot the cover up, using the bottom hinges as
leverage points.
9 Release the cover from the hinge tabs and set it aside in a secure location.
cover release latch
security cable slot
computer coverRemoving and Installing Parts 63
Inside View of Your Computer
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before opening the cover.
power supply and fan
hard drive
heat sink assembly power button
front-panel door
drive release
latch
CD/DVD drive64 Removing and Installing Parts
System Board Components
processor connector (CPU)
memory module
connectors (2, 4)
power
connector
(ATXPWR1)
memory module
connectors (1, 3)
RTC reset jumper
(RTCRST)
CD/DVD connector
(IDE_OPT)
power connector
(ATXPWR1)
modem connector
video connector (VGA)
password jumper
(PSWD)
front-panel
connector
(FRONT PANEL)
SATA connector
(SATA0)
S/PDIF audio
connector (SPDIF)
line-in, line-out,
microphone, center,
and LFE connectors
(AUDIO)
processor fan
connector (FAN)
internal speaker
(SPKR)
floppy drive
connector (DSKT)
PCI Express x1
connector
(SLOT2)
PCI Express x16
connector (SLOT1)
front-panel IEEE
1394 connector
(1394_FRONT)
IEEE 1394 connector
(1394_CON)
network connector (NIC) and
USB connectors (2) (NIC_USB1)
USB connectors (3) (USB_BACK)
modem
battery socket
(BATTERY)
Media Card Reader connector (F_USB)Removing and Installing Parts 65
Memory
You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board.
Your computer supports unbuffered, non-ECC, DDR2 memory.
NOTE: Buffered memory is not supported on this computer.
DDR2 Memory Overview
DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology.
If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to
operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the
module’s capacity.
NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board.
The recommended memory configurations are:
• A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 (white securing
clips)
or
• A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another
matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4 (black securing clips)
NOTICE: Do not install ECC memory modules.
• If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300)
memory, the modules function at the speed of the slowest module installed.
• Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the
processor, before you install modules in the other connectors.66 Removing and Installing Parts
NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty.
NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade,
keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules
from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your
computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM
connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM connectors 3 and 4.
Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations
Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use two 2-GB DIMMs. Current
operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can use a maximum of 4 GB of address
space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain
components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space
reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory.
Installing Memory
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the CD/DVD drive (see page 78).
3 Remove the optional Media Card Reader or optional floppy drive, (see page 82 or page 85) if
installed.
matched pair of memory modules in DIMM
connectors 1 and 2 (white securing clips)
matched pair of memory modules in DIMM
connectors 3 and 4 (black securing clips)Removing and Installing Parts 67
4 Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
5 Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector
while you apply equal force to each end of the module.
6 Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position.
If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the
module.
securing clips (2)
connector
memory connector
closest to processor
notch
memory module
cutouts (2)
crossbar68 Removing and Installing Parts
7 Replace the computer cover, (see page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into
the computer.
8 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
9 Right-click the My Computer icon and click Properties.
10 Click the General tab.
11 To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed.
Removing Memory
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector.
3 Grasp the module and pull up.
If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from
the connector.
Cards
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.Removing and Installing Parts 69
Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI Express cards:
• One PCI Express x16 card slot
• One PCI Express x1 card slot
NOTE: The slots for the PCI Express x16 and PCI Express x1 cards are half-height slots.
If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If
you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a PCI Express Card" on page 72.
If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system.
Installing a PCI Express Card
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open.
Because the door is attached, it will remain in the open position.
PCI Express
x16 card
PCI Express
x16 card slot
PCI Express
x1 card
PCI Express
x1 card slot70 Removing and Installing Parts
3 If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then
continue with step 5.
4 If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card.
If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners,
and ease it out of its connector.
5 Prepare the card for installation.
See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card,
making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer.
CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a
network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet
before installing any cards.
6 Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in
the slot.
7 If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot
is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the securing tab.
edge connector
card connector
securing tab
securing slot
PCI Express card
retention
arm tabRemoving and Installing Parts 71
8 Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in
the slot.
9 Before you close the card retention door, ensure that:
• The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar.
• The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide.
card fully
seated
card not fully
seated
bracket caught
outside of slot
bracket
within slot72 Removing and Installing Parts
10 Close the card retention door by snapping it into place.
NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent
the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment.
11 Connect any cables that should be attached to the card.
See the documentation that came with the card for information about the card’s cable
connections.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into
the computer.
12 Replace the computer cover (see page 93), reconnect the computer and devices to electrical
outlets, and then turn them on.
13 Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation.
Removing a PCI Express Card
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card.
3 Gently pull back the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its
connector.
edge connector
card connector
PCI Express card
retention
armRemoving and Installing Parts 73
4 If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot
opening.
NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification
of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer.
5 Replace the computer cover (see page 93), reconnect the computer and devices to electrical
outlets, and then turn them on.
6 Uninstall the card’s driver.
Drives
Your computer supports a combination of these devices:
• One serial ATA drive
• One FlexBay drive (optional floppy drive or Media Card Reader)
• One CD or DVD drive
Connect a CD or DVD drive to the connector labeled "IDE_OPT" on the system board. A serial
ATA hard drive should be connected to the connector labeled "SATA0" on the system board.
Connecting Drive Cables
When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—or a single
interface cable to the back of the drive and to the system board.
FlexBay for optional floppy
drive or Media Card Reader
(under CD/DVD drive)
hard drive
CD/DVD drive74 Removing and Installing Parts
Drive Interface Connectors
Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one
connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Serial ATA cables go to the pin-1
end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a
silk-screened “1” printed directly on the board or card.
NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of
the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller,
the drive, or both.
Power Cable Connector
To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power input connector on the system board.
Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Cables
When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector
detaches.
When connecting and disconnecting a serial ATA data cable, hold the cable by the black connector at
each end.
Serial ATA Connector
interface cable
interface connector
power cable connector
power input
connectorRemoving and Installing Parts 75
Like IDE connectors, the serial ATA interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a
notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector.
Hard Drive
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before removing the cover.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a
surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it.
NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before
you begin this procedure.
Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.76 Removing and Installing Parts
Removing a Hard Drive
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Press in on the blue tabs on each side of the drive and slide the drive up and out of the
computer.
3 Disconnect the power and hard-drive cable from the drive.
tabs (2)
hard drive
serial ATA
data cable
power cableRemoving and Installing Parts 77
Installing a Hard Drive
1 Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation.
2 Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer.
NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the plastic guide bracket attached, remove the
bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive.
3 Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive.
4 Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated.
drive
tabs (2)
drive bracket
serial ATA
data cable
power cable78 Removing and Installing Parts
5 Gently slide the drive into place until you hear a click or feel the drive securely installed.
6 Replace the computer cover (page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into
the computer.
7 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software
required for drive operation.
CD/DVD Drive
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before opening the cover.
Removing a CD/DVD Drive
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
NOTICE: Do not pull the drive out of the computer by the interface cable. Doing so may cause damage to
cables and the cable connectors.
2 Pull up on the drive release latch and slide the drive towards the back of the computer.
3 Carefully, so as not to damage the attached interface cable, lift the drive away from the
computer.
tabs (2)
hard driveRemoving and Installing Parts 79
NOTE: The interface cable is held in place by the metal drive bracket and does not need to be removed
from the drive.
4 Disconnect the interface cable from the interface cable connector on the system board (see
page 64).
drive release
latch
CD/DVD drive
interface cable
interface cable
connector80 Removing and Installing Parts
Installing a CD/DVD Drive
1 Unpack the drive and prepare it for installation.
Check the documentation that accompanied the drive to verify that the drive is configured for
your computer. If you are installing an IDE drive, configure the drive for the cable select setting.
2 Connect the interface cable to the interface cable connector on the system board. See
"System Board Components" on page 64.
3 Slide the drive into place.
interface cable
interface cable
connectorRemoving and Installing Parts 81
4 Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and
cooling vents.
5 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
6 Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
7 See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software
required for drive operation.
8 Enter system setup (see page 99) and select the appropriate Drive option.
Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics (see page 48).
Media Card Reader
For information about using the Media Card Reader, see "Using a Media Card Reader (Optional)"
on page 14.
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.82 Removing and Installing Parts
Removing a Media Card Reader
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the CD/DVD drive (see page 78).
3 Remove the hard drive (see page 76).
4 Disconnect the interface cable from the back of the Media Card Reader and from the Media
Card Reader connector on the system board (see page 64).
interface cableRemoving and Installing Parts 83
5 Pull up on the drive release latch and slide the Media Card Reader towards the back of the
computer. Then, lift to remove the drive from the computer.
Installing a Media Card Reader
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the Media Card Reader from its packaging.
drive release
latch
Media Card
Reader84 Removing and Installing Parts
3 Slide the drive into place until you hear a click or feel the drive securely installed.
4 Connect the interface cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card
Reader connector on the system board.
interface cableRemoving and Installing Parts 85
5 Replace the CD/DVD drive (see page 80).
6 Replace the hard drive (see page 77).
7 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network device and then plug it in to
the computer.
8 Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software
required for drive operation.
9 Enter system setup (see page 99) and select the appropriate Drive option.
10 Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics (see page 48).
Floppy Drive (Optional)
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet
before removing the cover.
Removing a Floppy Drive
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the CD/DVD drive (see page 78).
3 Pull up on the drive release latch and slide the drive toward the back of the computer.
4 Carefully, so as not to damage the attached interface cable, lift the drive away from the
computer.86 Removing and Installing Parts
5 Disconnect the interface cable from the system board (see page 64).
NOTE: The interface cable is held in place by the metal drive bracket and does not need to be removed
from the drive.
drive release
latch
floppy drive
interface cable
edge connector
interface cable
cable release
tabRemoving and Installing Parts 87
Installing a Floppy Drive
NOTE: The interface cable is held in place by the metal drive bracket and does not need to be removed
from the drive.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Gently slide the drive into place until you hear a click or feel the drive securely installed.
3 Attach the interface cable to the system board (see page 64).88 Removing and Installing Parts
4 Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to provide airflow for the fan and
cooling vents.
5 Replace the CD/DVD drive (see page 80).
6 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network device and then plug it in to
the computer.
7 Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on.
See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software
required for drive operation.
8 Enter system setup (see page 99) and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option.
9 Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics (see page 48).
interface cable
edge connector
interface cable
cable release
tabRemoving and Installing Parts 89
Modem
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the
Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: Before you remove or install the modem, make sure to disconnect all telephone and network
cables from your computer.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
Replacing the Modem
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
NOTE: For easier access to the modem, it may be necessary to remove the power cable from the power
connector on the system board.
pull tab
screws (2)
modem
modem cable90 Removing and Installing Parts
2 Remove the existing modem:
a Disconnect the modem cable from the modem.
b Use a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws securing the modem to the
system board, and set the screws aside.
c Pull straight up on the attached pull-tab to lift the modem out of its connector on the
system board.
NOTICE: The connectors are keyed to ensure correct insertion. If you feel resistance, check the
connectors and realign the card.
3 Install the new modem:
a Align the modem with the screw holes and press the modem into the connector on the
system board.
b Connect the modem cable to the modem.
c Use a Phillips screwdriver to replace and tighten the two screws that secure the modem to
the system board.
4 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
Replacing the External Modem Connector
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the modem cable from the modem.
3 Remove the existing modem (see page 89).
NOTE: Note the routing of the modem cable as you remove the modem. You must route the cable
properly when you replace the modem to prevent the cable from being pinched or crimped.
4 Remove the modem cable from the modem.
5 Remove the external modem connector:
a Remove the screw that secures the external modem connector.
b Slide the external modem connector away from the slot that holds the modem connector
in place.
c Lift the modem cable and connector from the computer.Removing and Installing Parts 91
6 To install a new modem cable and external modem connector:
a Attach the modem cable to the external modem connector.
a Align the external connector with the slot on the back on the computer.
b Replace the screw that secures the external modem connector in place.
c Carefully route the cable wire and re-connect the modem cable to the modem.
7 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
Battery
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity
from your body before you touch any of your computer’s electronic components. You can do so by
touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.
A coin-cell battery maintains computer configuration, date, and time information. The battery can
last several years. If you have to repeatedly reset time and date information after turning on the
computer, replace the battery.
screw
(from the back of
the computer)
external modem
connector92 Removing and Installing Parts
CAUTION: A new battery can explode if it is incorrectly installed. Replace the battery only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Replacing the Battery
NOTE: For information regarding the type of coin-cell battery, see "Power" on page 98.
1 Record all the screens in system setup (see page 99) so that you can restore the correct
settings in step 9.
2 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
3 Remove the computer cover (see page 61).
4 Locate the battery socket (see page 64).
NOTICE: If you pry the battery out of its socket with a blunt object, be careful not to touch the system
board with the object. Ensure that the object is inserted between the battery and the socket before you
attempt to pry out the battery. Otherwise, you may damage the system board by prying off the socket or
by breaking circuit traces on the system board.
5 Remove the system battery.
a Press the battery release lever to raise the battery up at a slight angle.
b While supporting the battery connector, pry the battery up out of its securing tabs.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the battery connector, you must firmly support the connector while
installing or removing a battery.
6 Hold the battery with the "+" facing up, and press the battery straight down into the
connector until it snaps into place.
7 Replace the computer cover (see page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into
the computer.
8 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
9 Enter system setup (see page 99) and restore the settings you recorded in step 1.
battery (positive side)
battery
release
leverRemoving and Installing Parts 93
10 Properly dispose of the old battery. See the Product Information Guide for battery disposal
information.
Replacing the Computer Cover
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way.
Gently pull the power cables toward you so that they do not get caught underneath the drives.
2 Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer.
3 Install the cover:
a Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom of edge of the
computer.
b Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward.
c Snap the cover into place by pulling back on the cover release latch, and then releasing
the latch when the cover is properly seated.
d Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving the computer to the upright
position.
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into
the computer.
4 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.94 Removing and Installing PartsAppendix 95
Appendix
Specifications
Processor
Processor types Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with HyperThreading technology
Pentium D 8XXX dual core processors (no Hyper-Threading)
Intel Celeron® D processors
Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB for Pentium 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors and Celeron
D processors
2 x 16 KB for Pentium D 8XXX dual core processors
Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 4 5XXX processors
2 MB for Pentium 4 6XXX processors
2 x 1 MB for Pentium D 8XXX processors
128 KB for Celeron D processors
(depending on your computer configuration) pipelined-burst,
eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM
Memory
Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM
Memory connectors four
Memory capacities 256-MB, 512-MB, 1-GB, or 2-GB non-ECC
Minimum memory 256 MB
Maximum memory 4 GB
NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations" on
page 66 to verify the amount of memory available to the operating
system.
BIOS address F0000h96 Appendix
Computer Information
Chipset Intel 945G Express
DMA channels eight
Interrupt levels 24
BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb
NIC integrated network interface capable of 10/100-Mbps
communication
System clock 800-MHz data rate
Video
Type Intel integrated Graphics Media Accelerator (GMA) 950
Audio
Type Sigmatel STAC9220
Expansion Bus
Bus type PCI Express x1 and x16
Bus speed PCI Express:
x1 slot bidirectional speed: 500 MB/s
x16 slot bidirectional speed: 8 GB/sec
PCI Express:
connector one x1
connector size 36 pins
connector data width (maximum) one PCI Express lane
PCI Express:
connector one x16
connector size 164 pins
connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes
Drives
Externally accessible one slimline 3.5-inch media bay
one slimline 5.25-inch drive bay
Available devices Serial ATA drive, USB memory devices, CD drive, DVD drive,
DVD+RW drive, DVD/CD-RW combo drive, DVD+/-RW, and
Media Card Reader
Internally accessible one bay for 1-inch high hard driveAppendix 97
Connectors
External connectors:
IEEE 1394 one 6-pin powered back-panel connector
one 6-pin powered front-panel connector
Video 15-hole D-SUB connector
USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0–compliant connectors
Audio five back-panel connectors for line-in, line-out, rear-surround
sound, microphone or side-surround sound, and center/Low
Frequency Effects (LFE) channel
back-panel S/PDIF connector
front-panel miniature headphone connector for line-out
front-panel microphone connector
Network adapter RJ45 connector
Modem RJ11 (MDC 1.5) connector
System board connectors:
IDE drive one 50-pin connector
Serial ATA one 7-pin connector
Fan one 5-pin connector
PCI Express x1 36-pin connector
PCI Express x16 164-pin connector
USB 8-pin header for optional Media Card Reader (3.5-inch bay device)
MDC one 12-pin connector
Floppy connector one 26-pin connector
Front panel one 40-pin header
Power one 2 x 22 connector
Processor power one 2 x 2 connector
IEEE 1394 one 2 x 5 header — always connected by cable to the front panel;
supports front-panel IEEE1394 port98 Appendix
Controls and Lights
Power control push button
Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on
state.
amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with an installed
device; solid amber indicates an internal power problem (see "Power
Problems" on page 38).
Hard-drive access light green
Link integrity light (on integrated
network adapter)
green light — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps
network and the computer.
orange light — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps
network and the computer.
off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a physical
connection to the network.
Activity light (on integrated network
adapter)
yellow blinking light
Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (See "Diagnostic Lights" on page 45 for
an explanation of the diagnostic light codes.)
Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system board
Activity light (optional Media Card
Reader)
green blinking light
Power
DC power supply:
Wattage 275 W
Heat dissipation 939 BTU/hr
NOTE: Heat dissipation is calculated based upon the power supply
wattage rating.
Voltage (See the safety instructions
in the Product Information Guide
for important voltage setting
information.)
manual selection power supplies — 90 to 135 V at 50/60 Hz; 180 to
265 V at 50/60 Hz
Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cellAppendix 99
System Setup
Overview
Use system setup as follows:
• To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any
hardware in your computer
• To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password
• To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed
Physical
Height 31.8 cm (12.5 inches)
Width 9.4 cm (3.7 inches)
Depth 36.8 cm (14.5 inches)
Weight 6.89 kg (15.2 lb)
Environmental
Temperature:
Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F)
Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing)
Maximum vibration:
Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min
Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min
Maximum shock:
Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 50.8 cm/sec
(20 inches/sec)
Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 508 cm/sec
(200 inches/sec)
Altitude:
Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft)
Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)100 Appendix
Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen
information for future reference.
NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain
changes can make your computer work incorrectly.
Entering System Setup
1 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
2 When the blue DELL™ logo appears, press immediately.
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the
Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer (see "Turning Off Your
Computer" on page 55) and try again.
System Setup Screens
The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your
computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the options list, active options
field, and key functions.Appendix 101
Options List — This
field appears on the left
side of the system setup
window. The field is a
scrollable list containing
features that define the
configuration of your
computer, including
installed hardware,
power conservation, and
security features.
Scroll up and down the
list with the up- and
down-arrow keys. As an
option is highlighted, the
Option Field displays
more information about
that option and the
option’s current and
available settings.
Press to
expand or contract each
of the main option fields.
Option Field — This field contains information about each
option. In this field you can view your current settings and
make changes to your settings.
Use the right- and left-arrow keys to highlight an option.
Press to make that selection active.
Key Functions — This field appears below the Option Field
and lists keys and their functions within the active system
setup field.102 Appendix
System Setup Options
NOTE: Depending on your computer, BIOS version, and installed devices, the items listed in this section
may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed.
System
System Info Lists system information such as the computer name, the BIOS version
number and date, system tags, and other system-specific information.
NOTE: The system name listed in the BIOS may not appear exactly as the
name that appears on the computer or in the computer’s documentation.
CPU Info Identifies whether the computer’s processor supports Hyper-Threading and
lists the processor bus speed, processor ID, clock speed, and L2 cache.
Memory Info Indicates amount of installed memory, memory speed, channel mode (dual
or single), and type of memory installed.
Date/Time Displays current date and time settings.
Boot Sequence The computer attempts to boot from the sequence of devices specified in
this list.
NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears
in the system setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB
device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list.
Drives
Diskette Drive Identifies and defines the floppy drive attached to the FLOPPY connector
on the system board as Off, USB, Internal, or Read Only.
Drives 0 through
1
Identifies the drives attached to the SATA or IDE connectors on the system
board, and lists the capacity for hard drives.
SATA Operation Identifies and defines the SATA modes. You can set the SATA controller to
AHCI or ATA mode.
Onboard Devices
NIC Controller You can set the NIC to On (default), Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/
PXE setting is active (available only for the future boot process), the
computer prompts the user to press . Pressing this key
combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for
booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the
network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the
boot sequence list.
1394 Controller Enables or disables the IEEE 1394 connections.
Card Reader Enables or disables the optional Media Card Reader.
Audio Controller Enables or disables the onboard audio controller.Appendix 103
USB Controller Set to On (default) so that USB devices will be detected and supported in
the operating system. The No Boot option enables a USB controller, but it
does not recognize a USB storage device.
Video
Primary Video This setting specifies which video controller is primary when two video
controllers are present on the computer.
Video Memory Size Use this option to select 8 MB (default) or 1 MB of system memory for an
integrated video controller.
Performance
HyperThreading If your computer’s processor supports Hyper-Threading, this option appears
in the Options List.
SpeedStep This field specifies whether Enhanced Intel SpeedStep® Technology will be
enabled for any supported processor in the computer.
HDD Acoustic Mode • Bypass — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics
mode setting.
• Quiet (default) — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting.
• Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive
manufacturer.
• Performance —The hard drive operates at its maximum speed.
NOTE: Switching to performance mode may cause the drive to be noisier, but
the drive’s performance is not affected.
NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image.
Security This section displays available system security options.
DEP (Execute
Disable)
• Opt-In (default) — DEP is enabled by default on computers with
NX-capable processors. Only Windows system binaries are covered by DEP
with this option. Applications may enable DEP protection through creating
an application compatibility shim and installing that shim with the
application.
• Opt-Out — DEP is enabled for all processes. Users can manually create
exceptions for specific applications in System Properties, or IT Pros and
ISVs can use the Application Compatibility Toolkit to opt-out.
• Always On — Full DEP coverage with no exceptions.
• Always Off —No user-mode DEP coverage. Drivers and the Widows core
kernel binaries are covered by DEP, but no other binaries are included in the
set of covered applications.
Unlock Setup Use this option with Admin Password to unlock setup options.
NOTE: This option appears only when the Admin Password option is enabled.104 Appendix
Admin Password This option provides restricted access to the computer's system setup in the
same way that access to the computer can be restricted with the System
Password option.
NOTE: To delete a password, enter the old password and press two
times.
System Password Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and
allows a new system password to be assigned and verified.
Password Status This option locks the system password field with the setup password. When
the field is locked, you can no longer disable password security by pressing
when the computer starts.
Power Management
AC Recovery Determines what happens when AC power is restored to the computer.
Auto Power On Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Choices are every day or every
Monday through Friday.
The default setting is Off.
This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip
or surge protector.
Auto Power Time Sets time to automatically turn on the computer.
Time is kept in a 24-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the start-up time
by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers,
or type numbers in both the date and time fields.
This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip
or surge protector.
Suspend Mode The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is running in a lowpower mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned
off for most components, however, system memory remains active.
Quick Resume This feature enables/disables the Intel Viiv Quick Resume Technology.
The default setting is Off.
Maintenance
Event Log Displays the system event log.
POST Behavior
Fastboot When set to On (default), your computer starts more quickly because it
skips certain configurations and tests.
Numlock Key This option involves the rightmost bank of keys on your keyboard. When set
to On (default), this option activates the numeric and mathematical
features shown at the top of each key. When set to Off, this option activates
the cursor-control functions labeled on the bottom of each key.Appendix 105
Boot Sequence
This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices.
NOTICE: If you modify any boot sequence settings, save the new settings to avoid losing the changes.
Option Settings
• Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in
the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if there is no floppy drive installed
in the computer, the computer generates an error message.
• Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating
system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message.
• CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or
if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message.
• USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer.
When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The
BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable,
check the device documentation.
Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot
You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy
drive, or memory key.
1 If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see
"Connectors" on page 97).
2 Turn on (or restart) your computer.
3 When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen,
press .
If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the
Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer (see "Turning Off Your
Computer" on page 55) and try again.
The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices.
POST Hotkeys This option allows you to specify the function keys to display on the screen
when the computer starts.
Keyboard Errors This option disables or enables keyboard error reporting when the computer
starts.106 Appendix
4 Select a device and press .
For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press
.
NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable,
check the device documentation.
NOTE: You can also change the boot sequence using the Boot Sequence options in the System Setup
Options (see page 102).
Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots
1 Enter system setup (see page 100).
2 Press the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to
access the menu.
NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it.
3 Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices.
4 Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark).
5 Press the key or the key to move a selected device up or down the list.Appendix 107
Clearing Forgotten Passwords
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 To clear the password, remove the jumpers from pins 1 and 2.
3 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 93).
4 Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
5 After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down the computer
(see "Turning Off Your Computer" on page 55).
6 Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet.
7 Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button
to ground the system board.
8 Remove the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 93).
9 Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board (see page 107) and attach
the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature.
10 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 93).108 Appendix
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network device and then plug it into
the computer.
11 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Clearing CMOS Settings
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
1 Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin" on page 55.
2 Remove the hard drive (see page 76).
3 Reset the current CMOS settings:
a Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board (see page 107).
b Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3.
c Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait approximately 5 seconds.
d Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3.
4 Replace the hard drive (see page 77).
5 Replace the computer cover (see "Replacing the Computer Cover" on page 93).
NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network wall jack and then plug it into
the computer.
6 Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on.
Cleaning Your Computer
CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions
located in the Product Information Guide.
Computer, Keyboard, and Monitor
CAUTION: Before you clean your computer, disconnect the computer from the electrical outlet. Clean
your computer with a soft cloth dampened with water. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, which may
contain flammable substances.
• Use a vacuum cleaner with a brush attachment to gently remove dust from the slots and holes
on your computer and from between the keys on the keyboard.Appendix 109
NOTICE: Do not wipe the display screen with any soap or alcohol solution. Doing so may damage the
antiglare coating.
• To clean your monitor screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water. If possible, use a
special screen-cleaning tissue or solution suitable for the monitor’s antistatic coating.
• Wipe the keyboard, computer, and plastic part of the monitor with a soft cleaning cloth
moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part dishwashing detergent.
Do not soak the cloth or let water drip inside your computer or keyboard.
Mouse
If your screen cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the mouse. To clean a non-optical mouse:
1 Turn the retainer ring on the underside of your mouse counterclockwise, and then remove the
ball.
2 Wipe the ball with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3 Blow carefully into the ball cage to dislodge dust and lint.
4 If the rollers inside the ball cage are dirty, clean the rollers with a cotton swab moistened
lightly with isopropyl alcohol.
5 Recenter the rollers in their channels if they are misaligned. Ensure that fluff from the swab is
not left on the rollers.
6 Replace the ball and retainer ring, and turn the retainer ring clockwise until it clicks into
place.
CDs and DVDs
NOTICE: Always use compressed air to clean the lens in the CD/DVD drive, and follow the instructions
that come with the compressed air. Never touch the lens in the drive.
If you notice problems, such as skipping, with the playback quality of your CDs or DVDs, try
cleaning the discs.
1 Hold the disc by its outer edge. You can also touch the inside edge of the center hole.
NOTICE: To prevent damaging the surface, do not wipe in a circular motion around the disc.
2 With a soft, lint-free cloth, gently wipe the bottom of the disc (the unlabeled side) in a
straight line from the center to the outer edge of the disc.
For stubborn dirt, try using water or a diluted solution of water and mild soap. You can also
purchase commercial products that clean discs and provide some protection from dust,
fingerprints, and scratches. Cleaning products for CDs are safe to use on DVDs.110 Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy (U.S. Only)
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer
in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software
programs, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as
the verification of appropriate functionality of the computer and all Dell-installed hardware. In
addition to this technician-assisted technical support, online technical support is available at
support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the computer and any "Dell-installed" software and
peripherals1
. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original
manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Dell Software and Peripherals,
Readyware, and Custom Factory Integration2
.
1
Repair services are provided pursuant to the terms and conditions of your limited warranty and any optional
support service contract purchased with the computer.
2
All Dell-standard components included in a Custom Factory Integration (CFI) project are covered by the standard Dell limited warranty for your computer. However, Dell also extends a parts replacement program to
cover all nonstandard, third-party hardware components integrated through CFI for the duration of the computer’s service contract.
Definition of "Dell-Installed" Software and Peripherals
Dell-installed software includes the operating system and some of the software programs that are
installed on the computer during the manufacturing process (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus,
and so on).
Dell-installed peripherals include any internal expansion cards, or Dell-branded module bay or PC
Card accessories. In addition, any Dell-branded monitors, keyboards, mice, speakers, microphones
for telephonic modems, docking stations/port replicators, networking products, and all associated
cabling are included.
Definition of "Third-Party" Software and Peripherals
Third-party software and peripherals include any peripheral, accessory, or software program sold by
Dell not under the Dell brand (printers, scanners, cameras, games, and so on). Support for all thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer of the product.
FCC Notices (U.S. Only)
FCC Class B
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference with radio
and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Appendix 111
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference.
2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTICE: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Inc.
could void your authority to operate this equipment.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference with radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient the receiving antenna.
• Relocate the system with respect to the receiver.
• Move the system away from the receiver.
• Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver are on different
branch circuits.
If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced radio/television technician for
additional suggestions.
The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in
compliance with the FCC regulations:
Contacting Dell
To contact Dell electronically, you can access the following websites:
• www.dell.com
• support.dell.com (technical support)
• premiersupport.dell.com (technical support for educational, government, healthcare, and
medium/large business customers, including Premier, Platinum, and Gold customers)
Product name: Dell™ XPS 200
Model number: DHP
Company name: Dell Inc.
Worldwide Regulatory Compliance & Environmental Affairs
One Dell Way
Round Rock, TX 78682 USA
512-338-4400112 Appendix
For specific web addresses for your country, find the appropriate country section in the table below.
NOTE: Toll-free numbers are for use within the country for which they are listed.
NOTE: In certain countries, technical support specific to Dell XPS portable computers is available at a
separate telephone number listed for participating countries. If you do not see a telephone number listed
that is specific for XPS portable computers, you may contact Dell through the technical support number
listed and your call will be routed appropriately.
When you need to contact Dell, use the electronic addresses, telephone numbers, and codes
provided in the following table. If you need assistance in determining which codes to use, contact a
local or an international operator.
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers
Anguilla General Support toll-free: 800-335-0031
Antigua and Barbuda General Support 1-800-805-5924
Argentina (Buenos Aires)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 54
City Code: 11
Website: www.dell.com.ar
E-mail: us_latin_services@dell.com
E-mail for desktop and portable computers:
la-techsupport@dell.com
E-mail for servers and EMC® storage products:
la_enterprise@dell.com
Customer Care toll-free: 0-800-444-0730
Tech Support toll-free: 0-800-444-0733
Tech Support Services toll-free: 0-800-444-0724
Sales 0-810-444-3355
Aruba General Support toll-free: 800-1578Appendix 113
Australia (Sydney)
International Access Code: 0011
Country Code: 61
City Code: 2
E-mail (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com
E-mail Customer Care (Australia and
New Zealand): apcustserv@dell.com
Home and Small Business 1-300-655-533
Government and Business toll-free: 1-800-633-559
Preferred Accounts Division (PAD) toll-free: 1-800-060-889
Customer Care (after sales) toll-free 1-333-55(option 3)
Technical Support (portables and desktops) toll-free: 1-300-655-533
Technical Support (servers and workstations) toll-free: 1-800-733-314
Corporate Sales toll-free: 1-800-808-385
Transaction Sales toll-free: 1-800-808-312
Fax toll-free: 1-800-818-341
Austria (Vienna)
International Access Code: 900
Country Code: 43
City Code: 1
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Home/Small Business Sales 0820 240 530 00
Home/Small Business Fax 0820 240 530 49
Home/Small Business Customer Care 0820 240 530 14
Preferred Accounts/Corporate Customer Care 0820 240 530 16
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 0820 240 530 81
Home/Small Business Technical Support for all
other Dell computers
0820 240 530 14
Preferred Accounts/Corporate Technical Support 0660 8779
Switchboard 0820 240 530 00
Bahamas General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6818
Barbados General Support 1-800-534-3066
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers114 Appendix
Belgium (Brussels)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 32
City Code: 2
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail for French-speaking Customers:
support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 02 481 92 96
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 02 481 92 88
Technical Support Fax 02 481 92 95
Customer Care 02 713 15 65
Corporate Sales 02 481 91 00
Fax 02 481 92 99
Switchboard 02 481 91 00
Bermuda General Support 1-800-342-0671
Bolivia General Support toll-free: 800-10-0238
Brazil
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 55
City Code: 51
Website: www.dell.com/br
Customer Support, Technical Support 0800 90 3355
Technical Support Fax 51 481 5470
Customer Care Fax 51 481 5480
Sales 0800 90 3390
British Virgin Islands General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6820
Brunei
Country Code: 673
Customer Technical Support (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4966
Customer Care (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4888
Transaction Sales (Penang, Malaysia) 604 633 4955
Canada (North York, Ontario)
International Access Code: 011
Online Order Status: www.dell.ca/ostatus
AutoTech (automated technical support) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362
Customer Care (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096
Customer Care (med./large business, government) toll-free: 1-800-326-9463
Technical Support (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-847-4096
Technical Support (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5757
Technical Support (printers, projectors, televisions,
handhelds, digital jukebox, and wireless)
1-877-335-5767
Sales (Home Sales/Small Business) toll-free: 1-800-387-5752
Sales (med./large bus., government) toll-free: 1-800-387-5755
Spare Parts Sales & Extended Service Sales 1 866 440 3355
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 115
Cayman Islands General Support 1-800-805-7541
Chile (Santiago)
Country Code: 56
City Code: 2
Sales, Customer Support, and Technical Support toll-free: 1230-020-4823
China (Xiamen)
Country Code: 86
City Code: 592
Technical Support website: support.dell.com.cn
Technical Support E-mail: cn_support@dell.com
Customer Care E-mail: customer_cn@dell.com
Technical Support Fax 592 818 1350
Technical Support (Dell™ Dimension™ and
Inspiron)
toll-free: 800 858 2969
Technical Support (OptiPlex™, Latitude™, and
Dell Precision™)
toll-free: 800 858 0950
Technical Support (servers and storage) toll-free: 800 858 0960
Technical Support (projectors, PDAs, switches,
routers, and so on)
toll-free: 800 858 2920
Technical Support (printers) toll-free: 800 858 2311
Customer Care toll-free: 800 858 2060
Customer Care Fax 592 818 1308
Home and Small Business toll-free: 800 858 2222
Preferred Accounts Division toll-free: 800 858 2557
Large Corporate Accounts GCP toll-free: 800 858 2055
Large Corporate Accounts Key Accounts toll-free: 800 858 2628
Large Corporate Accounts North toll-free: 800 858 2999
Large Corporate Accounts North Government and
Education
toll-free: 800 858 2955
Large Corporate Accounts East toll-free: 800 858 2020
Large Corporate Accounts East Government and
Education
toll-free: 800 858 2669
Large Corporate Accounts Queue Team toll-free: 800 858 2572
Large Corporate Accounts South toll-free: 800 858 2355
Large Corporate Accounts West toll-free: 800 858 2811
Large Corporate Accounts Spare Parts toll-free: 800 858 2621
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers116 Appendix
Colombia General Support 980-9-15-3978
Costa Rica General Support 0800-012-0435
Czech Republic (Prague)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 420
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com
Technical Support 22537 2727
Customer Care 22537 2707
Fax 22537 2714
Tech Fax 22537 2728
Switchboard 22537 2711
Denmark (Copenhagen)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 45
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 7010 0074
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 7023 0182
Customer Care (Relational) 7023 0184
Home/Small Business Customer Care 3287 5505
Switchboard (Relational) 3287 1200
Switchboard Fax (Relational) 3287 1201
Switchboard (Home/Small Business) 3287 5000
Switchboard Fax (Home/Small Business) 3287 5001
Dominica General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6821
Dominican Republic General Support 1-800-148-0530
Ecuador General Support toll-free: 999-119
El Salvador General Support 01-899-753-0777
Finland (Helsinki)
International Access Code: 990
Country Code: 358
City Code: 9
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/
Technical Support 09 253 313 60
Customer Care 09 253 313 38
Fax 09 253 313 99
Switchboard 09 253 313 00
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 117
France (Paris) (Montpellier)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 33
City Codes: (1) (4)
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/
Home and Small Business
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 0825 387 129
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 0825 387 270
Customer Care 0825 823 833
Switchboard 0825 004 700
Switchboard (calls from outside of France) 04 99 75 40 00
Sales 0825 004 700
Fax 0825 004 701
Fax (calls from outside of France) 04 99 75 40 01
Corporate
Technical Support 0825 004 719
Customer Care 0825 338 339
Switchboard 01 55 94 71 00
Sales 01 55 94 71 00
Fax 01 55 94 71 01
Germany (Langen)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 49
City Code: 6103
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 06103 766-7222
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 06103 766-7200
Home/Small Business Customer Care 0180-5-224400
Global Segment Customer Care 06103 766-9570
Preferred Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9420
Large Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9560
Public Accounts Customer Care 06103 766-9555
Switchboard 06103 766-7000
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers118 Appendix
Greece
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 30
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/
Technical Support 00800-44 14 95 18
Gold Service Technical Support 00800-44 14 00 83
Switchboard 2108129810
Gold Service Switchboard 2108129811
Sales 2108129800
Fax 2108129812
Grenada General Support toll-free: 1-866-540-3355
Guatemala General Support 1-800-999-0136
Guyana General Support toll-free: 1-877-270-4609
Hong Kong
International Access Code: 001
Country Code: 852
Website: support.ap.dell.com
Technical Support E-mail: apsupport@dell.com
Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) 2969 3188
Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell
Precision)
2969 3191
Technical Support (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™,
PowerConnect™, and PowerVault™)
2969 3196
Customer Care 3416 0910
Large Corporate Accounts 3416 0907
Global Customer Programs 3416 0908
Medium Business Division 3416 0912
Home and Small Business Division 2969 3105
India E-mail: india_support_desktop@dell.com
india_support_notebook@dell.com
india_support_Server@dell.com
Technical Support 1600338045
and 1600448046
Sales (Large Corporate Accounts) 1600 33 8044
Sales (Home and Small Business) 1600 33 8046
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 119
Ireland (Cherrywood)
International Access Code: 16
Country Code: 353
City Code: 1
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 1850 200 722
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 1850 543 543
U.K. Technical Support (dial within U.K. only) 0870 908 0800
Home User Customer Care 01 204 4014
Small Business Customer Care 01 204 4014
U.K. Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) 0870 906 0010
Corporate Customer Care 1850 200 982
Corporate Customer Care (dial within U.K. only) 0870 907 4499
Ireland Sales 01 204 4444
U.K. Sales (dial within U.K. only) 0870 907 4000
Fax/Sales Fax 01 204 0103
Switchboard 01 204 4444
Italy (Milan)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 39
City Code: 02
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/
Home and Small Business
Technical Support 02 577 826 90
Customer Care 02 696 821 14
Fax 02 696 821 13
Switchboard 02 696 821 12
Corporate
Technical Support 02 577 826 90
Customer Care 02 577 825 55
Fax 02 575 035 30
Switchboard 02 577 821
Jamaica General Support (dial from within Jamaica only) 1-800-682-3639
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers120 Appendix
Japan (Kawasaki)
International Access Code: 001
Country Code: 81
City Code: 44
Website: support.jp.dell.com
Technical Support (servers) toll-free: 0120-198-498
Technical Support outside of Japan (servers) 81-44-556-4162
Technical Support (Dimension and Inspiron) toll-free: 0120-198-226
Technical Support outside of Japan (Dimension and
Inspiron)
81-44-520-1435
Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and
Latitude)
toll-free:0120-198-433
Technical Support outside of Japan (Dell Precision,
OptiPlex, and Latitude)
81-44-556-3894
Technical Support (PDAs, projectors, printers,
routers)
toll-free: 0120-981-690
Technical Support outside of Japan (PDAs,
projectors, printers, routers)
81-44-556-3468
Faxbox Service 044-556-3490
24-Hour Automated Order Service 044-556-3801
Customer Care 044-556-4240
Business Sales Division (up to 400 employees) 044-556-1465
Preferred Accounts Division Sales (over 400
employees)
044-556-3433
Large Corporate Accounts Sales (over 3500
employees)
044-556-3430
Public Sales (government agencies, educational
institutions, and medical institutions)
044-556-1469
Global Segment Japan 044-556-3469
Individual User 044-556-1760
Switchboard 044-556-4300
Korea (Seoul)
International Access Code: 001
Country Code: 82
City Code: 2
E-mail: krsupport@dell.com
Technical Support toll-free: 080-200-3800
Technical Support (Dimension, PDA, Electronics
and Accessories)
toll-free: 080-200-3801
Sales toll-free: 080-200-3600
Fax 2194-6202
Switchboard 2194-6000
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 121
Latin America Customer Technical Support (Austin, Texas,
U.S.A.)
512 728-4093
Customer Service (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-3619
Fax (Technical Support and Customer Service)
(Austin, Texas, U.S.A.)
512 728-3883
Sales (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4397
SalesFax (Austin, Texas, U.S.A.) 512 728-4600
or 512 728-3772
Luxembourg
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 352
Website: support.euro.dell.com
Technical Support 342 08 08 075
Home/Small Business Sales +32 (0)2 713 15 96
Corporate Sales 26 25 77 81
Customer Care +32 (0)2 481 91 19
Fax 26 25 77 82
Macao
Country Code: 853
Technical Support toll-free: 0800 105
Customer Service (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910
Transaction Sales (Xiamen, China) 29 693 115
Malaysia (Penang)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 60
City Code: 4
Website: support.ap.dell.com
Technical Support (Dell Precision, OptiPlex, and
Latitude)
toll-free: 1 800 880 193
Technical Support (Dimension, Inspiron, and
Electronics and Accessories)
toll-free: 1 800 881 306
Technical Support (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect, and PowerVault)
toll-free: 1800 881 386
Customer Care toll-free: 1800 881 306
(option 6)
Transaction Sales toll-free: 1 800 888 202
Corporate Sales toll-free: 1 800 888 213
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers122 Appendix
Mexico
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 52
Customer Technical Support 001-877-384-8979
or 001-877-269-3383
Sales 50-81-8800
or 01-800-888-3355
Customer Service 001-877-384-8979
or 001-877-269-3383
Main 50-81-8800
or 01-800-888-3355
Montserrat General Support toll-free: 1-866-278-6822
Netherlands Antilles General Support 001-800-882-1519
Netherlands (Amsterdam)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 31
City Code: 20
Website: support.euro.dell.com
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 020 674 45 94
Technical Support for all other Dell computers 020 674 45 00
Technical Support Fax 020 674 47 66
Home/Small Business Customer Care 020 674 42 00
Relational Customer Care 020 674 4325
Home/Small Business Sales 020 674 55 00
Relational Sales 020 674 50 00
Home/Small Business Sales Fax 020 674 47 75
Relational Sales Fax 020 674 47 50
Switchboard 020 674 50 00
Switchboard Fax 020 674 47 50
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 123
New Zealand
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 64
E-mail (New Zealand): nz_tech_support@dell.com
E-mail Customer Care (Australia and
New Zealand): apcustserv@dell.com
Customer Care toll-free: 0800-289-335
(option 3)
Technical Support (for desktop and portable
computers)
toll-free: 0800 446 255
Technical Support (for servers and workstations) toll-free: 0800 443 563
Home and Small Business 0800 446 255
Government and Business 0800 444 617
Sales 0800 441 567
Fax 0800 441 566
Nicaragua General Support 001-800-220-1006
Norway (Lysaker)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 47
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 815 35 043
Technical Support for all other Dell products 671 16882
Relational Customer Care 671 17575
Home/Small Business Customer Care 23162298
Switchboard 671 16800
Fax Switchboard 671 16865
Panama General Support 001-800-507-0962
Peru General Support 0800-50-669
Poland (Warsaw)
International Access Code: 011
Country Code: 48
City Code: 22
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: pl_support_tech@dell.com
Customer Service Phone 57 95 700
Customer Care 57 95 999
Sales 57 95 999
Customer Service Fax 57 95 806
Reception Desk Fax 57 95 998
Switchboard 57 95 999
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers124 Appendix
Portugal
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 351
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/
Technical Support 707200149
Customer Care 800 300 413
Sales 800 300 410 or 800 300 411 or
800 300 412 or 21 422 07 10
Fax 21 424 01 12
Puerto Rico General Support 1-800-805-7545
St. Kitts and Nevis General Support toll-free: 1-877-441-4731
St. Lucia General Support 1-800-882-1521
St. Vincent and the Grenadines General Support toll-free: 1-877-270-4609
Singapore (Singapore)
International Access Code: 005
Country Code: 65
Website: support.ap.dell.com
Technical Support (Dimension, Inspiron, and
Electronics and Accessories)
toll-free: 1800 394 7430
Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell
Precision)
toll-free: 1800 394 7488
Technical Support (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect, and PowerVault)
toll-free: 1800 394 7478
Customer Care toll-free: 1 800 394 7430
(option 6)
Transaction Sales toll-free: 1 800 394 7412
Corporate Sales toll-free: 1 800 394 7419
Slovakia (Prague)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 421
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: czech_dell@dell.com
Technical Support 02 5441 5727
Customer Care 420 22537 2707
Fax 02 5441 8328
Tech Fax 02 5441 8328
Switchboard (Sales) 02 5441 7585
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 125
South Africa (Johannesburg)
International Access Code:
09/091
Country Code: 27
City Code: 11
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: dell_za_support@dell.com
Gold Queue 011 709 7713
Technical Support 011 709 7710
Customer Care 011 709 7707
Sales 011 709 7700
Fax 011 706 0495
Switchboard 011 709 7700
Southeast Asian and Pacific
Countries
Customer Technical Support, Customer Service,
and Sales (Penang, Malaysia)
604 633 4810
Spain (Madrid)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 34
City Code: 91
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/
Home and Small Business
Technical Support 902 100 130
Customer Care 902 118 540
Sales 902 118 541
Switchboard 902 118 541
Fax 902 118 539
Corporate
Technical Support 902 100 130
Customer Care 902 115 236
Switchboard 91 722 92 00
Fax 91 722 95 83
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers126 Appendix
Sweden (Upplands Vasby)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 46
City Code: 8
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 0771 340 340
Technical Support for all other Dell products 08 590 05 199
Relational Customer Care 08 590 05 642
Home/Small Business Customer Care 08 587 70 527
Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Support 20 140 14 44
Technical Support Fax 08 590 05 594
Sales 08 590 05 185
Switzerland (Geneva)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 41
City Code: 22
Website: support.euro.dell.com
E-mail: Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com
E-mail for French-speaking HSB and Corporate
Customers: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 0848 33 88 57
Technical Support (Home and Small Business) for
all other Dell products
0844 811 411
Technical Support (Corporate) 0844 822 844
Customer Care (Home and Small Business) 0848 802 202
Customer Care (Corporate) 0848 821 721
Fax 022 799 01 90
Switchboard 022 799 01 01
Taiwan
International Access Code: 002
Country Code: 886
Website: support.ap.dell.com
E-mail: ap_support@dell.com
Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron,
Dimension, and Electronics and Accessories)
toll-free: 00801 86 1011
Technical Support (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect, and PowerVault)
toll-free: 00801 60 1256
Customer Care toll-free: 00801 60 1250
(option 5)
Transaction Sales toll-free: 00801 65 1228
Corporate Sales toll-free: 00801 651 227
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersAppendix 127
Thailand
International Access Code: 001
Country Code: 66
Website: support.ap.dell.com
Technical Support (OptiPlex, Latitude, and Dell
Precision)
toll-free: 1800 0060 07
Technical Support (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect, and PowerVault)
toll-free: 1800 0600 09
Customer Care toll-free: 1800 006 007
(option 7)
Corporate Sales toll-free: 1800 006 009
Transaction Sales toll-free: 1800 006 006
Trinidad/Tobago General Support 1-800-805-8035
Turks and Caicos Islands General Support toll-free: 1-866-540-3355
U.K. (Bracknell)
International Access Code: 00
Country Code: 44
City Code: 1344
Website: support.euro.dell.com
Customer Care website:
support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp
E-mail: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Technical Support (Corporate/Preferred
Accounts/PAD [1000+ employees])
0870 908 0500
Technical Support for XPS portable computers only 0870 366 4180
Technical Support (direct and general) for all other
products
0870 908 0800
Global Accounts Customer Care 01344 373 186
Home and Small Business Customer Care 0870 906 0010
Corporate Customer Care 01344 373 185
Preferred Accounts (500–5000 employees)
Customer Care
0870 906 0010
Central Government Customer Care 01344 373 193
Local Government & Education Customer Care 01344 373 199
Health Customer Care 01344 373 194
Home and Small Business Sales 0870 907 4000
Corporate/Public Sector Sales 01344 860 456
Home and Small Business Fax 0870 907 4006
Uruguay General Support toll-free: 000-413-598-2521
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free Numbers128 Appendix
U.S.A. (Austin, Texas)
International Access Code: 011
Country Code: 1
Automated Order-Status Service toll-free: 1-800-433-9014
AutoTech (portable and desktop computers) toll-free: 1-800-247-9362
Technical Support (Dell TV, Printers, and
Projectors) for Relationship customers
toll-free 1-877-459-7298
Consumer (Home and Home Office) Technical
Support for all other Dell products
toll-free: 1-800-624-9896
Customer Service toll-free: 1-800-624-9897
DellNet™ Service and Support toll-free: 1-877-Dellnet
(1-877-335-5638)
Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133
Financial Services website:
www.dellfinancialservices.com
Financial Services (lease/loans) toll-free: 1-877-577-3355
Financial Services (Dell Preferred Accounts [DPA]) toll-free: 1-800-283-2210
Business
Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355
Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133
Printers and Projectors Technical Support toll-free: 1-877-459-7298
Public (government, education, and healthcare)
Customer Service and Technical Support toll-free: 1-800-456-3355
Employee Purchase Program (EPP) Customers toll-free: 1-800-695-8133
Dell Sales toll-free: 1-800-289-3355
or toll-free: 1-800-879-3355
Dell Outlet Store (Dell refurbished computers) toll-free: 1-888-798-7561
Software and Peripherals Sales toll-free: 1-800-671-3355
Spare Parts Sales toll-free: 1-800-357-3355
Extended Service and Warranty Sales toll-free: 1-800-247-4618
Fax toll-free: 1-800-727-8320
Dell Services for the Deaf, Hard-of-Hearing, or
Speech-Impaired
toll-free: 1-877-DELLTTY
(1-877-335-5889)
U.S. Virgin Islands General Support 1-877-673-3355
Venezuela General Support 8001-3605
Country (City)
International Access Code
Country Code
City Code
Department Name or Service Area,
Website and E-Mail Address
Area Codes,
Local Numbers, and
Toll-Free NumbersIndex 129
Index
A
audio. See sound
B
battery
problems, 29
replacing, 91
BIOS, 99
boot sequence, 105
changing, 105-106
option settings, 105
booting
to a USB device, 105
C
cards
installing, 69
removing, 72
slots, 68
types supported, 68
CD/DVD drive
problems, 30
CD/DVD-RW drive
problems, 30
CDs, 21
playing, 18
Check Disk, 31
CMOS settings
clearing, 108
computer
cleaning, 108
crashes, 34-35
internal parts, 63
restore to previous operating
state, 51-52
stops responding, 34-35
copying CDs
general information, 21
helpful tips, 23
how to, 21
copying DVDs
general information, 21
helpful tips, 23
how to, 21
cover
closing, 93
opening, 61
D
Dell
contacting, 110-111
Dell Diagnostics, 48
support policy, 110
support site, 10
Dell Premier Support
website, 10
diagnostic lights, 45
diagnostics
Dell, 48
lights, 45
display. See monitor
documentation
End User License
Agreement, 9
ergonomics, 9
online, 10
Product Information Guide, 9
regulatory, 9
safety, 9
Setup Diagram, 9
warranty, 9
drivers
about, 49
identifying, 49
drives
hard drive, 75
installing floppy, 87
installing hard drive, 77
problems, 29
removing floppy, 85
removing hard drive, 76
serial ATA, 75
DVD drive
problems, 30
DVDs, 21
playing, 18130 Index
130 Index
E
e-mail
problems, 31
End User License
Agreement, 9
ergonomics information, 9
error messages
diagnostic lights, 45
F
floppy drive
installing, 87
removing, 85
H
hard drive
installing, 77
problems, 31
removing, 76
hardware
Dell Diagnostics, 48
Hardware Troubleshooter, 51
Help and Support Center, 11
hibernate mode, 24, 26
Hyper-Threading, 27
I
IEEE 1394
problems, 33
installing parts
before you begin, 55
recommended tools, 55
turning off your computer, 55
Internet
connection, about, 17
connection, options, 17
connection, setting up, 17
problems, 31
K
keyboard
problems, 34
L
labels
Microsoft Windows, 10
Service Tag, 10
lights
back of computer, 45
diagnostic, 45
M
media card reader
installing, 83
problems, 33
removing, 82
using, 14
memory
4-GB configurations, 66
DDR2 overview, 65
installation guidelines, 65
memory (continued)
installing, 66
problems, 36
removing, 68
type supported, 65
messages
error, 32
Microsoft Windows label, 10
modem
adding, 89
problems, 31
monitor
blank, 42
clone mode, 16
connect TV, 15
display settings, 16
extended desktop mode, 16
hard to read, 43
problems, 42
motherboard. See system
board
mouse
problems, 37
N
network
Network Setup Wizard, 17
problems, 38
setting up, 16
Network Setup Wizard, 17Index 131
O
operating system
restoring, 51-52
P
password
clearing, 107
jumper, 107
PC Restore, 51-52
PCI Express cards
installing, 69
removing, 72
playing
CDs, 18
DVDs, 18
power
conserving, 24
hibernate mode, 24, 26
managing, 24
options, 25
options, advanced, 26
options, hibernate, 26
options, schemes, 25
problems, 38
standby mode, 24
power light
conditions, 38
printer
cable, 13
connecting, 13
problems, 39
setting up, 13
USB, 14
problems
battery, 29
blue screen, 35
CD drive, 30
CD/DVD-RW drive, 30
computer crashes, 34-35
computer stops
responding, 34-35
Dell Diagnostics, 48
diagnostic lights, 45
drives, 29
DVD drive, 30
e-mail, 31
error messages, 32
general, 34
hard drive, 31
IEEE 1394, 33
Internet, 31
keyboard, 34
media card reader, 33
memory, 36
modem, 31
monitor is blank, 42
monitor is hard to read, 43
mouse, 37
network, 38
power, 38
power light conditions, 38
printer, 39
program crashes, 35
program stops responding, 35
programs and Windows
compatibility, 35
restore to previous operating
state, 51-52
scanner, 40
screen is blank, 42
screen is hard to read, 43
software, 35-36
problems (continued)
sound and speakers, 41
technical support policy, 110
troubleshooting tips, 29
video and monitor, 42
volume adjusting, 41
Product Information Guide, 9
Program Compatibility
Wizard, 35
R
regulatory information, 9
restoring
Windows XP, 51-52
S
safety instructions, 9
SATA. See serial ATA
scanner
problems, 40
screen. See monitor
serial ATA, 75
Service Tag, 10
settings
system setup, 99
Setup Diagram, 9
software
Hyper-Threading, 27
problems, 35-36
sound
problems, 41
volume, 41132 Index
132 Index
speaker
problems, 41
volume, 41
specifications
audio, 96
computer information, 96
connectors, 97
controls and lights, 98
drives, 96
environmental, 99
expansion bus, 96
memory, 95
physical, 99
power, 98
processor, 95
technical, 95
video, 96
standby mode, 24
support
contacting Dell, 110-111
policy, 110
system board, 64
System Restore, 51-52
system setup
entering, 100
options, 102
screens, 100
T
technical support
policy, 110
troubleshooting
Dell Diagnostics, 48
diagnostic lights, 45
Hardware Troubleshooter, 51
Help and Support Center, 11
restore to previous operating
state, 51-52
tips, 29
TV
connect to computer, 15
U
USB
booting to devices, 105
V
video
problems, 42
volume
adjusting, 41
W
warranty information, 9
Windows XP
Device Driver Rollback, 50
Hardware Troubleshooter, 51
Help and Support Center, 11
Hyper-Threading, 27
Network Setup Wizard, 17
Program Compatibility
Wizard, 35
restoring, 51-52
scanner, 41
System Restore, 51-52
wizards
Network Setup Wizard, 17
Program Compatibility
Wizard, 35
Projector Dell™ 1609WX
Manual do utilizadorNotas, Advertências e Chamadas de
atenção
NOTA: Uma NOTA assinala informação que o ajuda a tirar o
máximo partido do seu projector.
ADVERTÊNCIA: Uma ADVERTÊNCIA assinala quer potenciais
danos ao nível do hardware quer a perda de dados e diz-lhe
como evitar o problema.
ATENÇÃO: Uma chamada de ATENÇÃO assinala a
possibilidade de ocorrência de danos materiais, de ferimentos
físicos ou o risco de morte.
____________________
A informação deste documento está sujeita a alterações sem aviso prévio.
© 2008 Dell Inc. Reservados todos os direitos.
É expressamente proibida a reprodução seja de que forma for sem autorização
escrita da Dell Inc.
Marcas registadas utilizadas neste texto: Dell e o logótipo DELL são marcas
registadas da Dell Inc.; DLP, o logótipo DLP® e DarkChip™2 são ambas marcas
registadas da Texas Instruments; Microsoft e Windows são marcas registadas
marcas comerciais da Microsoft Corporation nos Estados Unidos e/ou outros
países.
Outros nomes ou marcas registadas podem ser utilizados neste documento como
referência às entidades titulares dos respectivos nomes e marcas ou dos seus
produtos. A Dell Inc. nega qualquer interesse nos nomes ou nas marcas registadas
que não sejam propriedade sua.
Modelo 1609WX
Maio de 2008 Rev. A01Índice 3
Índice
1 O seu projector Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Acerca do seu projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 Ligar o projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ligar um computador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ligar um computador usando um cabo VGA . . . . . 8
Ligar um computador usando um cabo DVI-D . . . . 9
Ligação a um computador com um cabo
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Circuito de ligação de monitor usando cabos
VGA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ligação a um leitor de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo
S-vídeo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo
de sinal composto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo
de sinal componente . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo
de sinal componente . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando
um cabo HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3 Utilização do projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ligar o projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Índice
Desligar o projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Ajuste da imagem projectada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Elevar o projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Baixar o projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ajuste do zoom e da focagem do projector . . . . . . . 19
Ajuste do tamanho da imagem projectada . . . . . . . 20
Utilização do painel de controlo . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Utilização do controlo remoto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Utilização da informação apresentada no ecrã . . . . 25
Menu principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SEL. ENT. (SELECCIONAR ENTRADA) . . . . . . . 26
AJUSTAR AUTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CONFIGURAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
IMAGEM (no modo PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
IMAGEM (no modo Vídeo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ECRÃ (no modo PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ECRÃ (no modo de Vídeo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
LÂMPADA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
IDIOMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
OUTROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4 Resolução de problemas do projector . . 37
Substituição da lâmpada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5 Especificações . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6 Como contactar a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7 Apêndice: Glossário . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48O seu projector Dell 5
1
O seu projector Dell
Antes de ligar o projector certifique-se de que todos os componentes necessários
estão incluídos na embalagem. O seu projector vem acompanhado dos
componentes mostrados em baixo. Contacte a Dell (veja a secção Como contactar
a Dell na página 47) se qualquer um dos componentes estiver em falta.
O seu projector 1609WX da Dell™ deve vir acompanhado dos componentes
seguintes:
Conteúdo da embalagem
Cabo de alimentação Cabo VGA de 1,8m (VGA para VGA)
Bateria CR2032 Controlo remoto
CD Manual do Utilizador &
Documentação
Mala de transporte
CR2032
3V
DELL6 O seu projector Dell
Acerca do seu projector
ATENÇÃO: Instruções de Segurança
1 Não utilize o projector na proximidade de electrodomésticos que gerem muito
calor.
2 Não utilize o projector em áreas onde exista demasiado pó. O pó pode conduzir a
falhas do sistema e o projector desligará automaticamente.
3 Certifique-se de que o projector está instalado numa área bem ventilada.
4 Não bloqueie os orifícios de ventilação e as aberturas no projector.
5 Certifique-se de que o projector é sujeito somente a temperaturas ambiente (5ºC
a 35ºC).
NOTA: Para mais informações, consulte as informações de segurança que
foram facultadas em conjunto com o seu projector.
1 Painel de controlo
2 Botão de zoom
3 Anel de focagem
4 Lente
5 Botão de elevação
6 Receptor IV (Infravermelhos)
4
5
2
3
1
6Ligar o projector 7
2
Ligar o projector
ATENÇÃO: Antes de iniciar qualquer dos procedimentos desta secção, siga
as Instruções de Segurança conforme descrito em página 6 .
1 Conector de entrada DVI-D
2 Saída VGA-A (monitor loop-through)
3 Conector de entrada VGA-A (D-sub)
4 Conector de entrada VGA-B (D-sub)
5 Conector S-vídeo
6 Conector de vídeo composto
7 Conector de entrada de áudio
8 Conector de saída de áudio
9 Conector remoto USB
10 Conector RS232
11 Ranhura de cabo de segurança
12 Conector do cabo de alimentação
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2
11 12
Dell 1609WX
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
In8 Ligar o projector
Ligar um computador
Ligar um computador usando um cabo VGA
NOTA: O cabo USB não é fornecido pela Dell.
NOTA: O cabo USB deve estar conectado se pretender utilizar as
funcionalidades Página Seguinte e Página Anterior no controlo remoto.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo VGA para VGA
3 Cabo USB para USB
1
2
3
MOLEX
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
InLigar o projector 9
Ligar um computador usando um cabo DVI-D
NOTA: O cabo USb e o cabo DVI-D não são facultados pela Dell.
NOTA: O cabo USB deve estar conectado se pretender utilizar as
funcionalidades Página Seguinte e Página Anterior no controlo remoto
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo DVI-D
3 Cabo USB para USB
1
2
TV OUT
PDIF-OUT
SDIF-OUT
3
MOLEX
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
In10 Ligar o projector
Ligação a um computador com um cabo RS232
NOTA: O cabo RS232 não é fornecido pela Dell. Pode comprar o cabo RS232
(6ft (1,8m) a partir do sítio Web da Dell.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo RS232
1
2
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
InLigar o projector 11
Circuito de ligação de monitor usando cabos VGA
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo VGA para VGA
1
2 2
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
In12 Ligar o projector
Ligação a um leitor de DVD
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo S-vídeo
NOTA: O cabo S-Vídeo não é fornecido pela Dell. Pode comprar o cabo de
Extensão S-Vídeo (15mts/30mts) no sítio da Dell.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo S-vídeo
2
1
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
InLigar o projector 13
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo de sinal composto
NOTA: O cabo Composto não é fornecido pela Dell. Pode comprar o cabo de
Extensão Composto (15mts/30mts) no sítio da Dell.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo de sinal de vídeo composto
2
1
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
In14 Ligar o projector
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo de sinal componente
Usando um cabo YPbPr para VGA
NOTA: O cabo VGA para YPbPr não é fornecido pela Dell. Pode comprar o
cabo de Extensão VGA para YPbPr (15mts/30mts) no sítio da Dell.
NOTA: Pode conectar o cabo componente a uma Entrada VGA-A ou a uma
Entrada VGA-B.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo VGA para YPbPr
2
1
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
InLigar o projector 15
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo de sinal componente
Usando um Cabo YPbPr para YPbPr e um adaptador YPbPr para VGA
NOTA: O cabo YPbPr para YPbPr e o adaptador VGA para YPbPR não são
facultados pela Dell.
NOTA: Pode conectar o cabo componente a uma Entrada VGA-A ou a uma
Entrada VGA-B.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo YPbPr para YPbPr
3 Adaptador YPbPr para VGA
2
3
1
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
In16 Ligar o projector
Ligação a um leitor de DVD usando um cabo HDMI
NOTA: O cabo HDMI e o adaptador DVI-D não são facultados pela Dell.
1 Cabo de alimentação
2 Cabo de HDMI
3 Adaptador DVI-D
2
3
1
USB
Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out
Out
VGA - A
InUtilização do projector 17
3
Utilização do projector
Ligar o projector
NOTA: Ligue o projector antes de ligar a origem de sinal. O LED do botão de
alimentação fica azul e intermitente até ser premido.
1Remova a tampa da lente.
2 Ligue o cabo de alimentação e os cabos de sinal apropriados. Para mais
informações sobre a ligação do projector, consulte a secção Ligar o projector na
página 7.
3 Prima o botão de Alimentação do projector (consulte a secção Utilização do
painel de controlo na página 21 para localizar o botão Alimentação ).
4 Ligue a origem de sinal (computador, leitor de DVDs, etc.). O projector detecta
a origem de sinal automaticamente.
Se tiver várias origens de sinal ligadas ao projector, prima o botão Source no
controlo remoto ou no painel de controlo para seleccionar a origem de sinal
pretendida.
5 O logótipo Dell manter-se-á durante 30 segundos enquanto a alimentação
estiver ligada.
Se a mensagem "A procurar o sinal…" aparecer no ecrã, certifique-se de que os
cabos adequados estão correctamente ligados.
Desligar o projector
ADVERTÊNCIA: Deve desligar o projector antes de desligar o respectivo cabo
de alimentação.
1 Prima o botão Alimentação .
2 Prima o botão Alimentação novamente. As ventoinhas de arrefecimento
continuam a funcionar durante 90 segundos.
3 Para desligar o projector rapidamente, prima o botão Power (alimentação)
enquanto as ventoinhas de arrefecimento ainda estão em funcionamento.
NOTA: Antes de ligar o projector novamente, aguarde 60 segundos para
permitir que a temperatura interna estabilize.
4 Desligue o cabo de Alimentação da tomada eléctrica e desligue o projector.18 Utilização do projector
NOTA: Se premir o botão Alimentação enquanto o projector estiver em
funcionamento, a mensagem "Prima o Botão de Alimentação Para Desligar o
Projector" aparecerá no ecrã. Para fazer desaparecer a mensagem, prima o botão
Menu no painel de controlo ou ignore a mensagem; a mensagem desaparece após 5
segundos.
Ajuste da imagem projectada
Elevar o projector
1 Prima o botão de Elevação .
2 Eleve o projector até atingir o ângulo de projecção pretendido e, de seguida,
liberte o botão para fixar o pé de elevação nessa posição.
3 Utilize a roda de ajuste da inclinação para ajustar o ângulo de projecção.
Baixar o projector
1 Prima o botão de Elevação .
2 Baixe o projector e, a seguir, liberte o botão para fixar o pé elevatório na posição
escolhida.
1 Botão de elevação
2 Pé elevatório
3 Roda para ajuste da inclinação
1
3 3
2Utilização do projector 19
Ajuste do zoom e da focagem do projector
ATENÇÃO: Para evitar danos no projector, certifique-se de que a lente de
zoom e o pé elevatório estão completamente retraídos antes de mover o
projector ou antes de o colocar na respectiva mala de transporte.
1Rode o botão de zoom para aplicar mais zoom ou menos zoom.
2Rode o anel de focagem até a imagem ficar nítida. O projector focaliza a partir
de distâncias compreendidas entre 1,0 m e 12 m (3,3 pés e 39,4 pés).
1 Botão de zoom
2 Anel de focagem
1
220 Utilização do projector
Ajuste do tamanho da imagem projectada
327,7"
(832,4cm)
245,8"
(624,3cm)
191,2"
(485,6cm)
136,6"
(346,8cm)
81,9"
(208,1cm)
27,3"
(69,4cm)
359,4"(913,0cm)
269,6"(684,7cm)
209,7"(532,6cm)
149,8"(380,4cm)
89,9"(228,2cm) Projector to screen distance
30,0 "(76,1cm)
39,4'(12,0m)
29,5'(9,0m)
23,0'(7,0m)
16,4'(5,0m)
9,8'(3,0m)
3,3'(1,0m)
Dell 1609WX
USB Remote
DVI-D In VGA - B S-Video In Video In RS-232
In
VGA - A Audio In Audio Out Out
VGA - A
InUtilização do projector 21
Utilização do painel de controlo
Ecrã
(Diagonal)
Máx. 30,0"
(76,1cm)
89,9"
(228,2cm)
149,8"
(380,4cm)
209,7"
(532,6cm)
269,6"
(684,7cm)
359,4"
(913,0cm)
Mín. 27,3"
(69,4cm)
81,9"
(208,1cm)
136,6"
(346,8cm)
191,2"
(485,6cm)
245,8"
(624,3cm)
327,7" (832,4
cm)
Tamanho
do ecrã
Máx.
(LxA)
25,4" X 15,9" 76,2" X 47,6" 127" X 79,4" 177,8" X 111,1" 228,8" X 142,9" 304,8" X 190,5"
(64,5cm X
40,3cm)
(193,5cm X
121,0cm)
(322,6cm X
201,6cm)
(451,6cm X
282,3cm)
(580,6cm X
362,9cm)
(774,2cm X
483,9cm)
Mín.
(LxA)
23,2" X 14,5" 69,5" X 43,4" 115,8" X 72,4" 162,1" X 101,3" 208,4" X 130,3" 277,9" X 173,7"
(58,8cm X
36,8cm)
(176,5cm X
110,3cm)
(294,1cm X
183,8cm)
(411,8cm X
257,4cm)
(529,4cm X
330,9cm)
(705,9cm X
441,2cm)
Hd
Máx. 1,97"
(5,0cm)
5,91"
(15,0cm)
9,84"
(25,0cm)
13,78"
(35,0cm)
17,72"
(45,0cm)
23,62"
(60,0cm)
Mín. 1,79"
(4,56cm)
5,38"
(13,68cm)
8,97"
(22,79cm)
12,56"
(31,91cm)
16,15"
(41,03cm)
21,54"
(54,71 cm)
Distância 3,3' (1,0m) 9,8' (3,0m) 16,4' (5,0m) 23,0' (7,0m) 29,5' (9,0m) 39,4' (12,0m)
* Este gráfico serve apenas de referência ao utilizador.
1 3
5
2
7
1010
9
4
8
622 Utilização do projector
1 LED LAMP (lâmpada) • Se o LED LAMP ficar âmbar, substitua a
lâmpada (consulte a secção Substituição da
lâmpada na página 41). Se o problema persistir,
contacte a Dell (consulte a secção Como
contactar a Dell na página 47).
• Se o LED LAMP ficar âmbar e intermitente, o
projector desliga-se automaticamente como
sinal de que existe uma falha do sistema. Se o
problema persistir, contacte a Dell (consulte a
secção Como contactar a Dell na página 47).
2 LED TEMP
(temperatura)
• Uma luz TEMP estável indica que o projector,
lâmpada, ou controlador da lâmpada
sobreaqueceram. O projector desliga-se
automaticamente. Volte a ligá-lo após
arrefecimento do mesmo. Se o problema
persistir, contacte a Dell. (consulte a secção
Como contactar a Dell na página 47).
• Se o LED TEMP ficar âmbar intermitente é
sinal de que houve uma falha numa das
ventoinhas do projector ou na roda de cor